840 USE 100 00 v80
840 USE 100 00 v80
840 USE 100 00 v80
Version 8.0
II
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
1
2
3
4
4
5
7
7
8
8
Quantum Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Quantum Local I/O, Remote I/O and Distributed I/O Configurations. . . . . . . . . . 10
Quantum Local I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Quantum Remote I/O (RIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
19
20
23
27
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Quantum AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A Module (140 CPS 114 00) . . . . 53
Quantum AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 8 A (140 CPS 114 10) . . 57
Quantum AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 8 A Module (140 CPS 124 00)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Quantum DC Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 3 A Module (140 CPS 211 00) . . . . . . . . . 63
Quantum DC Summable Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A (140 CPS 214 00) . . . . . . 66
Quantum DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module (140 CPS 224 00) 69
Quantum DC Summable Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module (140 CPS 414 00) 72
Quantum DC Redundant Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module (140 CPS 424 00) 76
Quantum DC Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A Module (140 CPS 511 00) . . . . . . . . 79
Quantum DC Standalone/Redundant Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 8 A (140 CPS 524 00)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Chapter 7
CPU Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Quantum CPU Module (140 CPU 113 02). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Quantum CPU Module (140 CPU 113 03). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Quantum CPU Module (140 CPU 213 04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Quantum CPU Module (140 CPU 424 02). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Quantum CPU Module (140 CPU 434 12). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Quantum 434 PLC Controller (140 CPU 434 12A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Quantum CPU Module (140 CPU 534 14). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Quantum 534 PLC Controller (140 CPU 534 14A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
Chapter 11
Chapter 12
IV
Chapter 13
Chapter 14
247
248
252
256
259
265
Chapter 15
Chapter 16
321
322
329
342
350
356
Chapter 17
Chapter 18
377
380
394
398
403
407
412
418
422
V
Quantum I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module (140 AVI 030 00) . . . . . . . . 427
Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module (140 AVO 020 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Quantum I/O 24 VAC IN Module (140 DAI 340 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Quantum I/O AC Input 24 Vac Module (140 DAI 353 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
140 DSI 353 00 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Quantum I/O 48 VAC IN Module (140 DAI 440 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Quantum I/O AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 Module (140 DAI 453 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Quantum I/O 115 VAC In Module (140 DAI 540 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 Module (140 DAI 543 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 Module (140 DAI 553 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Quantum I/O AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 Module (140 DAI 740 00) . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Quantum I/O AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 Module (140 DAI 753 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 (140 DAM 590 00)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1 Module (140 DAO 840 00) . . . . . 485
Quantum I/O 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1 Module (140 DAO 840 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Quantum I/O AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4 Module (140 DAO 842 10) . . . . . 495
Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ... 48 Vac 4x4 Module (140 DAO 842 20) . . . . . . . 501
Quantum I/O AC Output 230 Vac 4x8 Module (140 DAO 853 00). . . . . . . . . . . 507
Quantum I/O DC Input 5 V TTL 4x8 Source Module (140 DDI 153 10). . . . . . . 513
Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vac 4x8 Sink Module (140 DDI 353 00). . . . . . . . . . 517
Quantum I/O 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Input Module (140 DDI 353 10) . . . . . . . . . 521
Quantum 24 VDC 6 X 16 Telefast Input Module (140 DDI 364 00) . . . . . . . . . . 524
DC Input 125 Vdc 3x8 Sink Module (140 DDI 673 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink Module (140 DDI 841 00) . . . . . 536
Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module (140 DDI 853 00) . . . . . 540
Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink / DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source Module (140
DDM 390 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Quantum I/O 125 VDC Input/High Power Output Module (140 DDM 690 00) . . 551
Quantum I/O DC Output 5 V TTL 4x8 Sink Module (140 DDO 153 10). . . . . . . 558
Quantum I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source Module (140 DDO 353 00) . . . . . 562
Quantum 24 VDC 4 X 8 Discrete Output Module (140 DDO 353 01) . . . . . . . . 567
Quantum I/O 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Output Module (140 DDO 353 10) . . . . . . 572
Quantum 24VDC 6X16 Telefast Output Module (140 DDO 364 00) . . . . . . . . 577
Quantum I/O DC Output 10 ... 60 Vdc 2x8 Source Module (140 DDO 843 00). 584
Quantum I/O DC Output 24 - 125 Vdc 2x6 Source Module (140 DDO 885 00). 588
Quantum I/O Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open Module (140 DRA 840 00) . . 595
Quantum I/O Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open / Normally Closed (140 DRC 830 00)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Quantum 24V Supervised In I/O Module (140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSI 353 00)605
Quantum Verified 10-30 VDC Out I/O Module (140 DVO 853 00). . . . . . . . . . . 610
Appendices
Appendix A
VI
..............................................
661
At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Miscellaneous Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
TSX Quantum Automation Series 140 XBE 100 00 Backplane Expander . . . . 630
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D
Appendix E
637
638
645
649
651
657
658
670
675
677
Appendix F
763
764
771
776
784
797
803
810
823
835
845
VII
Appendix F11 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block (140 CFK 004 00) . . . . . . 855
CableFast Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
Appendix F13 CableFast Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Appendix G
Appendix H
Index
VIII
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
IX
At a Glance
Document Scope
Validity Note
The data and illustrations found in this book are not binding. We reserve the right to
modify our products in line with our policy of continuous product developement. The
information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commintment by Schneider electric.
Product Related
Warnings
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when
installing ans using this product. For reasons of safety and to assure compliance
with documented system data, repairs to components should be performed only by
the manufacturer.
User Comments
We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at
TECHCOMM@modicon.com
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter provides an overview of the Quantum TSX Automation System which
includes Quantum software support.
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
2
Quantum Overview
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Quantum System
Block Diagram
Power Supply
CPU
I/O
I/O Network Interface
Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O
Simulator (XSM)
Battery
Backplanes
CableFast Cabling
Ethernet TCP/IP
RIO
Drop
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
MB+
Tap
RIO Coaxial
Cable
Power RIO
Sup- Drop
ply
MB+
Tap
I/O
RIO Drop
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
RIO
Tap
Quantum Overview
Quantum power supplies are used to supply system power to all modules inserted
into the backplane, including:
Usage
Standalone
Standalone Summable
Redundant
CAUTION
System Safety
Do not use a combination of power supplies in a backplane, use only
like power supplies (Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and
DC Powered Systems, p. 658see Appendix D for power and grounding
guidelines).
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Quantum Overview
The Quantum CPU is a module residing on the Quantum local I/O backplane. The
CPU is a digitally operating electronic system, which uses a programmable memory
for the internal storage of user instructions. These instructions are used to
implement specific functions such as:
l
l
l
l
l
Logic
Process sequencing
Timing
Coupling
Arithmetic
These instructions allow control through digital and analog outputs, for various types
of machines and processes.
The Quantum CPU serves as a bus master controlling the local, remote, and
distributed I/O of the Quantum system.
Quantum I/O modules are electrical signal converters which convert signals to and
from field devices to a signal level and format which can be processed by the CPU,
such as:
l
l
l
l
l
Limit switches
Proximity switches
Temperature sensors
Solenoids
Valve actuators
All I/O modules are optically isolated to the bus, ensuring safe and trouble-free
operation.
All I/O modules are also software configurable.
Quantum Overview
Nine types of network interface modules are available and presented in the table
below and are described in the following text.
Network
Interface
Modules Table
Description
RIO
Single and dual channel Remote I/O interface modules (RIO heads and drops)
connected via a coaxial cable network.
DIO
Single and dual channel Distributed I/O interface modules connected via a
twisted pair Modbus Plus cable network.
Twisted Pair
Modbus Plus
Single and dual channel Network Option Modules (NOM) connected via a
twisted pair Modbus Plus cable network.
Fiber Optic
Modbus Plus
Modbus Plus on fiber module connected via a fiber optic Modbus Plus cable
network.
Ethernet TCP/ Single channel Ethernet TCP/IP interface module connected via a twisted pair
IP
or fiber optic cable network.
InterBus
SY/MAX
Ethernet
SY/MAX Ethernet module connected via a twisted pair or fiber optic cable
network.
LonWorks
MMS Ethernet MMS Ethernet module connected via a fiber optic cable network.
RIO Modules
(CRA/CRP)
Quantum RIO head and drop modules use a S908-based networking I/O
configuration. Communication is done via single or dual coaxial cabling up to 15,000
feet away. This configuration supports a mix of the following product lines:
l
l
l
l
l
SY/MAX
200 Series
500 Series
800 Series
Quantum I/O
When Quantum RIO is required, the Quantum controller may support up to 31 RIO
drops. In an RIO configuration, an RIO head module is connected with coaxial cable
to RIO drop modules at each remote drop.
Quantum Overview
DIO Module
(CRA)
Quantum DIO is implemented over a Modbus Plus network. The CPU or NOMs
module may be the network head via their Modbus Plus ports.
Quantum DIO Modbus Plus drop adaptors are specifically designed to link Quantum
I/O modules to the head via twisted pair shielded cable (Modbus Plus). The DIO
drop modules also provide the I/O with power (maximum 3A) from a 24 Vdc or a 115/
230 Vac source. Each DIO network supports up to 63 distributed drops using
repeaters.
Network Option
Module (NOM)
(Twisted Pair)
Modbus Plus on
Fiber Module
Ethernet TCP/IP
(NOE) Modules
SY/MAX Ethernet
Modules
MMS-Ethernet
Modules
InterBus
Interface Module
(NOA)
The Quantum InterBus is the interface module to the InterBus bus. The InterBus bus
is a fieldbus network designed for I/O blocks and intelligent devices used in
manufacturing. It offers a master/slave topology which permits deterministic I/O
servicing over its 13 km twisted pair network.
Quantum Overview
LonWorks
Modules (NOL)
l
l
l
l
l
Discrete and
Analog
Simulators Table
Description
Discrete 16 Point
The Discrete Simulator (16 points) is used to generate up to 16
Simulator (140 XSM 010 binary input signals to the 140 DAI 540 00 and the 140 DAI 740
00)
00 AC input modules.
Analog Simulator (140
XSM 010 00)
Quantum Overview
The Quantum battery module provides RAM backup power for the Quantum expert
module.
Backplanes
(XBP)
CableFast
Cabling
The Quantum CableFast wiring system consists of pre-wired Quantum field wiring
terminal strips and DIN rail-mounted terminal blocks, offered in straight through or
special application versions.
Quantum Editors
Table
The following table shows the editors for the Quantum controllers.
Where Discussed
Modsoft V2.6
Concept V2.5
Editor
Quantum Configurations
At a Glance
Introduction
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
10
13
12
17
Quantum Configurations
The following information contains a description of the Local I/O, Remote I/O and
Distributed I/O and their configurations.
These configurations (see the configuration table below for valid Quantum
configurations) can be equipped with a combination of:
l
l
l
l
l
Quantum CPUs
Power supplies
I/O interfaces
Expert modules
I/O modules
Note: Refer to System Specifications for the Quantum Module , p. 31Chapter 4 for
a complete list of part numbers for all Quantum modules.
Required
Modules Are
Optional
Modules Are
Modules Not
Permitted Are
Local
6, 10, 16 slots
Power Supply
CPU
RIO**
6, 10, 16 slots
Power Supply
RIO Drop
I/O
DIO
2, 3, 4, 6 slots
DIO Drop
* NOM, NOA, and NOE ** Remote I/O is typically used for large (number of modules)
drops 6, 10, or 16 slot backplanes. Distributed I/O is typically used for small drops
using 2, 3, 4, or 6 slot backplanes.
Note: Every Quantum module requires power from the backplane (except power
supply and DIO modules). For a valid configuration, add up the required backplane
current (in mA) for every module, and ensure that this number is less than the
available power in the selected power supply.
10
Quantum Configurations
The following table shows features of the Local, Remote and Distributed I/O
configurations.
Feature
Configuration
Local I/O
Remote I/O
Distributed I/O
64 in / 64 out
64 in / 64 out
30 in / 32 out
Per network
Maximum Desecrates
Per drop
Per network
Maximum Analogs
Per drop
56 in / 28 out
56 in / 28 out
24 in / 32 out
10, 16 slots
2, 3, 4 slots
Coax
Twisted Pair
Speed
1.5 Mhz
1 MHz
Maximum distance
without repeaters
Yes
No
No
Yes
Hot Standby
Yes
No
Modbus Plus
compatible
No
Yes
31
63
Per network
Typical Backplanes
Media
support
6, 10 slots
11
Quantum Configurations
A local I/O configuration is contained in one rack and includes all Quantum modules
mounted in a standard Quantum backplane. Quantum Local I/O can be as few as
one I/O module (in a three slot backplane), or as many as 14, along with a CPU and
power supply in a single 16 slot backplane.
If required for the application, system interface modules are also included in the
Local I/O backplane. These modules could consist of one RIO processor or network
option modules.
I/O Configuration
Figure
2 Slot
3 Slot
4 Slot
6 Slot
10 Slot
16 Slot
Note: A maximum of 448 digital I/O points (14, 4x8 digital I/O modules), or a
maximum of 48 analog input channels (6, 8 channel analog in modules) and 32
analog output channels (8, 4 channel analog out modules) may be serviced in a
local I/O rack.
12
Quantum Configurations
Quantum RIO can be set-up in single or dual cable configurations (refer to the
following two figures) and is contained in one rack at each RIO drop. When RIO is
used, the Quantum CPU may support several drops (a drop can be either Quantum,
SY/MAX, 200, 500, or 800 Series I/O systems).
Note: As stated above, the Quantum provides connectivity to other Modicon I/O
products via the same system. It will connect to 800 series I/O via the J890, J892,
P890, or P892 remote I/O adapters; 200 series I/O via J290 and J291 remote I/O
adapters; 500 series I/O via 29X/J540 remote I/O adapters; and SY/MAX
8030CRM931
Local I/O
Drop
Up to 31
Terminator
*RIO Tap
*RIO Tap
RIO
RIO Drop # m
*RIO Tap
RIO
RIO Drop # n
P81
J890
B800 Series
13
Quantum Configurations
RIO
Up to 31
*RIO
Tap
*RIO
Tap
*RIO
*RIO
RIO
RIO Drop # m
RIO Drop # n
P81
J890
B800 Series
Note: The dual cable option is provided for systems that require added protection
against cable breaks or damaged connectors. With two cables connected between
the host and each node, no single cable break will disrupt communications.
Hot Standby
System
14
The Quantum Hot Standby system is designed for use with remote I/O networks. A
Quantum Hot Standby system may be set-up using single or dual cable
configurations (refer to the following two figures).
Quantum Configurations
Standby Controller
PS PLC RIO CHS
Self-terminating F adapter
#52-0411-000
(for quad shield cable)
#52-0399-000
(for non-quad shield cable)
Coaxial Cable
Splitter
#MA-0186-100
RIO Drop # 2
PS
RIO
I/O
I/O
I/O
Trunk
Cable
Trunk Terminator
#52-0422-000
Tap
#MA-0185-100
PS
RIO
I/O
I/O
I/O
Tap
Drop Cable
15
Quantum Configurations
Standby PCL
PS
Coaxial Cable
Coaxial Cable
Splitter
#MA-0186-100
PS
RIO Drop # 2
RIO I/O I/O
I/O
Trunk
Line
A
Drop Cable
Splitter #MA-0186-100
Self-terminating F
adapters
#52-0411-000
(for quad shield cable)
#52-0399-000
Trunk
Line
B
Tap
PS
I/O
Trunk Terminator
Trunk Terminator
16
Drop Cable
Quantum Configurations
Quantum DIO can be set up in standard single or dual cable configurations (refer to
the following two figures). The Quantum DIO architecture is based on Modicons
Modbus Plus technology. When DIO is utilized, the Quantum system may support
up to three distributed networks of up to 64 drops (using a repeater) each.
Communication between the various nodes and the Modbus Plus head, in both
single and dual cable DIO configurations, is done by twisted pair cabling from the
head to the DIO adapters at the drops.
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
Local I/O
* Tap
DIO I/O
Drop
I/O
DIO I/O
Drop
I/O
I/O
Quantum Drop # n
Quantum Drop # m
** Drop
I/O
** Drop
17
Quantum Configurations
* Tap
* Tap
* Tap
* Tap
Quantum Drop # n
Quantum Drop # m
** Drop Cables
** Drop Cables
Note: The dual cable option is provided for systems that require added protection
against cable breaks or damaged connectors. With two cables connected between
the host and each node, no single cable break will disrupt communications.
18
At a Glance
Introduction
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
23
20
27
19
Network Configurations
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Modbus
Modbus Plus
Remote I/O
TCP/IP Ethernet
SY/MAX Ethernet
MMS Ethernet
Interbus
LonWorks
SERCOS
20
Network Configurations
Quantum
Supported
Networks Table
Ethernet
Interb
us
TCP/
IP
SY/
MAX
MMS
N
LonW SERCOS
orks
Native to
Quantum
CPU
Available
on a
Network
Module
CPU
Programmi
ng
CPU
Executive
Firmware
Loading
Support
Module
Firmware
Loaded
From CPU
Report By
Exception
Communic
ations
yY
Multi-node
Broadcast
Communic
ations
Synchroniz
ed I/O
Scanning
NonSynchr
onized I/O
Scanning
Quantum I/
O Drops
21
Network Configurations
Hot
Standby
Quantum
I/O Drop
Support
Hot
Standby
Data
Communic
ations
Support
Optional
Dual
Cabling
Optional
Fiber
Optics
Momentum
I/O Drops
Variable
Speed
Drives
Servo
Motion
Control
HMI:
Displays &
Panels
HMI: Work- Y
stations
Y
3
3, 5
N
3
N
4
1. Refer to the Modbus Plus portion of the Quantum Specifiers guide section for details of
available services on 140NOM2XXX00 Modbus Plus Network modules. 2. Service is only
available on the native controller Modbus port when the XMIT loadable is used. 3. Available
from third parties. 4. The SERCOS network standard is fiber optics. 5. The software for this
module is a modConnect product. 6. Module firmware loaded through serial port on module.
22
Network Configurations
Direct CPU
Driver
This technique allows the CPU to control high speed data transfers to and from the
communication and networking modules, maximizing throughput and performance.
This technique is used extensively by the Remote I/O network and Hot Standby
system to ensure highly deterministic synchronization of the CPU and I/O scans.
Note: Only one Remote I/O Head Interface is supported for each Quantum CPU.
Option Module
Interface
This technique allows the communication and networking modules to control data
transfers to and from the CPU, maximizing the flexibility of the communications
interface.
This technique is used extensively by the Modbus Plus and Ethernet peer-to-peer
network modules. The number of option module interfaces supported by each CPU
model is described in the following table.
CPU Interface
Support Table
The following table shows the summary of Quantum CPU option module interface
support.
Quantum Controller Model
Number
140CPU53414
140CPU43412
140CPU42402
140CPU21304
140CPU11303
140CPU11302
Note: Refer to the Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications, p. 27 for
details of available services on 140 NOM 2XX 00 Modbus Plus Network modules.
23
Network Configurations
Some network and communication modules are interfaced to the controller through
the standard I/O map configuration tables.
In the following table, note that some network and communications modules require
a Loadable instruction which enhances the standard controller Executive to support
certain unique features of individual modules.
In addition, some loadables allow the communication and networking modules to be
controlled by means of user-application code.
The number of loadables and associated modules that can be handled by an
individual CPU depends upon its memory size, the size of the application program,
and the size of the loadables.
24
Network Configurations
Communications
and Networking
Table
The following table shows the Quantum communications and networking modules.
Model Number
Description
Module
Interface
Technique
Loadable
Required
Backplane Support
Local
RIO
Bus
Power
mA
DIO
140CRP93100
Remote I/O
Direct CPU N
Head Interface, Driver
single cable
780
140CRP93200
Remote I/O
Direct CPU N
Head Interface, Driver
dual cable
780
140CHS21000
Hot Standby
Processor Kit
Direct CPU Y
Driver
700
140NOA61110
700
140NOM21100
Modbus Plus
Options, single
cable
Option
Module
780
140NOM21200
Modbus Plus
Option, dual
cable
Option
Module
780
140NOM25200
Modbus Plus
Option, single
channel fiber
Option
Module
900
140NOE21100
Ethernet TCP/
IP Twisted Pair
Option
Module
1000
140NOE25100
Ethernet TCP/
IP Fiber Optic
Option
Module
1000
140NOE31100
Ethernet SY/
MAX Twisted
Pair
Option
Module
1000
140NOE35100
Ethernet SY/
MAX Fiber
Optic
Option
Module
1000
Ethernet MMS
Twisted Pair
Option
Module
1000
Ethernet MMS
Fiber Optic
Option
Module
1000
140NOE510 0
140NOE5510 0
25
Network Configurations
140MMS42500
Multi-Axis
Motion
Controller w/
SERCOS
Option
Module
2500
140NOL91100
LonWorks
Interface,
twisted pair
FTT10
I/O Map
(16/16)
950
140NOL91110
LonWorks
Interface,
twisted pair
TPT/XF-78
I/O Map
(16/16)
950
140NOL91120
LonWorks
Interface,
twisted pair
TPT/XF-1250
I/O Map
(16/16)
950
26
Network Configurations
Each Quantum CPU includes both a Modbus and Modbus Plus communications
port. The features offered by both these communication protocols are listed in the
following table.
Modbus and
Modbus Plus
Features Table
The following table shows the Modbus and Modbus Plus features.
Features
Modbus
Modbus Plus
Technique
Speed
19.2K typical
1M
Electrical
RS-485
Media
Various
247
64
20,000 registers/sec
Programming
Yes
Yes
Yes
Global data
No
Yes
Peer Cop
Modbus
Yes
Read/Write data
No
Yes
27
Network Configurations
Modbus Plus
28
Network Configurations
Modbus and
Modbus Plus
Services Table
The following table shows the Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus services.
Type
Native CPU
Ports
NOM 1-2
Ports
Mod
bus
Mod
bus
Plus
Mod
bus
Plus
Modbus
Services
Service Description
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
NOM 3-6
Ports1
CPU Programming
Modbus
Plus
services
messagin g
Y
Y
Y
N
29
Network Configurations
30
All modules are designed to the following system specifications, which include:
l Mechanical
l Electrical
l AC/DC power supplies
It shows the I/O modules operating voltages for:
Dimensions (H x D x W)
Wire Size
Lexan
Space Requirements
Electrical
Specifications
Table
1 backplane slot
2 kV shield to ground
8 kV air / 4 kV contact
Flammability
31
System Specifications
AC/DC Power
Supplies Table
The following table shows the Quantum function I/O modules with operating
voltages less than 24 Vac or Vdc.
Fast Transients (IEC 1000-4-4)
Damped Oscillatory Transients
The following table shows the Quantum I/O modules with operating voltages
between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc.
Fast Transients (IEC 1000-4-4)
Damped Oscillatory Transients
2 kV common mode.
kV differential mode
1 kV
The following table shows the Quantum I/O modules with operating voltages greater
than 48 Vac or Vdc.
Fast Transients (IEC 1000-4-4)
2 kV common mode.1 kV
differential mode
32
2 kV
2 kV common mode. 1 kV
differential mode
System Specifications
Operating
Conditions
Humidity
Chemical Interactions
Altitude
2,000 meters
Vibration
Storage
Conditions
Shock
Humidity
Free Fall
Agency
Approvals
Temperature
3 ft. (1 m)
33
System Specifications
34
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter provides information and part numbers on the Quantum hardware
specifications.
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
36
44
35
Hardware Specifications
This section shows the hardware specifications for power supplies modules
including:
l
l
l
l
Power Supply
Specifications
Table
CPUs
Networking
Intelligent/Special Purpose
I/O Modules
The following table shows the power supplies for local and RIO Drops.
Source Voltage
Type
Standalone
3A
Standalone
8A
Standalone/
Summable
8A
Standalone/
Redundant
3A
24 Vdc
Standalone
3A
24 Vdc
Standalone/
Summable
8A
24 Vdc
Standalone/
Redundant
8A
48 Vdc
Standalone
8A
48 Vdc
Redundant
8A
Standalone
3A
36
Part Numbers
125 Vdc
Standalone/
Redundant
8A
Hardware Specifications
CPU
Specification
Table
SRAM
Size
Ladder
Logic
Available
Registers
Bus Current
Required
109 k
256 k
8k
10 k
780 mA
368 k
512 k
16 k
10 k
790 mA
606 k
768 k
32 k or 48
k
64 k or 32 k
900 mA
570 k
2M
64 k
64 k
1.8 A
846 k
2M
64 k
57 k
1.8 A
Networking
Modules Tables RIO
Part Numbers
2.5 M
4M
64 k
57 k
1.8 A
The following table shows the power supplies for RIO Networking Modules.
Drop Location
Communication
Channel(s)
Bus Current
Provided
Remote (Drop)
600 mA
Remote (Drop)
750 mA
Local (Head)
600 mA
Networking
Modules - DIO
Local (Head)
750 mA
The following table shows the power supplies for DIO Networking Modules.
Source Voltage
Communication
Channel(s)
Bus Current
Provided
115 Vac
3A
115 Vac
3A
24 Vdc
3A
24 Vdc
3A
37
Hardware Specifications
Networking
Modules - NOA
and NOE
The following table shows the power supplies for NOA and NOE Networking
Modules.
Communication Channels
Bus Current
Required
700 mA
700 mA
Networking
Modules - NOL
Part Numbers
(NOA and NOE)
1A
1A
1A
The following table shows the power supplies for NOL Networking Modules.
Communication Channels
Bus Current
Required
mA
mA
Networking
Modules - NOM
mA
The following table shows the power supplies for NOM Networking Modules.
Communication
Channels
Bus Current
Required
780 mA
780 mA
38
780 mA
Hardware Specifications
Intelligent/
Special Purpose
Tables - Hot
Standby Module
The following table shows the power supplies for the Hot Standby Module.
Communication
Channel
Counter Module
Table
Part Number
Fiber Optic
700 mA
The following table shows the power supplies for the Counter Modules.
Function
Points/
Intefaces
Channels
High Speed
Counter
(100 kHz)
8 DI/8 DO @ 250 mA
24 Vdc
35 kHz @ 24 Vdc
100 kHz @ 5 Vdc
ASCII Interface
Module Table
Bus
Current
Required
Special Features
Part Number
High Speed
Counter
(500 kHz)
2 DI/2DO @
24 Vdc
500 kHz,
Incremental or
Quadrature
650 mA
The following table shows the power supplies for the ASCII Interface Module.
Function
Communication
Channels
Bus
Current
Required
Special Features
High Speed
Interrupt Module
Table
Part Numbers
Intelligent, Bidirectional,
ASCII Interface
300 mA
The following table shows the power supplies for the High Speed Interrupt Module.
Function
Points/
Channels
Part Number
16
400 mA
Isolated
39
Hardware Specifications
Single Axis
Motion Modules
Table
The following table shows the power supplies for the Single Axis Motion Modules.
Function
Channels
Bus Current
Required
Special
Features
Motion Controller,
Single Axis Bidirectional, ASCII
Interface
750 mA
Dual Encoder
Feedback
Part Numbers
Motion Controller,
Single Axis
1000 mA
Dual Encoder
Feedback and
Resolver
Feedback
The following table shows the power supplies for the Discrete In module.
Points/
Channels
Points per
Common
24 Vac
16
180 mA
Isolated
24 Vac
32
250 mA
Grouped
48 Vac
16
180 mA
Isolated
48 Vac
32
250 mA
Grouped
115 Vac
16
180 mA
Isolated
115 Vac
16
180 mA
Grouped
115 Vac
32
250 mA
Grouped
230 Vac
16
180 mA
Grouped
230 Vac
32
250 mA
Grouped
5 Vdc
32
170 mA
Grouped
24 Vdc
32
330 mA
Grouped
24 Vdc
32
330 mA
Grouped
125 Vdc
24
200 mA
Grouped
10 ... 60 Vdc
16
200 mA
Grouped
40
10 ... 60 Vdc
32
300 mA
Grouped
Hardware Specifications
The following table shows the power supplies for the Discrete Out module.
Function
Points/
Channels
16
350 mA
4 A per
point,
isolated
16
350 mA
4 A per
point,
isolated
16
350 mA
4 A per
point, group
fused
24 ... 48 Vac
16
350 mA
4 A per
point, group
fused
230 Vac
32
350 mA
4 A per
point, group
fused
5 Vdc
32
350 mA
0.5 A per
point, group
fused
24 Vdc
32
330 mA
0.5 A per
point, group
fused
24 Vdc
32
330 mA
0.5 A per
point, group
fused
10 ... 60 Vdc
16
160 mA
2 A per
point, group
fused
12
6 points:
375 mA12
points: 650
mA
0.5 A per
point with
short circuit
protection
N.O. Relay
16
1,100 mA
2 A per point
Type/Part Number
N.O./N.C. Relay
560 mA
5 A per point
41
Hardware Specifications
The following table shows the power supplies for the Discrete In/Out modules.
115 Vac
16 In 8
Out
44
250 mA
24 Vdc
16 In 8
Out
44
330 mA
125 Vdc
4 In 4 Out 44
350 mA
Inputs:
Grouped
Outputs: 4 A
per point
isolated
The following table shows the power supplies for the Analog In/Out module.
Function
Points/
Channels
Points
per
Common
Inputs +/- 10
Vdc, +/- 5
Vdc, +/- 20
mA, 0 ... 10
Vdc, 0 ... 5
Vdc, 0 ... 20
mA, 1 ... 5
Vdc, 4 ... 20
mA
4 In
350 mA
Outputs 4 ...
20 mA
42
Type/Part Number
2 Out
16 bit resolution
(14 @ 1 ... 5 V)
Channels
isolated,12 bit
resolution
Hardware Specifications
I/O Modules
Analog In Table
The following table shows the power supplies for the Analog In module.
Function
Points/
Channels
Points
per
Common
Bus Current
Required
Special Features
4 ... 20 mA, 1
... 5 Vdc
240 mA
12 bit resolution
200 mA
12 bit resolution,
(Replaces ARI
030 00)
0 ... 20 mA, +/ 8
- 20 mA, +/10 Vdc, +/-5
Vdc
280 mA
16 bit resolution
(14 @1 ... 5 V)
I/O Modules
Analog Out Table
T/C: B, E, J,
K, R, S, T
280 mA
16 bit resolution
The following table shows the power supplies for the Analog Out module.
Function
Points/
Channels
Special
Features
4 ... 20 mA
480 mA
Channels
isolated,12 bit
resolution
0 ... 10 Vdc, +/ 4
- 10 Vdc, 0
... 5 Vdc, +/- 5
Vdc
700 mA
12 bit resolution
43
Hardware Specifications
Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose Hot Standby Module (140 CHS 110 00)
Overview
This section describes the Intelligent/Special Purpose Hot Standby Module CHS
110 00.
Hot Standby
Module Figure
The following figure shows the intelligent/special purpose hot standby module CHS
110 00 components.
LED Display
140
CHS 110 00
controller
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable door
Customer Identification
Label (Fold label and place
it inside door)
Keyswitch
A/B Designation Slide Switch
Program Update Button
Transmit Cable Connector
Receive Cable Connector
X
Specifications
Table
The Quantum Hot Standby system is designed for use with remote I/O networks
when downtime cannot be tolerated.
The following table shows the specifications for hot standby system.
I/O Type
Quantum
Compatibility
Programming Software
Quantum Controllers
44
700 mA
Hardware Specifications
LED Indicators
Figure
Ready
Com Err
Com Act
Primary
Standby
LED
Descriptions
Table
Indication when On
Ready
Green
Com Act
Green
Primary
Green
Com Err
Red
Standby
LEDs
Amber
45
Hardware Specifications
Error Codes
Table
The following table shows the number of times the Com Act LED blinks for each type
of error and the codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex).
Number of Blinks
Code
Error
6900
6801
6802
6803
6804
6604
6605
6503
6402
6301
C101
no hook timeout
C102
46
C200
Front Panel
Controls
C103
powerup error
The Hot Standby module has three controls on the front panel: a function keyswitch,
a designation slide switch, and an update button.
Hardware Specifications
Keyswitch and
Program Update
Button
The following figure shows the keyswitch and program update button.
Off line
Xfer
Run
The keyswitch has three positions: off line, xfer, and run:
l Off line - Putting the key in this position takes the controller out of service.
l Xfer - When the key on the standby unit is in this position, the standby is prepared
to receive a full program update from the primary controller. The update is
initiated by pressing the update button, which is located on the front panel
between the function keyswitch and the cable connectors. If you turn the key on
the primary unit to xfer, the system will ignore your action.
l Run - The switch should be in this position except when initiating a full program
update or taking the module off line.
A/B Designation
Slide Switch
The slide switch is used to designate the controller as A or B. The slide switch on
one Hot Standby module in every pair must be set to A; the switch on the other must
be set to B. The controller designated A will begin as the primary controller as long
as it reaches the ready state before or at the same time as controller B. If the
switches are set to the same position, the system will refuse to recognize the second
controller at startup.
The following figure shows the A/B designation slide switch.
A
47
Hardware Specifications
48
Power Supplies
Overview
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
50
Quantum AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A Module (140 CPS 114 00)
57
60
63
66
Quantum DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module (140 CPS 224 00)
69
Quantum DC Summable Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module (140 CPS 414 00)
72
Quantum DC Redundant Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module (140 CPS 424 00)
76
Quantum DC Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A Module (140 CPS 511 00)
79
53
Quantum AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 8 A (140 CPS 114 10)
82
49
Power Supplies
Quantum AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3, A Module (140 CPS 111 00)
Overview
Power Supply
Figure
140
CPS 214 00
PS 24 vdc
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Connector
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alarm
Relay
24Vdc24Vdc+
+
cap
-
Note: When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that
should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.
50
Power Supplies
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the PS 115/230 VAC power supply
module.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
Input Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
Input Current
Inrush Current
VA Rating
50 VA
Fusing (external)
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Maximum Current
3A
Minimum Current
0.3 A
Protection
General
Field Wiring Connector
(included)
Internal Power Dissipation
Operating Mode
Standalone
51
Power Supplies
LED Indicators
Figure
Pwr ok
LED Description
Table
Color
Indication when On
Pwr ok
Green
Note: For "Closed System" installations, connector 140 XTS 00 500 must be used
(refer to Closed System Installation, p. 677 ).
52
Power Supplies
Wiring Diagram
Figure
The following figure shows the 140 CPS 111 00 wiring diagram.
1
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
5
6
AC L
AC N
Quantum AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A Module (140 CPS 114 00)
Overview
53
Power Supplies
Power Supply
Figure
140
CPS 214 00
PS 24 vdc
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Connector
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alarm
Relay
24Vdc24Vdc+
+
cap
-
Note: When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that
should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.
54
Power Supplies
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the CPS 114 00 PS 115/230 VAC
power supply module.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
Input Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
Input Current
Inrush Current
VA Rating
130 VA
Fusing (external)
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Maximum Current
Minimum Current
None required
Protection
General
Field Wiring Connector
(included)
Internal Power Dissipation
Operating Mode
LED Indicators
Figure
Standalone
Pwr
55
Power Supplies
LED Description
Table
Indication when On
Pwr ok
Green
The following figures show the 140 CPS 114 00 Wiring Diagram (left) and operating
curve (right).
1
2
Internally connected.
Do not connect any
external wiring to these
points.
Install jumper
for 115 VAC
operation only
3
4
5
6
7
AC L
AC N
Wiring Diagram
and Operating
Curve Figures
LEDs
12
10
8
6
4
2
40
45
50
55
60
56
Power Supplies
Quantum AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 8 A (140 CPS 114 10)
Overview
Power Supply
Module Figure
The following figure shows the power supply module and its components.
140
CPS 214 00
PS 24 vdc
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Connector
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alarm
Relay
24Vdc24Vdc+
+
cap
-
57
Power Supplies
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the CPS 114 10 PS 115/230 VAC
SUM power supply.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
Input Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
Input Voltage Total Harmonic Less than 10% of the fundamental rms value
Distortion
Input Current
Inrush Current
VA Rating
130 VA
Fusing (external)
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Maximum Current
8 A @ 60 degrees C
Minimum Current
None required
Protection
General
Field Wiring Connector
(included)
LED Indicators
Figure
Operating Mode
Standalone / Summable
Pwr
58
Power Supplies
LED Description
Table
Indication when On
Pwr ok
Wiring Diagram
LEDs
Green
1
2
Internally connected.
Do not connect any
external wiring to these
points.
Install jumper
for 115 VAC
operation only
3
4
5
6
AC L
AC N
59
Power Supplies
Quantum AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 8 A Module (140 CPS 124
00)
Overview
The following provides information on the AC redundant power supply, 115/230 Vac,
8 A module.
Power Supply
Figure
140
CPS 214 00
PS 24 vdc
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Connector
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alarm
Relay
24Vdc24Vdc+
+
cap
-
Note: When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that
should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.
60
Power Supplies
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the CPS 124 00 PS 115/230 VAC
RED power supply module.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
Input Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
Input Current
Inrush Current
VA Rating
130 VA
Fusing (external)
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Maximum Current
8 A @ 60 degrees C
Minimum Current
None required
Protection
General
Field Wiring Connector
(included)
Internal Power Dissipation
Operating Mode
LED Indicators
Figure
Standalone / Redundant
Pwr
61
Power Supplies
LED Description
Table
Indication when On
Pwr ok
Wiring Diagram
Figure
LEDs
Green
The following figure shows the 140 CPS 124 00 wiring diagram.
1
2
Internally connected.
Do not connect any
external wiring to these
points.
Install jumper
for 115 VAC
operation only
3
4
5
6
AC L
AC N
62
Power Supplies
Power Supply
Figure
140
CPS 214 00
PS 24 vdc
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Connector
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alarm
Relay
24Vdc24Vdc+
+
cap
-
Note: When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that
should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.
63
Power Supplies
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the CPS 211 00 PS 24 VDC power
supply module.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
20 ... 30 Vdc
Input Current
1.6 A
Inrush Current
30 A
Fusing (external)
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Maximum Current
3A
Minimum Current
0.3 A
Protection
General
Field Wiring Connector (included)
Operating Mode
LED Indicators
Figure
Standalone
Pwr
LED Description
Table
Indication when On
Pwr ok
64
LEDs
Green
Power Supplies
Wiring Diagram
Figure
The following figure shows the 140 CPS 211 00 wiring diagram.
Not used
Not used
3
4
5
6
+24 Vdc
Not used
Not used
65
Power Supplies
Power Supply
Figure
140
CPS 214 00
PS 24 vdc
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Connector
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alarm
Relay
24Vdc24Vdc+
+
cap
-
Note: When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that
should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.
66
Power Supplies
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 140 CPS 214 00 PS 24 VDC
SUM power supply module.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
20 ... 30 Vdc
Input Current
3.8 A max
Inrush Current
25 A @ 24 Vdc. 14 A @ 20 Vdc
Input Ripple
Fusing (external)
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Maximum Current
8A
Minimum Current
None required
Protection
General
Field Wiring Connector
Internal Power
Dissipation
Operating Mode
LED Indicators
Figure
Standalone / Summable
Pwr
LED Description
Table
Indication when On
Pwr ok
LEDs
Green
67
Power Supplies
Wiring Diagram
Figure and
Timing Chart
The following figures show the CPS 214 wiring diagram (left) and the hold-up
capacitor timing chart (right).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Power Loss
Alarm
68
Power Supplies
Quantum DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module (140 CPS 224 00)
Overview
Power Supply
Figure
140
CPS 214 00
PS 24 vdc
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Connector
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alarm
Relay
24Vdc24Vdc+
+
cap
-
Note: When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that
should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.
69
Power Supplies
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 24 Vdc, 8 A DC redundant power
supply.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
20 ... 30 Vdc
Input Current
3.8 A max
Inrush Current
25 A @ 24 Vdc. 14 A @ 20 Vdc
Input Ripple
Fusing (external)
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Current
8A
Protection
General
Surge Withstand
Operating Mode
LED Indicators
Figure
Standalone / Redundant
Pwr
LED Description
Table
Indication when On
Pwr ok
70
LEDs
Green
Power Supplies
Wiring Diagram
Figure and
Timing Chart
The following figures show the 140 CPS 224 00 wiring diagram (left) and the 140
CPS 224 00 hold-up capacitor timing chart (right).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Power Loss
Alarm
71
Power Supplies
Quantum DC Summable Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module (140 CPS 414 00)
Overview
Power Supply
Figure
140
CPS 214 00
PS 24 vdc
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Connector
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alarm
Relay
24Vdc24Vdc+
+
cap
-
Note: When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that
should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.
72
Power Supplies
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 140 CPS 414 00 PS 48 VDC
power supply module.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
48 ... 60 Vdc
Input Current
1.2 A @ 48 Vdc
Inrush Current
25 A @ 40 Vdc
13 ms @ 48 Vdc
Fusing (external)
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Current
Protection
General
Field Wiring Connector
LED Indicators
Figure
15.6 W @ 8 A
Operating Mode
Standalone / Summable
Pwr
LED Description
Table
Indication when On
Pwr ok
LEDs
Green
73
Power Supplies
Wiring Diagram
Figure
Power Loss
Alarm
Capacitor
- (Optional)
Note: A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available
on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip. This contact set may be used to
signal input power OFF, or a power supply failure.
74
Power Supplies
Operating Curve
Figure and
Timing Chart
The following figures show the CPS 414 00 operating curve (left) and the hold-up
capacitor timing chart (right).
10
8
22
10
6.8
4.7
90
80
47
100
70
Time/ms
12
4
2
2.2
60
0
50
40
40
45
50
55
60
30
20
10
0
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
Power Supplies
Quantum DC Redundant Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module (140 CPS 424 00)
Overview
Power Supply
Figure
140
CPS 214 00
PS 24 vdc
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Connector
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alarm
Relay
24Vdc24Vdc+
+
cap
-
Note: When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that
should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.
76
Power Supplies
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 140 CPS 424 00 PS 48 VDC
RED power supply module.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
48 ... 60 Vdc
Input Current
1.3 A @ 48 Vdc
Inrush Current
25 A @ 48 Vdc
13 ms @ 48 Vdc
Fusing (external)
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Current
Protection
General
Field Wiring Connector
LED Indicators
Figure
17.2 W @ 8 A
Operating Mode
Standalone / Redundant
Pwr
LED Description
Table
Indication when On
Pwr ok
LEDs
Green
77
Power Supplies
Wiring Diagram
Figure
1
2
Power Loss
Alarm
Capacitor
- (Optional)
6
7
Note: A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available
on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip. This contact set may be used to
signal input power OFF, or a power supply failure.
Operating Curve
Figure and
Timing Chart
The following figures show the CPS 424 00 operating curve (left) and the hold-up
capacitor timing chart (right).
Capacitor size/mF
10
8
22
10
6.8
4.7
90
80
47
100
70
Time/ms
12
4
2
2.2
60
0
50
40
40
45
50
55
60
30
20
10
0
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
Input Voltage
78
Power Supplies
Quantum DC Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A Module (140 CPS 511 00)
Overview
The following provides information on the DC power supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A module.
Power Supply
Figure
140
CPS 214 00
PS 24 vdc
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Connector
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alarm
Relay
24Vdc24Vdc+
+
cap
-
Note: When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that
should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.
79
Power Supplies
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the PS 125 VDC power supply
module.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
Input Current
0.4 A
Inrush Current
10 A
1.0 ms max
Fusing (external)
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Maximum Current
3A
Minimum Current
0.3 A
Protection
General
Field Wiring Connector
(included)
LED Indicators
Figure
Operating Mode
Standalone
Pwr
LED Description
Table
Indication when On
Pwr ok
80
LEDs
Green
Power Supplies
Wiring Diagram
Figure
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
5
6
AC L
AC N
81
Power Supplies
Power Supply
Figure
140
CPS 214 00
PS 24 vdc
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Connector
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Alarm
Relay
24Vdc24Vdc+
+
cap
-
Note: When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that
should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.
82
Power Supplies
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 140 CPS 524 00 PS 125 VDC
power supply module.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
Input Current
Inrush Current
28 A @ 125 Vdc
1.0 ms max
Fusing (external)
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Maximum Current
8 A @ 60 degrees C
Minimum Current
None required
Protection
General
Field Wiring Connector
(included)
LED Indicators
Figure
Operating Mode
Standalone / Redundant
Pwr
LED Description
Table
Indication when On
Pwr ok
LEDs
Green
83
Power Supplies
Wiring Diagram
Figure
Not used
Not used
125VDC +
84
CPU Modules
At a Glance
Introduction
SRAM
(bytes
Ladder
Register
s
Max IEC
Program
256 k
8k
10 k
none
109 k
512 k
16 k
10 k
none
368 k
768 k
32 k or
48 k
57 k or
28 k *
606 k
2M
64 k
57 k
96 k *
570 k
2M
64 K
57 K*
96 K
896 k
4M
64 K
57 K*
96 K
2.5 M
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
86
96
106
116
126
150
138
162
85
CPU Modules
The following provides information on the 140 CPU 113 02 Controller module - CPU
256 k, 1xModbus Plus Max IEC Program (requires IEC-only Exec.) 109 k.
CPU Module
Figure
The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.
LED Area
140
CPU 424 02
controller
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable
Battery
Batt.
Spare
mem
prt
off
Modbus
Modbus
Plus
Chan A
Modbus
Plus
Chan B
ASCI
not used
mem
RTU
Modbus
Modbus
Plus
Modbus
Plus
Network
Node
* The Channel B Modbus Plus Connector is only present on the 140 CPU 424 02 module.
86
CPU Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 140 CPU 113 02 CONTROLLER
module.
984 Ladder Logic
8 k words max
Reference Capacity
Discrete
Register
9999 max
64 In and 64 Out *
Remote I/O
Maximum I/O Words per Drop
64 In / 64 Out *
31
Distributed I/O
Maximum Number of Networks per
System
3 **
30 In and 32 Out
Watchdog Timer
0.3 ms / k to 1.4 ms / k
Battery
3 V Lithium
Service Life
1200 mAh
Shelf Life
5 micro A
Maximum
110 micro A
Communication
Modbus (RS-232)
General
87
CPU Modules
Diagnostics
Power Up
Runtime
RAM
RAM
RAM Address
RAM Address
Executive Checksum
Executive Checksum
Processor
Bus Current Required
790 mA
TOD Clock
* This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register
I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available.
The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured
one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.
**Requires the use of the 140 NOM 21x 00 Option Processor.
LED Indicators
Figure
Ready
Run
Bat Low
Modbus
Modbus +
Error A
Error B
Mem Prt
88
CPU Modules
LED
Descriptions
Table
The following table shows the LED error codes for the 140 CPU 213 04 module.
Indication when On
Green
Run
Green
The CPU has been started and is solving logic. (See the following
table for Run LED error codes).
Modbus
Green
Modbus +
Green
Mem Prt
Amber
Bat Low
Red
Error A
Red
Error B
Color
Ready
Blinking Run
LED Error Codes
LEDs
Red
The following tables show the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of
error, and the crash codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex).
89
CPU Modules
The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140 CPU 113 02 module.
Number of Blinks
Code
Error
Continuous
0000
80B
80C
769
72A
82E
72B
72F
730
90
72C
CPU Modules
604
605
606
607
608
609
614
615
616
617
618
619
61E
61F
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
631
bad interrupt
503
52D
402
300
301
EXEC Checksum
8002
8003
8001
91
CPU Modules
Front Panel
Switches
Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left
switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory
protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the
right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports.
Front Panel
Switches Figure
The following figure shows the three options that are available for the 140 CPU 113
02.
mem
prt
off
not used
ASCII
RTU
mem
Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the
following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.
The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters.
ASCII Comm Port Parameters
Baud
2,400
Parity
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
Note: The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is
set to RTU mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the
CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected, as
well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.
92
Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU)
functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be
changed.
CPU Modules
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
9,600
Parity
Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm
parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.
The following table shows the valid comm port parameters.
Valid Comm Port Parameters
Baud
19,200
1,200
9,600
600
7,200
300
4,800
150
3,600
134.5
2,400
110
2,000
75
1,800
50
Data Bits
Stop Bits
1/2
Parity
Enable/Disable Odd/Even
Device Address
Rear Panel
Switches
7/8
1 ... 247
Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table below) are located on the rear
panel of the CPU. They are used for setting the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port
addresses.
Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.
SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom
switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the
correct setting for an example address of 11.
93
CPU Modules
3
4
6
9
3
4
The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.
Node Address
SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
0 ... 4
Note: If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be
"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.
Modbus
Connector
Pinouts
All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports
Modicons proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus
port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.
Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is
recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990 NAA 263 20 or 990
NAA 263 50) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a
Quantum CPU or NOM module.
94
CPU Modules
Modbus Ports
Pinout
Connections
Figure
The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25pin connections.
IBM-AT
9-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
IBM-XT
25-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
CD
SHIELD
SHIELD 1
SHIELD
RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
TX
RX
TX
DTR
DTR
RTS
DTR
GRND
GRND
CTS
GRND
DSR
DSR
DSR
DSR
RTS
RTS
GRND
RTS
CTS
CTS
NC
CTS
NC
DTR
20
NC
N/C: No Connection
95
CPU Modules
The following provides information on the 140 CPU 113 03 Controller module - CPU
512 k, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program (requires IEC-only Exec.) 368 k.
CPU Module
Figure
The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.
LED Area
140
CPU 424 02
controller
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable
Battery
Batt.
Spare
mem
prt
off
Modbus
Modbus
Plus
Chan A
Modbus
Plus
Chan B
ASCI
not used
mem
RTU
Modbus
Modbus
Plus
Modbus
Plus
Network
Node
* The Channel B Modbus Plus Connector is only present on the 140 CPU 424 02 module.
96
CPU Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 140 CPU 113 03 CONTROLLER
module.
984 Ladder Logic
16 k words max
Reference Capacity
Discrete
Register
9999 max
64 In and 64 Out *
Remote I/O
Maximum I/O Words per Drop
64 In / 64 Out *
31
Distributed I/O
Maximum Number of Networks per
System
3 **
30 In and 32 Out
Watchdog Timer
0.3 ms / k to 1.4 ms / k
Battery
3 V Lithium
Service Life
1200 mAh
Shelf Life
7 micro A
Maximum
210 micro A
Communication
Modbus (RS-232)
General
97
CPU Modules
Diagnostics
Power Up
Runtime
RAM
RAM
RAM Address
RAM Address
Executive Checksum
Executive Checksum
Processor
Bus Current Required
790 mA
TOD Clock
* This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register
I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available.
The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.
**Requires the use of the 140 NOM 21x 00 Option Processor.
LED Indicators
Figure
Ready
Run
Bat Low
Modbus
Modbus +
Error A
Error B
Mem Prt
98
CPU Modules
LED
Descriptions
Table
Green
Run
Green
The CPU has been started and is solving logic (see the following
table for Run LED error codes).
Modbus
Green
Modbus +
Green
Mem Prt
Amber
Bat Low
Red
Error A
Red
Error B
Color
Ready
Blinking Run
LED Error Codes
LEDs
Red
The Blinking Run LED Error Codes table shows the number of times the Run LED
blinks for each type of error and the crash codes possible for that group (all codes
are in hex).
99
CPU Modules
The following table shows the blinking run LED error codes.
Number of Blinks
Code
Error
Continuous
0000
80B
80C
769
72A
82E
72B
72F
730
100
72C
CPU Modules
604
605
606
607
608
609
614
615
616
617
618
619
61E
61F
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
631
bad interrupt
503
52D
402
300
301
EXEC Checksum
8002
8003
8001
101
CPU Modules
Front Panel
Switches
Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left
switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory
protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the
right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports.
Front Panel
Switches Figure
The following figure shows the three options that are available.
mem
prt
off
not used
ASCII
RTU
mem
Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the
following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.
The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters.
ASCII Comm Port Parameters
Baud
2,400
Parity
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
Note: The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is
set to RTU mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the
CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected, as
well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.
102
Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU)
functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be
changed.
CPU Modules
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
9,600
Parity
Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm
parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.
The following table shows the valid comm port parameters.
Valid Comm Port Parameters
Baud
19,200
1,200
9,600
600
7,200
300
4,800
150
3,600
134.5
2,400
110
2,000
75
1,800
50
Parity
Data Bits
7/8
Stop Bits
1/2
Device Address
Rear Panel
Switches
Enable/Disable Odd/Even
1 ... 247
Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table below) are located on the rear
panel of the CPU. They are used for setting the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port
addresses.
Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.
SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom
switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the
correct setting for an example address of 11.
103
CPU Modules
3
4
6
9
3
4
The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.
Node Address
SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
0 ... 4
Note: If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be
"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.
Modbus
Connector
Pinouts
All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports
Modicons proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus
port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.
Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is
recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990 NAA 263 20 or 990
NAA 263 50) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a
Quantum CPU or NOM module.
104
CPU Modules
Modbus Ports
Pinout
Connections
Figure
The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25pin connections.
IBM-AT
9-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
IBM-XT
25-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
CD
SHIELD
SHIELD 1
SHIELD
RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
TX
RX
TX
DTR
DTR
RTS
DTR
GRND
GRND
CTS
GRND
DSR
DSR
DSR
DSR
RTS
RTS
GRND
RTS
CTS
CTS
NC
CTS
NC
DTR
20
NC
105
CPU Modules
The following provides information on the 140 CPU 213 04 Controller module - CPU
768 k, MATH, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program (requires IEC-only Exec.) 606 k.
Quantum CPU
Figure
The following figure shows the CPU Module and its parts.
LED Area
140
CPU 424 02
controller
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable
Battery
Batt.
Spare
mem
prt
off
Modbus
Modbus
Plus
Chan A
Modbus
Plus
Chan B
ASCI
not used
mem
RTU
Modbus
Modbus
Plus
Modbus
Plus
Network
Node
* The Channel B Modbus Plus Connector is only present on the 140 CPU 424 02 module.
106
CPU Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the CPU 213 04 controller module.
User Logic/Reference Capacity
Discrete
Register
Extended
Register
32 k words
64 k
57 k*
80 k
48 k words
64 k
28 k
0k
Reference Capacity
Discrete
64 k - any mix
64 In and 64 Out *
Remote I/O
Maximum I/O Words per Drop
64 In and 64 Out *
31
Distributed I/O
Maximum Number of Networks
per System
3 **
30 In and 32 Out
Watchdog Timer
0.3 ms / k to 1.4 ms / k
Battery
3 V Lithium
Service Life
1200 mAh
Shelf Life
5 micro A
Maximum
110 micro A
Communication
Modbus (RS-232)
General
107
CPU Modules
Diagnostics
Power Up
Runtime
RAM
RAM
RAM Address
RAM Address
Executive Checksum
Executive Checksum
Processor
Bus Current Required
900 mA
TOD Clock
* This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os. For each word of
Register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total
available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O
configured - one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.
** Requires the use of the 140 NOM 21x 00 Option Processor.
LED Indicators
Figure
Ready
Run
Bat Low
Modbus
Modbus +
Error A
Error B
Mem Prt
108
CPU Modules
LED
Descriptions
Table
Green
Run
Green
The CPU has been started and is solving logic (see the following
table for Run LED error codes).
Modbus
Green
Modbus +
Green
Mem Prt
Amber
Bat Low
Red
Error A
Red
Error B
Color
Ready
LEDs
Red
The Blinking Run LED Error Codes table shows the number of times the Run LED
blinks for each type of error and the crash codes possible for that group (all codes
are in hex).
109
CPU Modules
The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140 CPU 213 04.
Number of Blinks
Cod
Error
Continuous
0000
80B
80C
769
72A
82E
72B
72F
730
110
72C
CPU Modules
604
605
606
607
608
609
614
615
616
617
618
619
61E
61F
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
631
bad interrupt
503
52D
402
300
301
EXEC Checksum
8002
8003
8001
111
CPU Modules
Front Panel
Switches
Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left
switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory
protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the
right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports.
Front Panel
Switches Figure
The following figure shows the three options that are available.
mem
prt
off
not used
ASCII
RTU
mem
Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the
following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.
The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters.
ASCII Comm Port Parameters
Baud
2,400
Parity
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
Note: The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is
set to RTU mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the
CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected, as
well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.
112
Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU)
functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be
changed.
CPU Modules
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
9,600
Parity
Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm
parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.
The following table shows the valid comm port parameters.
Valid Comm Port Parameters
Baud
19,200
1,200
9,600
600
7,200
300
4,800
150
3,600
134.5
2,400
110
2,000
75
1,800
50
Parity
Data Bits
7/8
Stop Bits
1/2
Device Address
Rear Panel
Switches
Enable/Disable Odd/Even
1 ... 247
Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table below) are located on the rear
panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port
addresses.
Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.
SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom
switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the
correct setting for an example address of 11.
113
CPU Modules
3
4
6
9
3
4
The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.
Node Address
SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
0 ... 4
Note: If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be
"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.
Modbus
Connector
Pinouts
All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports
Modicons proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus
port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.
Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is
recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990 NAA 263 20 or 990
NAA 263 50) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a
Quantum CPU or NOM module.
114
CPU Modules
Modbus Ports
Pinout
Connections
Figure
The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25pin connections.
IBM-AT
9-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
CD
SHIELD
RX
RX
TX
TX
DTR
GRND
DSR
IBM-XT
25-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
1
SHIELD
TX
RX
RX
TX
DTR
RTS
DTR
GRND
CTS
GRND
DSR
DSR
DSR
RTS
RTS
GRND
RTS
CTS
CTS
NC
CTS
SHIELD 1
NC
DTR
20
NC
115
CPU Modules
The following provides information on the140 CPU 424 02 Controller module - CPU
2 M, MATH, 2xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program (requires IEC-only Exec.) - 570 k.
CPU Module
Figure
The following figure shows the CPU module and its components.
LED Area
140
CPU 424 02
controller
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable
Battery
Batt.
Spare
mem
prt
off
Modbus
Modbus
Plus
Chan A
Modbus
Plus
Chan B
ASCI
not used
mem
RTU
Modbus
Modbus
Plus
Modbus
Plus
Network
Node
* The Channel B Modbus Plus Connector is only present on the 140 CPU 424 02 module.
116
CPU Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 140 CPU 424 02 CONTROLLER
module.
User Logic/Reference
Capacity
984 Ladder
Logic
Discrete
Register
Extended
Register
64 k words
64 k
57 k*
96 k
1XXX = 16 and
Reference Capacity
Discrete
64 k - any mix
64 In and 64 Out *
Remote I/O
Maximum I/O Words per Drop 64 In and 64 Out *
Maximum Number of Remote
Drops
31
Distributed I/O
Maximum Number of
Networks per System
3 **
30 In and 32 Out
Watchdog Timer
0.1 ms / k to 0.5 ms / k
Battery
3 V Lithium
Service Life
1200 mAh
Shelf Life
7 micro A
Maximum
210 micro A
Communication
Modbus (RS-232)
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
CPU Modules
General
Diagnostics
Power Up
Runtime
RAM
RAM
RAM Address
RAM Address
Executive Checksum
Executive Checksum
Processor
Bus Current Required
900 mA
TOD Clock
* This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os. For each word of
Register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total
available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O
configured-one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.
** Requires the use of the 140 NOM 21x 00 Option Modules.
LED Indicators
Figure
Ready
Run
Bat Low
Modbus
Modbus +
Error A
Error B
Mem Prt
118
CPU Modules
LED
Descriptions
Table
Indication when On
Ready
Green
Run
Green
The CPU has been started and is solving logic (see the following
table for Run LED error codes).
Modbus
Green
Modbus +
Green
Mem Prt
Amber
Bat Low
Red
Error A
Red
Error B
LEDs
Red
119
CPU Modules
The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140 CPU 424 02.
Number of Blinks
Cod
Error
Continuous
0000
80B
80C
769
72A
82E
72B
72F
730
120
72C
CPU Modules
604
605
606
607
608
609
614
615
616
617
618
619
61E
61F
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
631
bad interrupt
503
52D
402
300
301
EXEC Checksum
8002
8003
8001
121
CPU Modules
Front Panel
Switches
Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left
switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory
protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the
right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports.
Front Panel
Switches Figure
The following figure shows the three options that are available for the CPU 424 02
module.
mem
prt
off
not used
ASCII
RTU
mem
Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the
following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.
The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters.
ASCII Comm Port Parameters
Baud
2,400
Parity
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
Note: The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is
set to RTU mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the
CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected, as
well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.
122
Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU)
functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be
changed.
CPU Modules
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
9,600
Parity
Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm
parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.
The following table shows the valid comm port parameters.
Valid Comm Port Parameters
Baud
19,200
1,200
9,600
600
7,200
300
4,800
150
3,600
134.5
2,400
110
2,000
75
1,800
50
Parity
Enable/Disable Odd/Even
Data Bits
7/8
Stop Bits
Rear Panel
Switches
1/2
Device Address
1 ... 247
Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table below) are located on the rear
panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port
addresses.
Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.
SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom
switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the
correct setting for an example address of 11.
123
CPU Modules
3
4
6
9
3
4
The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.
Node Address
SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
0 ... 4
Note: If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be
"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.
Modbus
Connector
Pinouts
All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports
Modicons proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus
port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.
Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is
recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990 NAA 263 20 or 990
NAA 263 50) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a
Quantum CPU or NOM module.
124
CPU Modules
Modbus Ports
Pinout
Connections
Figure
The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25pin connections.
IBM-AT
9-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
IBM-XT
25-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
CD
SHIELD
SHIELD 1
SHIELD
RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
TX
RX
TX
DTR
DTR
RTS
DTR
GRND
GRND
CTS
GRND
DSR
DSR
DSR
DSR
RTS
RTS
GRND
RTS
CTS
CTS
NC
CTS
NC
DTR
20
NC
125
CPU Modules
The following provides information on the 140 CPU 434 12 Controller module - CPU
2M, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program (requires IEC-only Exec.) 896 k.
CPU Module
Figure
The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.
LED Area
140
CPU 424 02
controller
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable door Customer Identification Label
(Fold label and place it inside door
Date
Installed
Battery
Batt
Dey
sw
Key Switch
Modbus Plus
Connector
Modbus
Comm 1
Modbus
Comm 2
Modbus
Connector
Modbus
Modbus
Connector
ASCII
RTU
Slide
Switch
mem
Modbus
Comm 1
Modbus
Comm 2
Modbus
Plus
Network
Node
126
CPU Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the CPU 434 12 CONTROLLER
module.
User Logic/Reference Capacity
984
Ladder
Logic
Discrete
64 k words 64 k
Register
Extended
Register
57 k*
96 k
1XXX = 16 and
3XXX = 16
Reference Capacity
Discrete
64 k - any mix
64 In and 64 Out *
Remote I/O
Maximum I/O Words per Drop
64 In and 64 Out *
3 **
30 In and 32 Out
Maximum Number of Option Module Supports up to six network modules (i.e., Modbus
Interfaces
Plus, Ethernet and Multi-Axis Motion option modules)
using the option module interface technique (see
Quantum Network Interface Techniques, p. 23).
Note: Only two Modbus Plus modules can have full
functionality, including Quantum DIO support.
Watchdog Timer
0.1 ms / k to 0.5 ms / k
Battery
3 V Lithium
Service Life
1200 mAh
Shelf Life
127
CPU Modules
Typical
7 micro A
Maximum
210 micro A
Communication
Modbus (RS-232)
General
Diagnostics
Power Up
Runtime
RAM
RAM
RAM Address
RAM Address
Executive Checksum
Executive Checksum
Processor
Bus Current Required
1.8 A
TOD Clock
Operating Temperature
0 ... 60 degrees C
* This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os. For each word of
register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total
available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O
configured one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.
** Requires the use of two 140 NOM 21x 00 Option Modules.
LED Indicators
Figure
Ready
Run
Bat1 Low
Modbus 1
Modbus 2
Modbus +
Error
Mem Prt
128
CPU Modules
LED Description
Table
Indication when On
Ready
Green
Run
Green
Bat Low
Red
Modbus 1
Green
Modbus 2
Green
Modbus +
Green
Error
Red
Mem Prt
LEDS
Amber
129
CPU Modules
The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140 CPU 424 12.
Number of Blinks
Cod
Error
Continuous
0000
80B
80C
769
72A
82E
72B
72F
730
130
72C
CPU Modules
604
605
606
607
608
609
614
615
616
617
618
619
61E
61F
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
631
bad interrupt
503
52D
402
300
301
EXEC Checksum
8001
8002
8003
131
CPU Modules
Front Panel
Switches
Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left
switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory
protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the
right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports.
Front Panel
Switches Figure
The following figure shows the three options that are available for the 140 CPU 424
12 module.
mem
prt
ASCII
RTU
off
not used
Rear Panel
Switches
mem
Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table below) are located on the rear
panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port
addresses.
Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.
SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom
switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the
correct setting for an example address of 11.
SW1 and SW2
Switches Figure
3
4
6
9
3
4
132
CPU Modules
The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.
Node Address
SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
0 ... 4
Note: If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be
"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.
Key Switch
The key switch is used to protect memory from programming changes while the
controller is in operation.
Key Switch
Figure
Stop
Mem
Ptr
Start
Start
Note: The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above) are for reference
only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.
133
CPU Modules
Key Switch
Description
Table
Key switch
Transition
Controller Status
Stop
Controller is stopped Y
and disables
Programmer
changes
From Start or
Memory
Protect: Stops
controller, if
running, and
disables
Programmer
changes
Mem Prt
Controller may be
either stopped or
running and
Programmer
changes are
disabled
From Stop or
Start: Prevents
Programmer
changes,
controller run
status is not
changed
Start
134
Key switch
Position
Controller may be
either stopped or
running,
Programmer may
make changes and
start/stop the
controller
From Stop:
Enables
Programmer
changes, starts
controller. From
Memory
Protect:
Enables
programmer
changes, starts
controller if
stopped
CPU Modules
Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the
following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.
The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters.
ASCII Comm Port Parameters
Baud
2,400
Parity
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
Note: The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is
set to RTU mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the
CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected, as
well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.
Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU)
functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be
changed.
9,600
Parity
Stop Bits
Device Address
Even
Data Bits
135
CPU Modules
Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm
parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.
The following table shows the valid comm port parameters.
Valid Comm Port Parameters
Baud
19,200
1,200
9,600
600
7,200
300
4,800
134.5
2,400
110
2,000
75
1,800
Parity
150
3,600
50
Enable/Disable
Odd/Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
1/2
Device Address
Modbus
Connector
Pinouts
7/8
1 ... 247
All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that support
Modicons proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus
port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.
Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is
recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990 NAA 263 20 or 990
NAA 263 50) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a
Quantum CPU or NOM module.
136
CPU Modules
Modbus Ports
Pinout
Connections
Figure
The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin
connections.
IBM-AT
9-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
IBM-XT
25-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
CD
SHIELD
SHIELD 1
SHIELD
RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
TX
RX
TX
DTR
DTR
RTS
DTR
GRND
GRND
CTS
GRND
DSR
DSR
DSR
DSR
RTS
RTS
GRND
RTS
CTS
CTS
NC
CTS
NC
DTR
20
NC
137
CPU Modules
This map provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description
and error codes for the 140 CPU 434 12A Controller Module.
CPU Module
Figure
The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.
140
CPU 424 02
controller
LED
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable door Customer Identification Label
(Fold label and place it inside
Date
Installed
Battery
Batt
Dey
Key Switch
ASCII
RTU
Modbus Plus
Connector
Modbus
Com
Modbus
Modbus
Connector
mem
Modbus
Comm 1
Modbus
Plus
Modbus
Modbus
Connector
Modbus
Slide
Switch
Network
Node
138
CPU Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the CPU 434 12A Controller module.
User Logic/Reference Capacity
984
Ladder
Logic
Discrete
64 k words 64 k
Register
Extended
Register
57 k*
96 k
1XXX = 16 and
3XXX = 16
Reference Capacity
Discrete
64 k - any mix
Local I/O)
Maximum I/O Words
64 In and 64 Out **
Remote I/O
Maximum I/O Words per Drop
64 In and 64 Out **
3 ***
30 In and 32 Out
** This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register I/O
configured, one word must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for
each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured---one word must be subtracted from
the total available.
*** Requires the use of two 140 NOM 21X 00 Option Modules.
Maximum Number of Network
Module Interfaces
Watchdog Timer
0.1 ms / k to 0.5 ms / k
Battery
Type
1200 mAh
Shelf Life
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
3 V Lithium
Service Life
CPU Modules
7 micro A
Maximum
210 micro A
Communication
Modbus (RS-232)
Programming software
Compatibility
General
Diagnostics
Power Up
Runtime
RAM
RAM
RAM Address
RAM Address
Executive Checksum
Executive Checksum
Processor
Bus Current Required
Operating Temperature
140
1.25 A
TOD Clock
0 ... 60 degrees C
CPU Modules
LED Indicators
Figure
Ready
Run
Bat low
Modbus
Modbus +
Error A
Mem Prt
LED
Descriptions
Table
The following table shows the LED error codes for the 140 CPU 434 12A module.
LEDS
Color
Indication when On
Ready
Green
Run
Green
Bat Low
Green
Modbus +
Green
Error A
Red
Mem Prt
Red
Modbus
Amber
141
CPU Modules
The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140 CPU 434 12A.
Number of Blinks
Code
Error
Continuous
0000
80B
80C
769
72A
82E
72B
72F
730
142
72C
CPU Modules
604
605
606
607
608
609
614
615
616
617
618
619
61E
61F
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
631
bad interrupt
503
52D
402
300
301
EXEC Checksum
8001
8002
8003
143
CPU Modules
Note: Information in the Code column is visible only with the Flash download utility.
144
CPU Modules
The slide switch is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus
(RS232) ports. Three options are available.
Setting the switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port.
Setting the switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU)
functionality to the port.
Setting the switch to the bottom position lets you assign comm parameters to the
port in software.
ASCII
RTU
mem
2,400
Parity
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
Note: The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is
set to RTU mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the
CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected, as
well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.
The following table shows the RTU comm port parameters. The comm
parameters are set and cannot be changed.
RTU Comm Port Parameters
Baud
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
9,600
Parity
145
CPU Modules
19,200
600
7,200
300
4,800
150
3,600
134.5
2,400
110
2,000
75
1,800
Parity
1,200
9,600
50
Enable/Disable
Odd/Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
1/2
Device Address
Rear Panel
Switches
7/8
1 ... 247
SW1
6
9
SW2
146
CPU Modules
SW1 sets the upper digit (tens) of the address. SW2 sets the lower digit (ones) of
the address.
The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.
Node Address
SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
0 ... 4
Note: If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be
"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.
Key Switch
Figure
Stop
Mem
Protect
Stop
Mem
Ptr
Start
Start
Note: The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above) are for reference
only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.
147
CPU Modules
Key Switch
Description
Table
Key switch
Transition
Controller Status
Stop
Controller is stopped Y
and disables
Programmer
changes
From Start or
Memory Protect:
Stops controller, if
running, and
disables
Programmer
changes
Mem Prt
Controller may be
either stopped or
running and
Programmer
changes are
disabled
Start
Modbus
Connector
Pinouts
Key switch
Position
Controller may be
either stopped or
running,
Programmer may
make changes and
start/stop the
controller
From Stop:
Enables
Programmer
changes, starts
controller. From
Memory Protect:
Enables
programmer
changes, starts
controller if
stopped
All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that support
Modicons proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus
port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.
Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is
recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990 NAA 263 20 or 990
NAA 263 50) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a
Quantum CPU or NOM module.
148
CPU Modules
Modbus Ports
Pinout
Connections
Figure
The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin
connections.
IBM-AT
9-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
IBM-XT
25-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
CD
1 SHIEL
SHIEL 1
SHIELD
RX
TX
2
3
2 RX
3 TX
TX
RX
2
3
2
3
RX
TX
DTR 4
GRND 5
4 DTR
5 GRND
RTS
CTS
4
5
4
5
DTR
GRND
DSR
6 DSR
DSR
DSR
RTS
8
9
CTS
RTS
7 RTS
CTS
GRND 7
8 CTS
9 NC
NC
DTR
20
NC
149
CPU Modules
The following provides information on the 140 CPU 534 14 Controller module CPU
4M, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program (requires IEC-only Exec.) 2.5 M.
CPU Module
Figure
The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.
LED Area
140
CPU 424 02
controller
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable
Battery
Batt.
Spare
mem
prt
off
Modbus
Modbus
Plus
Chan A
Modbus
Plus
Chan B
ASCI
not used
mem
RTU
Modbus
Modbus
Plus
Modbus
Plus
Network
Node
* The Channel B Modbus Plus Connector is only present on the 140 CPU 424 02 module.
150
CPU Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specification for the 140 CPU 545 14 CONTROLLER
module.
User Logic/Reference Capacity
984 Ladder
Logic
Discrete
Register
Extended
Register
64 k words
64 k
57 k*
96 k
1XXX = 16 and
Reference Capacity
Discrete
64 k - any mix
64 In and 64 Out *
Remote I/O
Maximum I/O Words per Drop
64 In and 64 Out *
3 **
30 In and 32 Out
Maximum Number of Option Module Supports up to six network modules (i.e., Modbus
Interfaces
Plus, Ethernet and Multi-Axis Motion option modules)
using the option module interface technique.
Note: Only two Modbus Plus modules can have full
functionality, including Quantum DIO support.
Watchdog Timer
0.09 ms / k to 0.45 ms / k
Battery
3 V Lithium
Service Life
1200 mAh
Shelf Life
14 micro A
Maximum
420 micro A
151
CPU Modules
Communication
Modbus (RS-232)
General
Diagnostics
Power Up
Runtime
RAM
RAM
RAM Address
RAM Address
Executive Checksum
Executive Checksum
Processor
Bus Current Required
1.8 A
TOD Clock
Operating Temperature
0 ... 45 degrees C
* This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os. For each word of
Register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total
available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O
configured one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.
** Required the use of two 140 NOM 21x 00 Option Modules.
LED Indicators
Figure
Ready
Run
Bat1 Low
Modbus 1
Modbus 2
Modbus +
Error
Mem Prt
152
CPU Modules
LED Description
Table
Indication when On
Ready
Green
Run
Green
Bat Low
Red
Modbus 1
Green
Modbus 2
Green
Modbus +
Green
Error
Red
Mem Prt
LEDS
Amber
153
CPU Modules
The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140 CPU 424 02.
Number of Blinks
Cod
Error
Continuous
0000
80B
80C
769
72A
82E
72B
72F
730
154
72C
CPU Modules
604
605
606
607
608
609
614
615
616
617
618
619
61E
61F
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
631
bad interrupt
503
52D
402
300
301
EXEC Checksum
8002
8003
8001
155
CPU Modules
Front Panel
Switches
Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left
switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory
protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the
right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports.
Front Panel
Switches Figure
The following figure shows the three options that are available for the 140 CPU 424
02 module.
mem
prt
ASCII
RTU
off
not used
Rear Panel
Switches
mem
Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table below) are located on the rear
panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port
addresses.
Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.
SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom
switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the
correct setting for an example address of 11.
SW1 and SW2
Switches Figure
3
4
6
9
3
4
156
CPU Modules
The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.
Node Address
SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
0 ... 4
Note: If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be
"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.
Key Switch
The key switch is used to protect memory from programming changes while the
controller is in operation.
Key Switch
Figure
Stop
Mem
Ptr
Start
Start
Note: The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above) are for reference
only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.
157
CPU Modules
Key Switch
Description
Table
Key switch
Transition
Controller is stopped Y
and disables
Programmer
changes
From Start or
Memory Protect:
Stops controller, if
running, and
disables
Programmer
changes
Controller may be
either stopped or
running and
Programmer
changes are
disabled
From Stop or
Start: Prevents
Programmer
changes,
controller run
status is not
changed
Controller may be
either stopped or
running,
Programmer may
make changes and
start/stop the
controller
From Stop:
Enables
Programmer
changes, starts
controller. From
Memory Protect:
Enables
programmer
changes, starts
controller if
stopped
Controller Status
Stop
Mem Prt
Start
158
Key switch
Position
Memory
Protected From
Programmer
Changes
CPU Modules
Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the
following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.
The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters.
ASCII Comm Port Parameters
Baud
2,400
Parity
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
Note: The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is
set to RTU mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the
CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected, as
well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.
Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU)
functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be
changed.
9,600
Parity
Stop Bits
Device Address
Even
Data Bits
159
CPU Modules
Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm
parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.
The following table shows the valid comm port parameters.
Valid Comm Port Parameters
Baud
19,200
1,200
9,600
600
7,200
300
4,800
134.5
2,400
110
2,000
75
1,800
Parity
150
3,600
50
Enable/Disable
Odd/Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
1/2
Device Address
Modbus
Connector
Pinouts
7/8
1 ... 247
All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a 9-pin RS-232C connector that supports
Modicons proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus
port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.
Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is
recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990 NAA 263 20 or 990
NAA 263 50) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a
Quantum CPU or NOM module.
160
CPU Modules
Modbus Ports
Pinout
Connections
Figure
The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin
connections.
IBM-AT
9-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
CD
SHIELD
RX
RX
TX
TX
DTR
GRND
DSR
RTS
CTS
IBM-XT
25-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
1
SHIELD
TX
RX
RX
TX
DTR
RTS
DTR
GRND
CTS
GRND
DSR
DSR
DSR
RTS
GRND
RTS
CTS
NC
CTS
SHIELD 1
NC
DTR
20
NC
161
CPU Modules
This map provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description
and error codes for the 140 CPU 534 14A Controller Module.
CPU Module
Figure
The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.
140
CPU 424 02
controller
LED
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable door Customer Identification Label
(Fold label and place it inside
Date
Installed
Battery
Batt
Dey
Key Switch
ASCII
RTU
Modbus Plus
Connector
Modbus
Com
Modbus
Modbus
Connector
mem
Modbus
Comm 1
Modbus
Plus
Modbus
Modbus
Connector
Modbus
Slide
Switch
Network
Node
162
CPU Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the CPU 534 14A Controller module.
984
Ladder
Logic
Discrete
64 k words 64 k
Register
Extended
Register
IEC
Application
Memory
57 k*
96 k
2.5M
1XXX = 16 and
1XXX = 16 and
Reference Capacity
Discrete
64 k - any mix
Local I/O)
Maximum I/O Words
64 In and 64 Out **
Remote I/O
Maximum I/O Words per Drop
64 In and 64 Out **
3 ***
30 In and 32 Out
** This information can be a mix if Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register I/O configured, one
word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits
or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured---one word Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.
*** Requires the use of two 140 NOM 21X 00 Option Modules.
Maximum Number of Option
Module Interfaces
Watchdog Timer
0.1 ms / k to 0.5 ms / k
Battery
Type
3 V Lithium
Service Life
1200 mAh
Shelf Life
163
CPU Modules
14 micro A
Maximum
420 micro A
Communication
Modbus (RS-232)
Programming software
Compatibility
General
Diagnostics
Power Up
Runtime
RAM
RAM
RAM Address
RAM Address
Executive Checksum
Executive Checksum
Processor
Bus Current Required
1.25 A
TOD Clock
Operating Temperature
0 ... 50 degrees C
164
CPU Modules
LED Indicators
Figure
Ready
Run
Bat Low
Modbus
Modbus +
Error A
Mem Prt
LED
Descriptions
Table
The following table shows the LED error codes for the 140 CPU 534 14A module.
LEDS
Color
Indication when On
Ready
Green
Run
Green
Bat Low
Green
Modbus +
Green
Error A
Red
Mem Prt
Red
Modbus
Amber
165
CPU Modules
The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140 CPU 534 14A.
Number of Blinks
Code
Error
Continuous
0000
80B
80C
769
72A
82E
72B
72F
730
166
72C
CPU Modules
604
605
606
607
608
609
614
615
616
617
618
619
61E
61F
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
631
bad interrupt
503
52D
402
300
301
EXEC Checksum
8001
8002
8003
167
CPU Modules
Note: Information in the Code column is visible only with the Flash download utility.
168
CPU Modules
The slide switch is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus
(RS232) ports. Three options are available.
Setting the switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port.
Setting the switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU)
functionality to the port.
Setting the switch to the bottom position lets you assign comm parameters to the
port in software.
ASCII
RTU
mem
2,400
Parity
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
Note: The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is
set to RTU mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the
CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected, as
well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.
The following table shows the RTU comm port parameters. The comm
parameters are set and cannot be changed.
RTU Comm Port Parameters
Baud
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
9,600
Parity
169
CPU Modules
19,200
600
7,200
300
4,800
150
3,600
134.5
2,400
110
2,000
75
1,800
Parity
1,200
9,600
50
Enable/Disable
Odd/Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
1/2
Device Address
Rear Panel
Switches
7/8
1 ... 247
SW1
6
9
SW2
170
CPU Modules
SW1 sets the upper digit (tens) of the address. SW2 sets the lower digit (ones) of
the address.
The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.
Node Address
SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
0 ... 4
Note: If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be
"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.
Key Switch
Figure
Stop
Mem
Protect
Stop
Mem
Ptr
Start
Start
Note: The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above) are for reference
only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.
171
CPU Modules
Key Switch
Description
Table
Key switch
Transition
Controller Status
Stop
Controller is stopped Y
and disables
Programmer
changes
From Start or
Memory
Protect: Stops
controller, if
running, and
disables
Programmer
changes
Mem Prt
Controller may be
either stopped or
running and
Programmer
changes are
disabled
From Stop or
Start: Prevents
Programmer
changes,
controller run
status is not
changed
Start
172
Key switch
Position
Controller may be
either stopped or
running,
Programmer may
make changes and
start/stop the
controller
From Stop:
Enables
Programmer
changes, starts
controller. From
Memory
Protect:
Enables
programmer
changes, starts
controller if
stopped
CPU Modules
Modbus
Connector
Pinouts
All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that support
Modicons proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus
port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.
Note: Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is
recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990 NAA 263 20 or 990
NAA 263 50) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a
Quantum CPU or NOM module.
Modbus Ports
Pinout
Connections
Figure
The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin
connections.
IBM-AT
9-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
IBM-XT
25-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
CD
1 SHIEL
SHIEL 1
SHIELD
RX
TX
2
3
2 RX
3 TX
TX
RX
2
3
2
3
RX
TX
DTR 4
GRND 5
4 DTR
5 GRND
RTS
CTS
4
5
4
5
DTR
GRND
DSR
6 DSR
DSR
DSR
RTS
8
9
CTS
RTS
7 RTS
CTS
GRND 7
8 CTS
9 NC
NC
DTR
20
NC
173
CPU Modules
174
At a Glance
Introduction
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
Quantum Remote I/O (RIO) Head Module (140 CRP 931 00)
Quantum Remote I/O (RIO) Head Module (140 CRP 932 00)
181
RIO Drop Single and Dual Channel Module (140 CRA 931 00 and 932 00)
176
186
175
Networking
Quantum Remote I/O (RIO) Head Module (140 CRP 931 00)
Overview
The Remote I/O Head Single and Dual Channel modules are installed in the same
backplane as the system controlling CPU modules. The RIO head is used to transfer
data bi-directionally between the CPU and RIO drop modules installed in separate
backplanes. A coaxial cable network is used to interconnect the RIO head module
and one or more RIO drop modules.
The following figure shows the Remote I/O (RIO) modules parts.
140
CRA 932 00
RIO DROP
LED Area
Version Label
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable Door
Remote I/O
DROP N0.
RIO Coax
Connector
176
Networking
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the Remote I/O Head Single and
Dual Channel modules.
Drop Type
Quantum, 200 Series, 500 Series, 800 Series, or SY/MAX (any mix)
Drops
31 max
Words/Drop
64 In / 64 Out
ASCII
Coax Termination
Internal 75 ohms
Coax Shield
1.544 mb
Dynamic Range
35 dB
Isolation
External Connections
One Channel
Two Channels
General
Diagnostics
Power Up
Executive Checksum
RAM Address/Data
Maximum Number of
CPRs Supported by
the Controller
Bus Current Required
(Typical)
Power Dissipation
(Typical)
Single Channel:
Dual Channel:
Dual Channel:
750 mA
3W
3.8 W
177
Networking
CAUTION
Connectivity Compliance
To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/
336/EEC), the RIO head module must be connected using quad
shielded cable (see the Remote I/O Cable System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 101 00, V2.0).
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
LED Indicators
Figure
The following figure shows the LED indicators for the RIO Head module.
Ready
Error A
Com Act
LED
Descriptions
Table
Error B
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the RIO Head module.
LEDS
Color
Indication When On
Ready
Green
Error A
Red
Error B
178
Green
Com Act
Red
Networking
Error Codes
Table
The Blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Head module table show the
number of times the Com Act LED on the RIO Head module blinks for each type of
error and the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).
The following table shows the blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Head
module.
Number of Blinks
Code
Error
Slow (steady)
0000
6820
6822
6823
682A
682B
682C
6840
6841
6842
6843
6844
6845
6846
6847
6849
684A
684B
684C
6729
6616
6617
6619
681A
681C
6503
6402
6300
6301
8
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
8001
Networking
8002
8003
180
Networking
Quantum Remote I/O (RIO) Head Module (140 CRP 932 00)
Overview
The Remote I/O Head Single and Dual Channel modules are installed in the same
backplane as the system controlling CPU module. The RIO head is used to transfer
data bi-directionally between the CPU and RIO drop modules installed in separate
backplanes. A coaxial cable network is used to interconnect the RIO head module
and one or more RIO drop modules.
The following figure shows the Remote I/O (RIO) modules parts.
140
CRA 932 00
RIO DROP
LED Aera
Version Label
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable Door
Remote I/O
DROP N0.
RIO Coax
Connector
181
Networking
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the Remote I/O Head Single and
Dual Channel modules.
Drop Type
Quantum, 200 Series, 500 Series, 800 Series, or Symax (any mix)
Drops
31 max
Words/Drop
64 In / 64 Out
ASCII
Coax Termination
Internal 75 W
Coax Shield
1.544 mb
Dynamic Range
35 dB
Isolation
External Connections
One Channel
Two Channels
General
Diagnostics
Executive Checksum
Power Up
RAM Address/Data
182
Single Channel:
Dual Channel:
3W
3.8 W
Networking
CAUTION
Connectivity Compliance
To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/
336/EEC), the RIO head module must be connected using quad
shielded cable (see the Remote I/O Cable System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 101 00, V2.0).
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
LED Indicators
Figure
The following figure shows the LED indicators for the RIO Head module.
Ready
Error A
Com Act
LED Indicators
Descriptions
Error B
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the RIO Head module.
Color
Indication When On
Ready
Green
Com Act
Green
Fault
Red
Error A
Red
Error B
LEDs
Red
183
Networking
Error Codes
Table
Blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Head module table show the number
of times the Com Act LED on the RIO Head module blinks for each type of error and
the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).
The following table shows the blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Head
module.
Number of Blinks
Code
Error
Slow (steady)
0000
6820
6822
6823
682A
682B
682C
6840
6841
6842
6843
6844
6845
6846
6847
6849
684A
684B
684C
6729
6616
6617
6619
681A
681C
6503
6402
6300
6301
8
184
8001
Networking
8002
8003
185
Networking
RIO Drop Single and Dual Channel Module (140 CRA 931 00 and 932 00)
Overview
The Remote I/O Drop Single and Dual Channel modules are used to transfer data
bi-directionally over a coaxial cable network between I/O modules installed in the
same (RIO drop) backplane and the RIO head installed in the CPU backplane.
RIO Module
Figure
The following figure shows the Remote I/O (RIO) modules parts.
140
CRA 932 00
RIO DROP
LED Area
Version Label
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable Door
Remote I/O
DROP N0.
RIO Coax
Connector
186
Networking
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the Remote I/O Drop Single and
Dual Channel modules.
Specifications
I/O Type
Quantum
Modules/Drop
14 max
Words/Drop
64 In / 64 Out
Coax Termination
Internal 75 ohms
Coax Shield
Capacitor to ground
1.544 mb
Dynamic Range
35 dB
Isolation
External Connections
One Channel
Two Channels
General
Holdup Time
Software configurable
Note: In the event of a communication loss with the
remote processor, this is the time that output modules
will retain their last operating state. Input module data will
be held in the system controlling CPU. After this time,
output modules will assume their predefined time-out
states, and inputs will be zeroed by the CPU.
Diagnostics
Power Up
Executive Checksum
RAM Address/Data
Single Channel:
Dual Channel:
750 mA
3W
3.8 W
187
Networking
CAUTION
Connection Compliance
To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/
336/EEC), the RIO Head module must be connected using quad
shielded cable (see the Remote I/O Cable System Planning and
Installation Guide, 890 USE 101 00, V2.0).
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
LED Indicators
Figure
The following figure shows the LED indicators for the Drop module.
Ready
Fault
Error A
Com Act
LED
Descriptions
Table
Error B
The following table shows the RIO Drop module LED descriptions.
Color
Indication when On
Ready
Green
Com Act
Green
Fault
Red
Error A
Red
Error B
188
LEDS
Red
Networking
Error Codes
Table
Blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Drop module table show the number
of times the Com Act LED on the RIO Drop module blinks for each type of error and
the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).
The following table shows the blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Drop
module.
Number of Blinks
Code
Description of Error
6701H
6601H
6602H
6603H
6604H
6605H
6606H
6607H
6608H
6609H
660AH
660BH
660CH
6501H
6401H
Rear Panel
Switches
660DH
6301H
Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the RIO Drop Modules and are
used for setting RIO drop addresses (refer to the illustration and table below).
SW1 (top switch) sets the upper digit (tens); SW2 (bottom switch) sets the lower digit
(ones). The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of
11.
189
Networking
Rear Panel
Switches Figure
The following figure shows the SW1 top and SW2 bottom switches.
SW1 (Top)
3
4
6
9
3
4
SW2 (Bottom)
The following table shows the node addresses of the SW1 and SW2 switches.
Node Address
SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
0 ... 4
Note: If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be
"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.
190
Overview
Field Bus
Modules
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
192
199
191
192
This map contains information on the 140 CRP 811 00 field bus Communication
Module.
Module View
View of the 140 CRP 811 00 communications module and the Profibus tap:
Customer Identification Label
(Fold label and place it inside door)
LED Status
Display
Removable Door
RS-232C port
PCMCIA Card
(467 NHP 911)
For a detailed discussion of the planning, installation and use of a Quantum Profibus
system, refer to the Modicon TSX Quantum Profibus-DP Under Modsoft User
Manual, P/N 840 USE 468 00, and the Profibus-DP Configutator for CRP 811, P/N
840 USE 469 00.
193
Function
Shield
RxD/TxD-P
Receive/Transmit-Data-P (+)
DGND
5 V common
VP
+5 V
194
Signal
RxD/TxD-N
Receive/transmit-data-N(-)
RS-232C Port
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
Legend to pinouts for the RS-232C port:
Socket
Function
RXD
Received Data
TXD
Transmitted Data
GND
Signal Ground
RTS
Request to Send
Signal
CTS
Clear to Send
195
LED Status
Fault
Backplane
PROFIBUS
DP S/R
Load
The LEDs backplane, DP S/R, Profibus and Load are used in two ways. Either to
indicate the transfer of Profibus user data and config data or to indicate error/fault
conditions from the option board internal software tasks and software modules.
To indicate the different functions on the LED block, the following basic blink
frequencies and their abbreviations are defined for the option boards.
Flashing frequency time on
Time off
Slow
400 ms
400 ms
Medium
200 ms
200 ms
Fast
100 ms
100 ms
Color
Function
Description
Active
Green
On
Flashing
Ready
Green
On
Module is operational
Fault
Red
On
Backplane
Green
Off
On backplane fault
PROFIBUS
Green
DP S/R
Green
196
LEDs
Color
Function
Description
Load
Yellow
Flashing
CAUTION
Possible hardware damage
To reset the fault LED the CRP811 must be power cycled or not
swapped.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Technical
Specifications
PNO-ident.-No.
5506
1.2 A
Power dissipation
6.5 W
Data interface
RS-232C
197
Technical
Specifications
for PROFIBUSDP with CRP 811
max. 32
Node addresses
1 ... 126
Connection interface
EIA RS-485
Node type
Master class 1
Transmission procedure
half-duplex
Frame length
Data security
198
Hamming distance, HD = 4
The Quantum AS-i Master Module provides AS-i communications between the bus
master module and the sensor/actuator slaves. One master module can control 31
slaves. Multiple master modules can be used in a single control system.
These sensor/actuators can be in the local CPU, an RIO, or a DIO drop adapter.
Note: This module is not available to directly exploit analog slaves (profile 7.1, 7.2,
7.3, 7.4) on an AS-i bus.
199
Front view
Front view of the AS-i module with LED Matrix detail and legend numbers:
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Active
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
5
6
7
1
2
LED matrix of 32 indicator lamps (0 - 31, Green) for diagnostics of the AS-i bus and
display of the state of each slave connected to the bus.
AS-i (Red): ON shows AS-i line not properly powered.Flashing shows automatic
addressing enabled.
SLV/BUS (Green): ON shows the LEDs 0-31 are in SLV (slave) display mode. Displays the
slaves on the bus.
I/O Status (Green): ON shows the LEDs 0-31 are in SLV display mode. Displays the state
of a selected slave.
200
Display block comprising 4 status indicator lamps for displaying the module operating
modes:
Mode (Push Button): provides local diagnostics of the AS-i bus.Press and hold this button
to change from slave mode to bus mode. Then use the Address Push Button to scroll
among the 32 addresses.
Detailed
Information
Address (Push Button): Pressing this button scrolls through the slaves.Hold to reverse
direction of the scroll.
AS-i Channel cable connector - connects module to AS-i cable and AS-i power supply.
For detailed information see The EIA 921 00 AS-i Master Module book, identification
number 840 USE 117 00, or start the newmod.hlp from your Concept CD. To locate
it go to the root of your Concept Installation directory. Example of path:
Drive_X:\Concept\*.hlp
The newmod help system on your concept CD contains a hyperlink labeled "Back to
main Content". This link will not return you to Concept 2.5 Help.
Note: The newmod help system on your concept CD contains a hyperlink labeled
"Back to main Content". This link will not return you to Concept 2.5 Help.
201
202
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter provides information on the distributed I/O (DIO) module, its
specifications, LED indicators and descriptions and rear panel switches for the
following modules:
l
l
l
l
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
Quantum I/O Drop (DIO) Module (CRA 211 10 and 212 10)
Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules (140 CRA 211 20 and 212 20)
204
209
203
DIO
Quantum I/O Drop (DIO) Module (CRA 211 10 and 212 10)
Overview
This section includes specifications and wiring diagrams for the Distributed I/O Drop
Modbus Plus AC power supply single (CRA 211 10) and dual (212 10) channel
modules.
DIO Module
Figure
The following figure shows the parts of the distributed I/O (DIO) module.
140
CRA 211 00
10 80 vdc out
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable Door
Modbus
Plus
Modbus
Plus
Network
Field Wiring
Connector
Node
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 Not used
2 Not used
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 ACL
6 ACN
7
204
DIO
Specifications
Table
The following specifications are for the DIO CRA 211 10 and CRA 212 10 DIO Drop
Modbus Plus AC power supply single and dual channel.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
Input Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
Input Current
Inrush Current
VA Rating
50 VA
Fusing (external)
Operating Mode
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Current
3A
Minimum Load
0A
Protection
Communication
Modbus Plus
General
Specifications
Quantum
Modules/Drop:
Words:
Diagnostics
I/O Type:
Power Up Runtime
RAM Data/Address
Executive Checksum
205
DIO
LED Indicators
Figure
Ready
Fault
Pwr ok
Error A
Modbus +
Wiring Diagram
Error B
The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 CRA 211 10 and 212 10
wiring diagram.
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
ACL
ACN
206
DIO
LED
Descriptions
Table
The following table shows the DIO LED indicators and descriptions.
Color
Indication when On
Ready
Green
Fault
Red
Pwr ok
Green
Modbus +
Green
Error A
Red
Error B
Rear Panel
Switches
LEDS
Red
Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table below) are located on the rear
panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node addresses for the
unit.
SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom
switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the
correct setting for an example address of 11.
Rear Panel
Switches Figure
The following figure shows the SW1 top switch and the SW2 bottom switch.
SW1 (Top)
3
4
6
9
3
4
SW2 (Bottom)
207
DIO
Rear Panel
Switches Table
The following table shows the node addresses of the SW1 and SW2 switches.
Node
Address
SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
0 ... 4
Note: If "0" or an address greater than 32 is selected, the RIO module displays a
flashing Error A and Error B LED to indicate an error condition. Only addresses 132 are valid.
208
DIO
Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules (140 CRA 211 20 and 212 20)
Overview
This section includes specifications and wiring diagrams for the Distributed I/O Drop
Modbus Plus DC power supply single (CRA 211 20) and dual (212 20) channel
modules.
DIO Module
Figure
The following figure shows the parts of the Distributed I/O (DIO) module.
140
CRA 211 00
10 80 vdc out
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable Door
Modbus
Plus
Modbus
Plus
Network
Field Wiring
Connector
Node
Field Wiring
Connector Cover
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 Not used
2 Not used
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 ACL
6 ACN
7
209
DIO
Specifications
Table
The following specifications are for the MB+ DROP DC 1 CH AND MB+ DROP DC
2 CH modules.
Input Requirements
Input Voltage
20 ... 30 Vdc
Input Current
1.6 A
Inrush Current
30 A
1.0 ms max
Fusing (external)
Operating Mode
Standalone
Output to Bus
Voltage
5.1 Vdc
Current
3A
Minimum Load
0A
Protection
Communication
Modbus Plus
General
Specifications
Quantum
Modules/Drop:
Words:
Diagnostics
I/O Type:
Power Up Runtime
RAM Data/Address
Executive Checksum
210
DIO
Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 CRA 211 10 and 212 10
wiring diagram.
1
NOT USED
NOT USED
3
4
24VDC- (Common)
24VDC+
NOT USED
NOT USED
LED Indicators
Figure
Ready
Fault
Pwr ok
Error A
Modbus +
Error B
211
DIO
LED
Descriptions
Table
The following table shows the DIO LED indicators and descriptions.
LEDS
Color
Indication when On
Ready
Red
Pwr ok
Green
Modbus +
Green
Error A
Red
Error B
Rear Panel
Switches
Green
Fault
Red
Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table below) are located on the rear
panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node addresses for the
unit.
SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom
switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the
correct setting for an example address of 11.
Rear Panel
Switches Figure
The following figure shows the SW1 top switch and the SW2 bottom switch.
SW1 (Top)
3
4
6
9
3
4
SW2 (Bottom)
212
DIO
Rear Panel
Switches Table
The following table shows the node addresses of the SW1 and SW2 switches.
Node Address
SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
0 ... 4
Note: If "0" or an address greater than 32 is selected, the RIO module displays a
flashing Error A and Error B LED to indicate an error condition. Only addresses 132 are valid.
213
DIO
214
Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules (140 NOM 21X 00)
Overview
This chapter describes the single and dual channel twisted-pair cable NOM 21X 00
modules.
Modbus Plus
Module Figure
The following figure shows the parts of the Modbus Plus 140 NOM 21X 00 modules.
LED Area
140
NOM 21X 00
controller
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Customer Identification Label
Removable door (Fold label and place it inside door)
ASCI
Modbus Plus
Connector
Chan B
Modbus
mem
Modbus
plus Chan
Modbus Plus
Connector
Chan A
RTU
Modbus
plus Chan
Comm Parameter
Slide Switch
Modbus
Connector
Modbus
Comm 1
Modbus
Comm 2
Modbus
Plus
Network
Node
215
Specifications
Table
The Modbus Plus Head Single and Dual Channel modules provide extended
communication capabilities for the Quantum system within a Modbus Plus
configuration.
The following specifications show the Modbus Plus communication ports.
Communication Ports
NOM 211 00
NOM 212 00
Both Modules
Diagnostics
Power Up
Runtime
RAM
RAM
RAM Address
RAM Address
Executive Checksum
Executive Checksum
Processor
Power Dissipation
(Typical)
4W
216
780 mA
NOM 212 00
780 mA
LED Indicators
Figure
The following figure shows the Modbus Plus NOM LED indicators.
Ready
Run
Modbus
Modbus +
LED
Descriptions
Table
Error A
Error B
The following table shows the Modbus Plus NOM LED Descriptions.
Color
Indication when On
Ready
Green
Run
Green
Modbus
Green
Modbus+
Green
Error A
Red
Error B
LEDs
Red
217
Error Codes
Table
The blinking run LED error codes for the NOM module shows the number of times
the Run LED on the NOM module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes
for each (all codes are in hex).
The following table shows the blinking run LED error codes for the NOM module.
Number of Blinks
Code
Error
Steady
014H
815
49H
4BH
4CH
4DH
4EH
52H
53H
5AH
5BH
616h
617h
618h
parity error
619h
61AH
621H
622H
623H
624H
625H
626H
627H
628H
629H
62aH
62bH
62cH
218
did not get bus ack form 984 interface within 400 ms
59H
56H
62dH
62eH
631H
632H
633H
634H
635H
636H
637H
638H
639H
63AH
681h
682h
683h
684h
685h
686h
687h
688h
689h
68ah
68bh
691h
692h
6AIh
6A2h
6A3h
6A4h
6A5h
5
513h
412h
311h
219
Front Panel
Switches
Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the unit. The switch on
the left is not used. The three-position slide switch on the right is used to select the
comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) port provided with the Modbus
Plus option module. Three options are available, as shown below.
The following figure shows the front panel switches.
ASCII
Switch
not
used
RTU
mem
Rear Panel
Switches
Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the modules. They are used
together to set the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port address for the unit.
Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.
Rotary SW1 (top switch) sets the upper digit (tens), and rotary SW2 (bottom switch)
sets the lower digit (ones) of the Modbus Plus node address. The illustration below
shows the setting for an example address of 11.
3
4
6
9
3
4
SW2 (Bottom)
Note: If "0," or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be
"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.
220
The following table shows the address settings for the SW1 and SW2 switches.
Node Address SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
1 ... 4
Note: If "0," or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be
"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.
2,400
Parity
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU)
functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be
changed:
RTU Comm Port
Parameters
9,600
Parity
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm
parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.
221
19,200
9,600
300
4,800
150
3,600
134.5
2,400
110
2,000
75
1,800
Stop Bits
600
7,200
Data Bits
1,200
50
7/8
1/2
Parity
Device Address
Modbus
Connector
Pinouts
Enable/Disable Odd/Even
Rear panel rotary switch setting
The NOM modules are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports
Modicons proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus
port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.
The following figures show the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin (left) and
25-pin (right).
IBM-AT
9-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
IBM-XT
25-Pin Female
Quantum
9-Pin Male
CD
SHIELD
SHIELD
SHIELD
RX
RX
TX
RX
TX
TX
RX
TX
DTR
DTR
RTS
DTR
GROUND
GROUND
CTS
GROUND
DSR
DSR
DSR
DSR
RTS
RTS
GROUND
RTS
CTS
CTS
NC
CTS
222
NC
DTR
20
NC
Quantum Networking Modbus Plus on Fiber Module (140 NOM 252 00)
Overview
The following information pertains to the Modbus Plus on Fiber module (140 NOM
252 00).
Modbus Plus on
Fiber Module
Figure
The following figure shows the parts of the Modbus Plus 140 NOM 252 00 module.
LED Area
140
NOM 252
00
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable Door Customer Identification Label
(Fold label and place it inside door)
Modbus Connector
Modbus
Plus
Modbus
Plus
ASCII
Comm Parameter
Slide Switch
RTU
ASCII
mem
RTU
mem
Port 2 TX and RX
Connectors
TX
Port 2
TX
RX
Port 2
RX
Port 1 TX and RX
Connectors
TX
RX
Port 1
Port 1
RX
TX
223
Specifications
Table
The Modbus Plus on Fiber module provides connectivity to Modbus Plus nodes by
fiber cable.
The following table shows the specifications for the NOM 252 00 module.
General Communication Ports
Optical Ports
Modbus Port
Transmission/Data Rate
Optical Interface
ST-Type connectors
5 ns or better
Wavelength
820 micrometer
Rise/Fall Time
20 ns or better
-43 dBm
Dynamic Range
-20 dB
Detected Silence
-36 dBm
Miscellaneous Specifications
224
Diagnostics
Power Up
Runtime
RAM
RAM
RAM Address
RAM Address
Executive Checksum
Executive Checksum
Processor
Power Dissipation
750 mA max
External Power
LED Indicators
Figure
4W
The following figure shows the Modbus Plus on Fiber LED indicators.
Ready
Run
Modbus
Modbus +
Fport 1
Fport 2
FRNGoff
225
LED
Descriptions
Table
The following table shows the Modbus Plus on fiber LED descriptions.
Color
Ready
Green
Run
Green
Modbus
Green
Modbus+
Green
Fport1
Green
Fport2
Green
FRNGoff
Front Panel
Switch
LEDs
Indication when On
Red
A three-position slide switch is located on the front of the unit. This switch is used to
select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) port. Three options
are available, as shown below.
The following figure shows the front panel switch.
ASCII
RTU
mem
Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the
following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.
226
2,400
Parity
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU)
functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be
changed:
RTU Comm Port
Parameters
9,600
Parity
Even
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Device Address
Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm
parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.
227
19,200
9,600
600
7,200
300
4,800
150
3,600
134.5
2,400
110
2,000
75
1,800
Data Bits
1,200
50
7/8
Stop Bits
1/2
Parity
Device Address
Rear Panel
Switches
Enable/Disable Odd/Even
Rear panel rotary switch setting
Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the modules. They are used
together to set the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port address for the unit.
Note: The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.
Rotary SW1 (top switch) sets the upper digit (tens), and rotary SW2 (bottom switch)
sets the lower digit (ones) of the Modbus Plus node address. The illustration below
shows the setting for an example address of 11.
The following figure shows the SW1 (top) and SW2 (bottom) switches.
SW1 (Top)
3
4
6
9
3
4
SW2 (Bottom)
228
The following figure shows the node address settings for the SW1 and SW2
switches.
Node Address SW1
SW2
1 ... 9
1 ... 9
10 ... 19
0 ... 9
20 ... 29
0 ... 9
30 ... 39
0 ... 9
40 ... 49
0 ... 9
50 ... 59
0 ... 9
60 ... 64
1 ... 4
Note: If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be
"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.
Modbus
Connector
The NOM 252 00 module is equipped with an RS-232 port (see below) located on
the front of the module. This port uses an eight-position RJ45 (phone jack-type)
connector.
Modbus pin 1
Figure
Pin 1
Note: A D-shell adapter is available from Modicon for NOM 252 00-to-computer
connections: a (110 XCA 20 300) 9-pin adapter for PC-AT type computers (see the
illustration pinout table below).
229
Pinouts Figures
The following figures show the 9-pin adapter front view (left) and side view (right).
Pin 1
110XCA20300
Pin 9
Front View
50.8mm
(2 in)
Side View
Connector
Pinouts Figure
9-pin D-shell
1 DCD
TXD 3
2 RXD
RXD 4
3 TXD
DSR 2
4 DTR
GND 5
5 GDN
6 DRS
CTS 7
7 RTS
RTS 6
8 CTS
9 RI
Chassis 8
BJ45 Cable
Types
230
Case of the
Ground
Connector
This following shows an example of the 110 XCA 282 0X cable. A table is also
provided which includes part numbers and cable lengths.
RJ45 Connector
Figure
The following figure shows the RJ45 connector (Modicon Part # 110 XCA 282 OX).
RJ45
Connector
RJ45
Connector
Modicon Part # 110 XCA 282 0X
Cable Lengths
3 ft. (0.91 m)
10 ft. (3 m)
20 ft. (6 m)
The NOM 252 00 module is connected in the Quantum system by a fiber optic cable
(see below). The cable has two strands. Each module transmits a signal in one
direction. For this reason, each strand must be connected to the transmit port on one
module and the receive port on the other.
One strand of the fiber optic cable is labelled every 10 inches with the
manufacturers name and the cable specifications. This is the only way to distinguish
the two strands.
231
Module B
Transmit
Transmit
Fiber
Port2
Fiber
Port2
Receive
Receive
From Previous
NOM Receive
To Next
NOM Transmit
From Previous
NOM Transmit
Receive
Receive
Fiber
Port1
Fiber
Port1
Transmit
232
To Next
NOM Receive
Transmit
Connecting the
Fiber Optic Cable
The following steps show how to connect the fiber optic cable.
Step
1
Action
Remove the protective plastic coverings from the cable ports and the tips of the
cable. Snap one of the fiber cable clasps (shipped with the module) over the
cable so that the wider end of the tool is closest to the cable end.
Protective Coverings
Cable
Turn the connection ring so that one of the arrows on the side of the ring lines up
with the ridge inside.
Cable Connection Ring
CableTip
Ridge
Arrow
233
Step
3
Action
a.Slide the tool up to the connection ring.
b. Gripping the cable with the plastic cable clasp, slide the cable end onto the
lower cable port. The arrow and the ridge on the connection ring should lineup
with the slot on the left of the cable port.
c. Use the clasp to push the cable over the tab on top of the port.
d. Turn the cable to the right, so that the tab locks securely
e. Remove the clasp.
f. Repeat this process with the remaining strand of cable.
Cable Port
Tab
234
Fiber Optic
Overview and
Configurations
There are many benefits that result from the use of fiber optics. Some of the benefits
are:
l Longer distances between nodes (up to 3 km), thereby, increasing the total length
of the network.
l
l
l
l
Point-to-Point connection
Bus configuration
Tree and Star configurations
Self Healing Ring configuration
Point-to-Point
Configuration
This type of configuration (see below) allows communication over the distance of up
to 3 km through harsh industrial environments.
Point-to-Point
Configuration
Example Figure
I/O
Node # 2
NOM
NOM CPU
I/O
P/S
235
Bus
Configuration
CAUTION
Equipment Failure
The loss of a single node in this configuration disables the rest of the
network. It is suggested that the Self Healing Ring configuration be
used to avoid this problem.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Node # 2
P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O
211
211
Bus
Configuration
Example 1
Node # 1
Legend
MB+ Cable
Fiber Optic
Cable
MB+ Tap with
Terminator
MB+ Tap
(Terminator not
required)
To Node # n
236
I/O
Node #
I/O
I/O
252
252
Node # 4
252
Node # 3
I/O
Node # 2
P/S CPU NOM I/O
I/O
Node # 3
P/S CPU NOM I/O
I/O
252
252
Node # 1
P/S CPU NOM I/O
252
Bus
Configuration
Example 2
To Node # n
Fiber Optic Cable
Note: The distance between nodes on fiber is limited by the maximum allowable
power loss from end-to-end (3 km over 62.5 mm fiber). Power loss includes the
fiber optic cable attenuation, connector losses at the Fiber Optic Receiver and
Transmitter ports, and the system margin of 3 dB.
The end NOM 252 00 in this configuration will have the FRNGoff LED active and
will display the Cable B Framing error in the MBPSTAT (in ladder logic).
The use of tree and star configurations can provide flexibility in the layout of Modbus
Plus and NOM 252 00 networks. The following illustrations show examples of tree
and star configurations. Additional repeaters can be connected in order to extend
communication between electrical links.
237
Tree
Configuration
Example
Node # 1
P/S CPU NOM I/O
252
MB+ Cable
Fiber Optic
Cable
MB+ Tap with
Terminator
MB+ Tap
238
Node # 8
P/S CPU NOM I/O
252
Node # 7
P/S CPU NOM I/O
Node # 9
P/S CPU NOM I/O
252
252
252
Node # 5
P/S CPU NOM I/O
Node # 6
P/S CPU NOM I/O
252
252
Node # 4
P/S CPU NOM I/O
Node # 3
P/S CPU NOM I/O
252
252
Node # 2
P/S CPU NOM I/O
Star Coupler
Configuration
Example
Commercially available passive optical star coupler devices can also be introduced
to the optical link to provide added flexibility to the NOM 252 00 network. A typical
four-port star coupler could be used as follows on a NOM 252 00 optic link.
The following figure shows the star coupler configuration.
Node # 1
Legend
MB+ Cable
Fiber Optic
Cable
MB+ Tap with
Terminator
I/O
Node # 5
P/S CPU NOM I/O
Node # 6
P/S CPU NOM I/O
I/O
Node # 7
P/S CPU NOM I/O
I/O
252
I/O
252
252
Node # 3
P/S CPU NO
I/O
I/O
252
Node # 4
P/S CPU NOM I/O
252
I/O
252
Node # 2
P/S CPU NOM I/O
l The number of repeaters and the length of each segment of fiber cable must be
calculated separately and cannot exceed a maximum pulse width, distortions of
200 ns, between any nodes at the end of the branches.
l 100/140 mm fiber cable is recommended because of its higher available optical
power.
l The use of a maximum of four ports of the passive optical star coupler is
recommended.
239
This configuration can be achieved by connecting the unused fiber optic ports of the
first and last NOM 252 00 directly or through the fiber optic repeater, if a mixed fiber
optic/twisted pairs network is used. This type of connection has all the advantages
of the previously described configurations, along with built-in redundancy. A broken
connection between any two Quantum modules in the ring will automatically
reconfigure the network to the Bus Configuration and continue the communication.
Self-Healing
Ring
Configuration
Example
211
Legend
MB+ Cable
211
Node # 1
P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O
Fiber Optic
Cable
MB+ Tap with
Terminator
MB+ Tap
240
Node # 4
P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O
Node # 5
P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O
252
I/O
252
252
Node # 3
P/S CPU NOM I/O
Hot Standby
Systems Figure
The following figure shows the self healing ring configuration for hot standby
systems example.
Remote I/O
Node # 1
I/O
252
Node # 2
P/S CPU NOM I/O
110
252
Standby System
P/S CPU CRP NOM CHS P/S
931
110
252
931
Primary System
P/S CPU CRP NOM CHS P/S
To Other
RIO Drops
I/O
I/O
241
Network Status
The information about the condition of the network is presented in the form of
Network Status. This information indicates the loss of connection (the first break in
the self healing ring) and is similar to the way existing 140 NOM 212 00 reports the
loss of redundant cable.
The break of the fiber cable will be detected by the module not receiving the signal
from the side where the cable is broken and will be reported as a Cable B Framing
error by MBPSTAT. This condition will also activate the FRNGoff LED on the front
of the module.
Recommended
Materials for
Fiber Optic Links
Modicon does not manufacture fiber optic products such as cables, connectors, or
special tools. However, we have experience with third party suppliers of materials
and can give some guidelines on what will work with our products.
Connectors
Part Number
Operating Temperature
ST Bayonet (Epoxy)
3M 6105
3M 6100
ST Bayonet (Epoxy)
ST Bayonet (Epoxy)
Light_Crimp ST Style
3M 2529 Fiberlok1 II
Note: All connectors must have a short boot for strain relief.
Termination Kits
Description
AMP 503746-1
Light_Crimp XTC
AMP 50330-2
3M 2530
3M Hot Melt
3M 05-00185
3M 05-00187
242
Part Number
Bayonet ST (Epoxy)
Optical Star
Passive
Couplers
The AMP Model 95010-4 is a pig-tail option and must be used with an enclosure
(use AMP Model 502402-4, a 19 in rack-mount enclosure, 1.7 in high).
Other Tools
Table
The following table shows other tools that may be needed for fiber optic links.
Part Number
Description/Use
3M (Photodyne) Optical
Source Driver
9XT
3M (Photodyne) Optical
Light Source
1700-0850-T
3M (Photodyne) Power
Meter
17XTA-2041
7XE-0660-J
BANAV-FS-0001
Cables
Product
8194
It is recommended that you use 62.5/125 mm cable (such as AMP 503016-1, AMP
502986-1, or equivalent) with a maximum attenuation of 3.5 dB/km in most of the
configurations.
Note: All cables must have a maximum cable diameter of not more than 3 mm at
the terminal side.
243
Connections
The following information discusses connecting the NOM 252 00 on fiber cable,
adding a new mode to the network, and repairing the break in the cable.
Note: When a new network is assembled, it is recommended that you connect all
cables before powering up the system. Connect fiber optic cables as described
previously in this section.
Adding a New
Node to the
Network
If a new node is added to an existing network in order to extend the network (at the
end of any configuration), then a new node may be connected first by fiber cable and
then hot-swapped to the backplane to avoid errors to the existing network.
If a new mode is added to the middle of the network, the fiber optic cables need to
be disconnected from one side of the existing NOM 252 module and connected to
port 1 or 2 of a new node. Additional fiber optic cable then needs to be connected to
the second port of the new NOM 252 and to the next NOM 252 in the network, the
new NOM 252 then has to be hot-swapped to the backplane.
Repairing the
Break in the
Cable
Because the NOM 252 00 will stop transmitting in the direction from which it is not
receiving the signal, the replacement of a broken fiber optic cable and the
reconnection of it will not re-establish communication over that segment. The hot
swap of only one NOM 252 at the repaired connections is required to complete the
connection.
Note: The break of any fiber connectors or fiber optic cables is the equivalent to
the break of the trunk cable in a Modbus Plus network on copper.
For the self healing ring configuration, the repair of the first break in the fiber optic
network has to be scheduled to the time when one of the units on either side of the
repaired break can be hot-swapped without creating the problem by disconnecting
the node.
Note: Self healing configurations are not considered redundant networks. High
system availability can be achieved with redundant networks.
244
Calculations
Calculate the number of NOM 252 00 modules in a fiber network using the following
formula:
Step
Action
The total allowable pulse width distortions and jitter are limited to 20% of the bit
period and is 200 nsec for the full fiber optic network.
+1
5 nsec
where "L" is the total cable length (km), and "X" is the jitter (added by the fiber
optic cable) in nsec/km:
X = 3 ns/km for 50/125 micron meters
5 ns/km for 62.5/125 micron meters
7.5 ns/km for 100/140 micron meters
245
246
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter provides information on the NOE 3X1 TCP/IP, NOE 3X1 SY/MAX and
NOE 5X 100 MMS Ethernet modules.
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
248
252
256
259
265
247
Ethernet Modules
The Quantum NOE 2X1 TCP/IP is described in this section. This includes
specifications for the NOE 211 00 and NOE 251 00 modules.
Ethernet TCP/IP
Module Figure
The following figure shows the Ethernet TCP/IP NOE 2X1 00 module.
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
140
NOE 251 00
controller
LED Display
Removable Door
Global
Address
Global
Address
Fiber Optic
10 base FL
Fiber
Optic
10 base
Transmit Cable
Connector
Receive Cable
Connector
X
248
Ethernet Modules
Specifications
Table
The Ethernet TCP/IP modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide an
interface to Ethernet networks for the Quantum Automation Series system.
Communication Ports
Ethernet ports transmit and receive Modbus commands encapsulated in TCP/IP protocol:
NOE 211 00 1, 10BASE-T Ethernet network (RJ-45) port. NOE 251 00 1, 10BASE-FL
Ethernet network (ST-style) port
Data Transfer Frequency
10 mb
Power Dissipation
5W
1A
Compatibility
Programming Software
Quantum Controllers
LED Indicators
Figure
Fault
Run
Coll
Link
Kernel
Appl
249
Ethernet Modules
LED
Descriptions
Table
Indication when On
Active
Green
Ready
Green
Run
Green
Link
Green
Kernel
Amber
Fault
Red
Coll
Red
Appl
Installing the
NOE Module
LEDs
Amber
250
Ethernet Modules
Installation
Example
The following example shows the steps for discovering the default IP network
address.
Step
1
Action
Locate the global address label on the front panel of the module.
84. 11.114.168
If you use the default IP network address and if your network uses Ethernet II
framing and if you do not need to specify the default gateway or a subnet mask,
then you may install the module without changing the default configuration.
CAUTION
System Error
Do not connect this module to your network until you have ensured that
its IP address will be unique on the network.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
CAUTION
Hardware Restrictions
The cable for an Ethernet module must be routed through an Ethernet
hub for the network to function properly. Do not connect the module
directly to another device.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
251
Ethernet Modules
This section includes information for the NOE 311 00 and 351 00 SY/MAX Ethernet
modules.
The Quantum SY/MAX Ethernet modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling
provide an interface for the Quantum Automation Series system to SY/MAX devices
via Ethernet.
Ethernet SY/MAX
Module Figure
The following figure shows the NOE 3X1 00 SY/MAX Ethernet modules.
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
140
NOE 311 00
controller
LED Display
Removable Door
Global
Address
Fiber Optic
10 base FL
Transmit Cable
Connector
Receive Cable
Connector
Tx
Rx
Port 1
Rx
Tx
Note: The NOE 311 00 is equipped with one RJ-45 connector instead of the fiber
optic connectors (as shown above on the NOE 351 00).
252
Ethernet Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the SY/MAX Ethernet modules NOE
311 00 and 351 00.
Communication Ports
NOE 311 00
NOE 351 00
Cable Type
10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet
Wire Size
10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet
20 AWG
Topology
10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet
Bus
Star
Connector
10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet
BNC (UG-274)
Model 450
Model 650
SFI160
SFW390-VAX
Streamline Version 1.3
1A
253
Ethernet Modules
LED Indicators
Figure
Fault
Collision
Link
Kernel
LED
Descriptions
Table
Appl
Indication when On
Active
Green
Ready
Green
Run
Green
Link
Green
Kernel
Amber
On during download.
Fault
Red
Collision
Red
Appl
254
LEDs
Amber
Ethernet Modules
SY/MAX
Addressing
Be sure that the module is assigned a unique SY/MAX drop number during
configuration.
WARNING
Personal injury or equipment damage
Failure to assign a unique SY/MAX drop number during configuration
can cause severe personal injury or equipment damage.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe injury or
equipment damage.
255
Ethernet Modules
The section includes information for the NOE 5X1 00 MMS Ethernet modules, NOE
511 00 and NOE 551 00.
The Quantum MMS Ethernet modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide
an interface for the Quantum Automation Series system to MMS devices via
Ethernet.
Ethernet MMS
Module Figure
The following figure shows the NOE 5X1 00 MMS Ethernet modules.
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
140
NOE 511 00
controller
LED Display
Removable Door
Global
Address
Fiber
Optic
Transmit Cable
Connector
Receive Cable
Connector
Tx
Rx
Port 1
Rx
Tx
Note: The NOE 511 00 is equipped with one RJ45 connector instead of the fiber
optic connectors (as shown above on the NOE 551 00).
256
Ethernet Modules
Specifications
Table
NOE 551 00
Cable Type
10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet
Wire Size
10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet
20 AWG
Topology
10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet
Bus
Star
Connector
10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet
BNC (UG-274)
LED Indicators
Figure
10 mb
1A
Fault
Run
Collision
Link
Kernel
Appl
257
Ethernet Modules
LED
Descriptions
Table
Color
Indication when On
Active
Green
Ready
Green
Run
Green
Link
Green
Kernel
On during download.
Red
Collision
Red
Appl
258
Amber
Fault
Amber
Ethernet Modules
This section includes information for the NOA 611 X0 InterBus communications
modules, NOA 611 00 and 611 10.
InterBus
Communications
Module Figure
The following figure shows the NOA 611 X0 InterBus Communications module.
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
140
NOA 611 00
controller
LED Display
Removable Door
Seven Segment
Display
Reset Pushbutton
RS-232C Port
InterBus Port
Note: The NOA 611 00 is not equipped with a seven-segment display (as shown
above on the NOA 611 10).
259
Ethernet Modules
Specifications
Table
The Quantum InterBus is the interface module to the InterBus bus. The InterBus bus
is a fieldbus network designed for I/O blocks and intelligent devices used in
manufacturing.
The following table shows the InterBus specifications.
I/O Type
TSX Quantum
Data Interface
InterBus
500 mb
Connection Styles
5 Vdc
700 mA
Power Dissipation
Physical Location
LED Indicators
Figure
Quantum Controllers
Active
IB-S Run
F
Master
RBUS
LBUS
Slave
DEA202
Memory
Start Up
BS Off
260
Ethernet Modules
LED
Descriptions
Table
Color
Function
Green
Active
Green
Red
IB-S Run
Green
BS Off
Yellow
Master
Red
RBUS
Red
LBUS
Red
Slave
Red
DEA202
Red
Memory
Seven Segment
Display
Red
Memory fault.
Start Up
Red
The seven segment display is only applicable to the NOA 611 10 module.
Display
Meaning
||
- -
Interbus is running
Front Panel
Connections and
Controls
The InterBus module is equipped with an InterBus port and a Modbus Plus port, both
are female 9-pin D connectors (see below for pinouts), and a reset pushbutton.
261
Ethernet Modules
InterBus Port
Connect the remote bus cable to the female port labeled "remote bus."
INTERBUS
remote bus
Signal
Function
DO
DI
Data In (+)
GND
Signal Ground
DO
DI
262
Ethernet Modules
RS-232C Port
Use a Modbus data cable, Part# 990 NAA 263 20 (3 m in length) to connect to the
female RS-232 C port.
RS 232 C
Signal
Function
D2 (RXD)
Received Data
D1 (TXD)
Transmitted Data
E2 (GND)
Signal Ground
S2 (RTS)
Request to Send
M2 (CTS)
Clear to Send
Reset
Pushbutton
The reset pushbutton performs a hardware reset of the module which must be done
each time new firmware has been downloaded. This button allows you to reset the
module without removing it from the backplane.
Positioning the
Module
The InterBus-S module may be mounted in a local backplane. When mounted in the
local backplane, the proper loadables must be loaded to the controller to support the
module.
Required
Modsoft
Loadables
All Modsoft loadables are accessible from Groupe Schneiders World Wide Web site
at http://www.modicon.com. From the home page, make the follow selections: /
Support/Files, fixes and updates/Software for SA products/PL Library/Loadables/
NOA 6110X ZIP. You should also download "read 611.pdf"
Note: 140 CPU 113 02 does not support the 140 NOA 611 10 module.
263
Ethernet Modules
Comparison of
NOA 611 00 and
611 10 Modules
The differences between the NOA 611 00 and 611 10 are delineated in the table
below.
The following table shows the comparison of the NOA 611 00 and 611 10 modules.
Characteristics
NOA 611 00
NOA 611 10
Physical Addressing
User Option
Logical Addressing
User Option
PCP Channel
PCP Version
N/A
1.5
User option
User Option
Y (11303, 21304)
Y (11303, 21304)
Y (42402)
Local only
Local only
Software Versions
Minimum CPU Firmware Rev.
2.1
1.05
2.0
2.0
2.02
Modsoft Rev.
2.4
2.4
Concept Rev.
264
2.1
1.1
>2.0
Ethernet Modules
The NOL modules provide connectivity between a Modicon Quantum controller and
a control network based on Echelons LonWorks technology. Once the NOL module
has been installed in a Quantum backplane and configured, it can be bound to an
existing LonWorks network, and installed as a standard node.
Note: The NOL module requires a valid LonWorks configuration file (.XIF) loaded
into it to define the LonWorks network variables to which it will be bound.
Note: You must have a LonWorks compliant network management tool, such as
Metra Vision, to install an NOL module on a LonWorks network.
LonWorks
Network Option
Modules Figure
The following figure shows the 911 X0 LonWorks Network Option Module.
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
140
NOL 911
00
LED Display
Removable Door
Domain
Subset 1
Subset 2
Service Pin
Reset Button
Node ID
Auxillary LonWorks
Comm Port
Primary LonWorks
Comm Port
Executive
Vers
The condition of the NOL module is indicted by the status (off, on, or blinking) of the
LED indicators.
265
Ethernet Modules
LED Indicator
Figure
MSG In
MSG Out
Wink
Srvc
LED
Descriptions
Active
Indicates state of the NOL module configuration. When lit, signifies that
module has received a valid network variable configuration with I/O mapping,
and is communicating with the DX Loadable at the CPU.
Ready
Indicates the NOL module has passed internal diagnostics and initialization
and is ready to be configured or transferred into an active state.
MSG In
MSG Out
Wink
Flashes briefly when the NOL module receives a wink message from the
LonWorks network. Also used to display internal error codes defined below.
Srvc
266
LEDs
Ethernet Modules
LED Indicator
Status
Color
Powered Up
Normal
Operation
Not Configured
Configured
Configured
Not
Programmed
Not
Programmed
Error
Condition
Programmed
Active
Green
Off
Off
On
Off 1
Ready
Green
Blink
On
On
Off 2
MSG In
Green
Off
Off
Blink
N/A
MSG Out
Green
Off
Off
Blink
N/A
Wink
Green
Off
Off
Blink on
command
Blink 3
Srvc
Yellow
Off
Blink
Off
N/A
1. If not lit, either the LON module requires configuration and mapping, or is not
communicating with the CPU by way of the DX Loadable
2. If a LON module is inserted into the backplane and the Ready LED does not illuminate, the
Wink LED should be observed for an error code.
3. See Wink LED codes below.
The Wink LED is used to display error conditions. The following table shows the
number of times the LED blinks for each type of error.
The following table shows the error conditions.
Number of Blinks
Front Panel
Push-Buttons
and Connectors
Error Condition
267
Ethernet Modules
Service Pin
Push-Button
The service pin push-button provides stimulus for LonWorks network installation.
When depressed, it causes the Service LED to illuminate, and forces the Neuron
Chip in the module to output its unique 48-bit ID and Program ID.
Reset PushButton
The reset push-button performs a hardware reset of the module which must be done
each time new firmware has been downloaded. This button allows you to reset the
module without removing it from the backplane.
Note: The Reset push-button is recessed and requires a paper clip or similar tool
to activate.
Connectors
There are three connectors located on the front of the NOL module.
RS-232
Configuration
Port
This is a 9 pin, D-shell, female, RS-232 compatible serial port wired in a 3 wire DTE
configuration (shown below) with no hardware handshake signals presented.
Attributes are:
l
l
l
l
268
Configured at a fixed rate of 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
Used to download configuration and new firmware to the module.
Supports XMODEM protocol with an ASCII terminal based command processor.
Can be directly connected to a PC serial communications port.
Ethernet Modules
9-Pin
Configuration
Figure
1
RS 232 C
6
2
3
4
7
8
9
Signal
Function
RXD
Received Data
TXD
Transmitted Data
GND
Signal Ground
Modbus cables 990 NAA 263 20 and 990 NAA 263 50 are suitable for connection
between the PC serial port and NOL module RS-232 port.
Primary
LonWorks
Communication
Port
The primary LonWorks communication port is the primary interface for wiring into a
LonWorks network. The connector is a two-position 5.08 mm screw terminal.
269
Ethernet Modules
Auxiliary
LonWorks
Communication
Port
The auxiliary LonWorks communication port is the auxiliary interface for wiring into
a LonWorks network. The connector is an eight position RJ-45 (phone jack) socket.
The figure below shows a 1-pin connector.
Pin 1
270
Ethernet Modules
NOL Module
Media Types
The NOL module supports three twisted pair media types with different network
topologies or data transfer speeds. The module is offered in three models.
Transceiver
Type
Configuration
TP/FTT-10
TP/XF-78
TP/XF-1250
78,000 BPS
Decide which type of cable will best suit your application. The type of cable you
choose affects the length of the network, including bit error rate and maximum baud
rate.
WARNING
Incompatibility
NOL modules are Not compatible in Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO)
racks.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe injury or
equipment damage.
271
Ethernet Modules
272
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Modules for the Quantum
At a Glance
Introduction
l
l
l
l
l
l
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
273
280
293
299
304
316
This section provides specifications and descriptions of the high speed counter
modules EHC 105 00, Five Channel Discrete High Speed Counter.
273
Intelligent/Special Purpose
EHC 105 00
Counter Module
The following figure shows the EHC 105 00 Five Channel Discrete High Speed
Counter module.
LED Area
140
EHC 105 00
10 80 vdc
274
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Terminal Strip
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
3
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Specifications
Table
The High Speed Counter, 5 Channel, 100 khz module is a discrete counter for
proximity and magnetic pickups.
The following table shows the specifications for the high speed counter.
Number of Channels
LEDs
Active
F
R (Green) 1 ... 8 (Green - left column) -
Module is ready
24 Vdc is present
@ 5 Vdc
@ 24 Vdc
Input Current
7 mA
Duty Cycle
1:1
Data Formats
Operation Modes
30 Vdc
Discrete Inputs
VREF Supply + 24 Vdc
On State (Vdc) -3.0 ... 5.0. Off State (Vdc) 15.0 ... 30.0
5 mA
Discrete Outputs
FET Switch ON
20 ... 30 Vdc
210 mA max
Miscellaneous
Isolation (Channel to Bus)
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Fault Detection
Power Dissipation
6W
250 mA
External Fusing
User discretion
Compatibility
LED Indicators
Figure
The following figure shows the LED indicators for the EHC 105 00 high speed
counter.
Active
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
6
7
8
276
6
7
8
Intelligent/Special Purpose
LED
Descriptions
Table
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the EHC 105 00 high speed
counter.
LEDs
Color
Indication when On
Active
Green
Red
Green
Green
C1 ... C5
Green
Green
277
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Wiring Diagram
Figure
5 Vdc C1
2
4
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
5 Vdc Counter
Input Signals
(C1...C5)
17
N/C
5 Vdc C2
N/C
5 Vdc C3
N/C
5 Vdc C4
5 Vdc
To M11
5 Vdc C5
N/C
M11
M12
24 Vdc C1
24 Vdc Counter
Input Signals
(C1...C5)
24 Vdc C2
24 Vdc C3
M13
M14
24 Vdc C4
M15
24 Vdc
To M11
24 Vdc C5
20
19
+
IN1
IN2
22
21
24
23
26
25
24 Vdc
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN8
24 Vdc
Input Signals
(IN1...IN8)
IN7
28
27
Common
Common
30
29
32
31
34
33
OUT2
OUT1
OUT3
OUT4
OUT6
24 Vdc
Output Signals
(OUT1...OUT8)
OUT5
36
35
38
37
40
39
OUT8
OUT7
Return
24 Vdc
278
Intelligent/Special Purpose
279
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose High Speed Counter Modules (140 EHC 202
00)
Overview
l Two counters that operate in pulse or quadrature mode and accept single- ended
or differential inputs.
l Two FET output switches for each counter turned on when the counter
reaches programmed setpoint or maximum values, and turned off by changes in
counter values, software commands, or a hard wired reset from the field.
Note: Refer to High Speed Counter, p. 731 for configuring and operating the EHC
202 with Modsoft.
High Speed
Counter Module
Figure
The High Speed Counter, 2 Channel, 500 khz module operates in pulse or
quadrature modes and accepts single-ended or differential inputs.
The following figure shows the EHC 202 00 Two Channel High Speed Counter
module.
LED Area
140
HEC 202
00
Field Wiring
Terminal Strip
280
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
3
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
21
22
24
26
28
30
32
23
25
27
29
31
33
34
36
35
37
38
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the EHC 202 00 High Speed
Counter module.
Number of Channels
LEDs
Active
F
8 Input Status LEDs (Green)
4 Output Status LEDs (Green)
Count Frequency
Registers Required
Data Formats
16 Bit Counter
65,535 Decimal
32 Bit Counter
2,147,483,647 Decimal
Discrete Inputs
Operation Modes
Incremental. Quadrature
30 Vdc
Input Threshold
Single Ended Mode
VREF Supply
On State (Vdc)
+ 5 Vdc
0 ... 2.0
+ 12 Vdc
0 ... 5.0
+ 24 Vdc
0 ... 11.0
1.8 Vdc
Input Resistance
10 k
Discrete Outputs
Output Levels (1A, 1B, 2A, 2B)
FET Switch ON
0.5 A
Output Protection
Miscellaneous
Isolation (Channel to Bus)
Fault Detection
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Power Dissipation
Bus Current Required
650 mA
Fusing
Compatibility
Fuse Location
Figure
140
HEC 202 00
10 80 vdc out
Fuse
Location
Note: Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to
gain access to the fuse.
282
Intelligent/Special Purpose
LED Indicators
Figure
The following figure shows the LED indicators for the EHC 202 00 High Speed
Counter module.
Active
In 1
En 2
Pre C1
Pre C2
Res 01
Res 02
Out 1A
Out 2A
Out 1B
LED
Descriptions
Table
In 2
En 1
Out 2B
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the EHC 202 00 high speed
counter.
Color
Indication when On
Active
Green
Red
In 1
Green
Counter 1 input
En 1
Green
Pre C1
Green
Res 01
Green
In 2
Green
Counter 2 input
En 2
Green
Pre C2
Green
Res 02
Green
Out 1A
Green
Counter 1A output
Out 1B
Green
Counter 1B output
Out 2A
Green
Counter 2A output
Out 2B
LEDs
Green
Counter 2B output
283
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Controlling the
Module
l Increment/decrement the input counters with serial pulses from encoders or other
sources.
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
284
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Timing Diagrams
This section includes timing diagrams and parameters for the 140 EHC 202 00
counter modules.
Timing diagrams and a timing parameter table for the 140 EHC 202 00 counter
module are shown below.
The following figure shows the EHC 202 00 timing diagrams.
Tpw
Count Input
Thold
Tst
Enable
Tpw
Tst
Tpw
Tst
Preset
Reset
Tdly1
Tdly2
Output Assertion
Timing
Parameter Table
Limits
No Filter
500 khz
Tdly1
4.8 ms
40 ms
Tdly2
4.8 ms
40 ms
Tpw1
2.5 ms
1 ms
Tpw2
2.5 ms
500 ms
Tst
2.5 ms
2 ms
Thold
2.5 ms
2 ms
Note: The timing parameter limits are measures at the module field terminal
connector at the logic low threshold level.
285
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Module
Functions
COUNT UP
The input counter is reset to zero if the count direction input is UP and a preset
(hardware or software) or Load Value command is sent to the module.
When counting in the UP direction, the input counter increments to the maximum
value, the next input pulse sets the counter to zero and it continues counting back
up to the maximum value.
COUNT DOWN
The input counter is set to maximum count if the count direction is down and a preset
(hardware or software) or Load Value command is sent to the module.
When counting in the DOWN direction, the input counter is decremented from the
maximum value to zero. The next pulse resets the input counter to the Maximum
value and the increment down starts again.
REMOVE
ENABLE
This function disables the input counter, causing it to stop incrementing and hold the
count accumulated prior to disabling.
OUTPUTS
When configured in the count mode, outputs will turn on for defined times when
setpoints or maximum values have been reached.
No output assertion in 2, 32 bit counter mode or rate sample.
Programmed ON time for outputs can be set for one channel, one output and one
trigger point only.
In a running controller, latched outputs are turned off only by a hardware RESET
input. If no reset is provided, the outputs latched on will turn off when the controller
is stopped.
COUNTER
PRESET
This is both a hardware and software function. In the event that both methods are
used, the last one executed has precedence.
An input counter will be automatically software-enabled whenever a new maximum
value is loaded or a preset (hardware or software) is sent to it.
COUNTER
ENABLE
Both hardware and software enables are required for an input counter to operate.
RATE SAMPLE
VALUE
The rate sample value is held and may be accessed during count operations. The
value read is from the last configured and completed rate sample interval.
286
Intelligent/Special Purpose
QUADRATURE
MODE
When the module is configured for quadrature mode operation, the counter requires
encoder pulses on inputs A and B.
In quadrature mode, all input signal edges are counted. A 60 count/revolution
encoder will produce a count of 240 for one shaft rotation.
Miscellaneous
Information
Field wire to Counter 2 inputs and outputs, when configured for 1, 32 bit counter with
output assertion. The unused Counter 1 must have its + (plus) inputs connected to
VREF+.
Input counts and parameters are not maintained in the module at power down. The
rewrite of parameters at power up must be done with either user logic or Modzoomtype preset panel selections.
The 200 Hz filter for each counter can be activated by strapping the Lo Filter Sel
terminal to the Return terminal. This function provides noise immunity for low
frequency applications and can also be used for relay debounce.
Operation
Rate Sample
l
l
l
l
Pulse Count
l
l
l
l
Pulse Count and
Turning Outputs
On/Off
To count pulses and turn outputs on and off, the module must be:
l Loaded with setpoint values, maximum count values, and output assert time.
l Enabled to count using hardwired input and software control bits.
287
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Counter Rollover
Examples for
Pulse Input
Input
10
Output A
Output B
Input
10
10
Output A
Output B
288
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Counter Rollover
Examples for
Quadrature Input
Input A
Input B
Input
0
10
Output A
Output B
Input A
Input B
Input
10
10
Output A
Output B
289
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Wiring Diagram
Signal
Descriptions
Table
The following table shows the wiring diagram for signal descriptions.
Parameter
Description/Usage
INPUT A
INPUT B
PRESET C
OUTPUT
RESET 0
ENABLE
Low level resets Outputs 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B to OFF if latched.
For single ended Reset inputs, only Reset 10+ and/or Reset 20+ are used.
Reset 10- and 20- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both
plus (+) and minus (-) inputs.
Low level enables counting.
For single ended Enable inputs, only Enable 1+ and/or Enable 2+ are used.
Enable 1- and 2- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both
plus (+) and minus (-) inputs.
VREF
Field input device power source connection. Also, connect any unused (+)
inputs to the group VREF terminal or the one in use (30 Vdc max).
Group A = Terminal 17
Group B = Terminal 37
Group A and Group B VREF supplies can be different voltage levels.
LO FILTER
SEL
OUTPUT
Internal FET switches connect the output supply wired to Terminal 40 to the
Output 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B terminals at output assert times.
POWER
SUPPLY
External 24 Vdc power supply (+) connection. Required for the module
interface and for Outputs 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B.
RETURN
290
Enables the internal 200 Hz filter when connected to Return Terminal 39.
External 24 Vdc power supply (-) connection. Required for the module
interface and for Outputs 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B.
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Wiring Diagram
Figure
The following figure shows the 140 EHC 202 00 wiring diagram.
......
INPUT
OUTPUT
RESET 10-
N/C
VREF
OV
INPUT
PRESET 1C-
ENABLE 1N/C
OUTPUT 1A
LO FILTER SEL 1
N/C
INPUT
INPUT
PRESET 2COUTPUT
RESET 20N/C
ENABLE 2N/C
OUTPUT 2A
LO FILTER SEL 2
INPUT
Pulse
PRESET 1C+
OUTPUT
RESET 10+
10
N/C
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
INPUT
39
VREF
ENABLE 1+
N/C
OUTPUT 1B
VREF1
N/C
INPUT
INPUT
PRESET 2C+
OUTPUT
RESET 20+
N/C
ENABLE 2+
POWER SUPPLY
N/C
OUTPUT 2B
VREF2
RETURN
+
24 Vdc
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Terminal 5
Terminal 7
Terminal 11
Terminal 17
Terminal 21
Terminal 23
Terminal 25
Terminal 27
Terminal 31
Terminal 37
Terminal 39
Terminal 40
Note: Refer to High Speed Counter, p. 731 for both differential pulse encoder input
and single ended or differential quadrature encoder input wiring diagrams.
292
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose ASCII Interface Module (140 ESI 062 010)
Overview
The following figure shows the ESI 062 10 ASCII interface module components.
140
ESI 062 10
10 80 vdc
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description Color Code
RS-232
Port 1
Removable Door
Port 1
RS232
Reset Button
Port 2
RS-232 Port 2
Rese
Port 2
RS232C
293
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the ASCII interface two channel
module.
Data Interface
RS-232C
Cabling (Maximum cable length 990 NAA 263 20, Modbus Programming Cable, RS-232,
20 m shielded)
12 ft. (2.7 m)
990 NAA 263 50, Modbus Programming Cable, RS-232,
50 ft. (15.5 m)
Firmware Specifications
Port Performance
Buffer Size
Number of Messages
255
Memory
RAM
Flash-ROM
Power Dissipation
2 W max
300 mA
Fusing
Internal
None
External
User discretion
Required Addressing
Compatibility
Programming Software
Data Formats Supported
Quantum Controllers
294
Intelligent/Special Purpose
LED Indicators
Figure
R
Rx1
Active
Error 1
Tx1
Rx2
Tx2
Error 2
Status
LED
Descriptions
Table
Indication when On
Green
Active
Green
Red
Rx1
Green
Tx1
Green
Rx2
Green
Tx2
Green
Status
Yellow
Status
Error 1
Red
Error 2
LEDs
Red
295
Intelligent/Special Purpose
LED Blinking
Sequence
The following table shows the blinking sequence of the F, Status, Error 1, and Error
2 LEDs.
LEDs and Blinking Sequence
F
Error 1
Error 2
Description
Blinking
Blinking
Blinking
Blinking
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Programming mode
OFF
OFF
ON
N/A
OFF
OFF
N/A
ON
N/A
Status LED
Crash Codes
Status
Blinking (See
the next table)
OFF
OFF
Error
Steady
0000
6631
6503
6402
6300
6301
630A
630B
8000
8001
8002
8003
296
Intelligent/Special Purpose
RS-232C Serial
Ports Front Panel
Connectors and
Switches
The ESI has two serial ports which it uses to communicate with serial devices. The
following is the pinout connections for the ASCII module serial ports.
The following figure shows the pinout configuration.
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
RS-232C Serial
Ports Table
The following table shows the pin number and description for the RS-232C serial
ports.
Pin Number
Signal Name
Description
DCD
Carrier Detect
RXD
Receive Data
TXD
Transmit Data
N/A
Not Connected
GND
Signal Ground
N/A
Not Connected
RTS
Request to Send
N/A
Not Connected
N/A
Not Connected
Shield
N/A
Chassis Ground
The serial port interface allows the user to configure the module and to program the
ASCII messages into the module. This is only activated when the module enters into
its programming mode via the front panel push button.
Note: The serial port is capable of communicating with either a dumb terminal or a
PC using terminal emulation software (i.e., PROCOMM).
297
Intelligent/Special Purpose
When programming mode is entered, one of the RS-232 serial ports is set to a
standard terminal communications configuration to communicate with the user on
the programming terminal via a Modbus. This communication configuration consists
of the following.
Baud rate:
9600
Data bits:
Stop bits:
Parity bit:
None (disabled)
Keyboard Mode:
ON (Character echo)
XON/XOFF:
ON
The serial port configuration has been set this way so that the configuration of the
port is a known configuration and may or may not be the same configuration that is
used when the module is running.
Front Panel
Reset Push
Button
A recessed push button on the front of the module is used to reset the module.
The following figure shows the reset button.
RESET
298
Intelligent/Special Purpose
The High Speed Latch and Interrupt 24 Vdc 16x1 Sink/Source Input module accepts
24 Vdc inputs and is for use with 24 Vdc sink/source input devices.
High Speed
Interrupt Module
Figure
The following figure shows the HLI 340 00 high speed interrupt module components.
LED Area
140
HLI 340 00
10 80 vdc
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Terminal
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
11
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
13
7
9
15
17
19
22
24
26
28
30
32
3
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
34
36
35
37
38
299
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the HLI 340 00 high speed interrupt
module.
Number of Input Points
16 isolated points
LEDs
Required Addressing
1 Word In
15 ... 30 Vdc
OFF (voltage)
-3 ... +5 Vdc
ON (current)
OFF (current)
0 ... 0.5 mA
30 Vdc
Response
OFF - ON
30 ms (max)
ON - OFF
130 ms (max)
Input Protection
Isolation
Point to Point
Point to Bus
Fault Detection
None
400 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
Internal
300
None
External
User discretion
Intelligent/Special Purpose
LED Indicators
Figure
The following figure shows the LED indicators for the HLI 340 00 high speed
interrupt module.
ACTIVE
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
LED
Descriptions
Table
16
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the HLI 340 00 high speed
interrupt module
LEDs
Color
Indication when On
Active
Green
1 ... 16
Green
Note: Due to the speed of the module, LED indications do not represent the state
of the input signal, when the input signal is a short duration pulse.
301
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the HLI 340 00 High Speed
Interrupt module.
24 Vdc
INPUT
INPUT 1(-)
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
INPUT
INPUT
24 Vdc
-
INPUT
N/C
INPUT
N/C
INPUT 9(-)
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
INPUT 10(-)
INPUT 10(+)
INPUT 11(-)
INPUT 11(+)
INPUT 12(-)
INPUT 12(+)
INPUT 13(+)
N/C
INPUT 13(-)
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
INPUT 14(+)
INPUT 14(-)
INPUT 15(-)
INPUT 16(-)
INPUT 16(+)
302
INPUT 4(-)
INPUT 8(-)
INPUT
N/C
INPUT 3(-)
INPUT 7(-)
INPUT
INPUT 15(+)
INPUT 6(-)
INPUT
N/C
INPUT 2(-)
INPUT 5(-)
INPUT
N/C
N/C
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Note: 1. Either shielded or unshielded signal cables may be used (the user should
consider using shielded wire in a noisy environment). Shielded types should have
a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end.
303
Intelligent/Special Purpose
The Quantum single axis motion (MSX) modules are incremental encoder (140 MSB
101 00) or resolver and encoder (140 MSB/MSC 101 00) feedback-only modules
contained in a single-width housing. It works with servo motors that use Cyberline
drives and other types of DC and brushless drives from other manufacturers.
MSX Motion
Modules Figure
140
MSB 101 00
10 80 vdc out
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Removable Door
Modbus
Connector
Servo Port
Connector
304
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Operational
Specifications
for the Servo
The following table shows the operational specifications for the servo.
0.25 ms
0.5 ms
> 100 Hz
Velocity Range
0 - 6000 rpm
1 ms
Operational
Specifications
for
Communication
Modbus
1 default
Required Addressing
Operational
Specifications
for the
Application
Program
The following table shows the operational specifications for the application program.
Execution Rate
Storage
650 instructions
Note: A majority of the instructions typically take one ms to execute. The execution
time of an instruction, though, is not constant. The execution time can increase due
to factors such as: if the Sync Ratio Mode is on, how often the position generator
must execute to plan out new moves, how many "whenevers" are enabled, and the
number of sources requesting commands to be executed (e.g., backplane, internal
program, Modbus port), etc. If timing is extremely critical to an application, actual
time must be determined experimentally by running the actual application program.
305
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Operational
Specifications
for High Speed
Input
The following table shows the operational specifications for high speed input.
Position Capture Time
250 ms max
Isolation
Pulse Width
25 ms
Operational
Specifications
for Discrete
Inputs
The following table shows the operational specifications for discrete inputs.
Number
7
1.5 ms
Isolation
Operational
Specifications
for Discrete
Outputs
Scan Time
The following table shows the operational specifications for discrete outputs.
Number
Update Time
10 ms max
Isolation
Reset State
0 V, nominal
On State
24 V, nominal
Output Type
Protection
Operational
Specifications
for Analog Input
Fault
Overcurrent detected
The following table shows the operational specifications for analog input.
1
Scan Time
15 ms
Data
User configurable
Range
+/- 10 V
Accuracy
306
Number
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Operational
Specifications
for Analog
Output
Number
1
20 ms
Data
User configurable
Range
+/- 10 V
Accuracy
Operational
Specifications
for Revolver
Feedback (Fully
Configured
Version)
Scan Time
The following table shows the operational specifications for the resolver feedback
(fully configured version).
Tracking
Resolver Style
Transmit
Excitation Frequency
5 kHz
Excitation Amplitude
Automatically adjusted
Excitation Current
120 mA
Loss of Feedback
Operational
Specifications
for the
Incremental
Encoder
Feedback
Conversion Method
Detected within 40 ms
The following table shows the operational specifications for the incremental encoder
feedback.
Resolution
Signals
A, B, Mark
Signal Frequency
Detected within 40 ms
Programming Software
Quantum Controllers
Operational
Specifications
for Compatibility
Differential, 5 V
Loss of Feedback
307
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Electrical
Specifications
for Discrete
Inputs and High
Speed Input
The following table shows the electrical specifications for discrete inputs and high
speed input.
3.5 k ohms
Inputs On
15 Vdc min
Inputs Off
5 Vdc max
Isolation
Electrical
Specifications
for Discrete
Output
Input Impedance
The following table shows the electrical specifications for discrete output.
150 mA at user supplied. 19.2 ... 30
Vdc resistive
Protection
Isolation
Electrical
Specifications
for Analog Input
Drive Capability
The following table shows the electrical specifications for analog input.
10 bits
Input Impedance
30 k ohms
Offset
+/- 50 mV
Accuracy
Electrical
Specifications
for Analog
Output
Resolution
The following table shows the electrical specifications for analog output.
12 bits
Drive Capability
3 mA
Offset
+/- 50 mV
Accuracy
Electrical
Specifications
for the Resolver
Interface
Resolution
The following table shows the electrical specifications for the resolver interface.
Reference
Accuracy
308
3 k ohms
Resolution
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Electrical
Specifications
for Motor
Temperature
Input
The following table shows the electrical specifications for the motor temperature
input.
Short circuit, 2 mA sink max
Fault State
Open circuit
Isolation
Electrical
Specifications
for the Encoder
Feedback
Interface
Normal State
The following table shows the electrical specifications for the encoder feedback
interface.
-0.7 ... 7 Vdc
Input Impedance
+2 V differential, min
-2 V differential, min
200 kHz square wave (55% ... 45% with less than 15
degrees of quadrature error)
Isolation
Electrical
Specifications
for the Drive
Interface
Input Range
1 ms
The following table shows the electrical specifications for the drive interface.
Drive Fault Input
+/- 10 Vdc
Current Commands
3 mA drive capability
309
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Electrical
Specifications
for Power
Requirements
The following table shows the electrical specifications for power requirements.
Main Power Input
Front Panel
Indicators Figure
Less than 5 A
There are 17 LED indicators visible on the front panel. The following figure shows
the front panel LED indicators.
Active
Ready
+ Lim ok
- Lim ok
Home
In 4
In 5
In 6
In 7
310
Drv Flt
Drv En
Out 1
Out 2
Out 3
Modbus
Moving
In Pos
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Front Panel
Descriptions
Table
The following table shows the 140 MCX 101 00 LED descriptions.
LEDs
Color
Indication when On
Active
Green
Ready
Green
+ Lim ok
Green
- Lim ok
Green
Home
Green
In 4
Green
In 5
Green
In 6
Green
In 7
Green
Drv Flt
Red
Drv En
Green
Drive enabled.
Out 1
Green
Out 2
Green
Out 3
Green
Modbus
Amber
Motor is moving.
In Pos
Front Panel
Connectors
Green
Moving
Amber
There are two connectors located on the front of the module: the Modbus Connector
and the Servo Connector.
311
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Modbus
Connectors
The MSX modules are equipped with a 9-pin, RS-232C connector that supports
Modicons proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus
port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.
The following figure shows the MSX Modbus port pinouts to 9-pin connectors (ASW956-xxx).
Msx Modbus Port Pinouts to 9-Pin Connectors (AS-W956-xxx)
Signal
MSx
Pin
TXD
RXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Computer
Signal
Pin
No Connection
1
3
2
5
6
4
7
8
RXD
TXD
GND
DSR
DTR
RTS
CTS
Function
Shield
Serial data
Serial data
Ground
Control line
Control line
Control line
Control line
The following figure shows the MSX Modbus port pinouts for 25-pin connectors (ASW955-xxx).
MsxModbus Port Pinouts for 25-Pin Connectors (AS-W955-xxx)
Signal
TXD
RXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
312
MSx
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Computer
Signal
Pin
No Connection
1
2
3
7
6
20
4
5
RXD
TXD
GND
DSR
DTR
RTS
CTS
Function
Shield
Serial data
Serial data
Ground
Control line
Control line
Control line
Control line
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Servo Connector
The MSX is also equipped with a 50-pin servo connector for communication with
feedback devices.
Note: The tables below show the 50-pin servo connector signals. Pin numbers
correspond to both the MSB and MSC modules. When the signals differ from each
other, they are shown separated by a slash (i.e., Pin Number 34, MSB/MSC).
313
Intelligent/Special Purpose
41
Velocity + / Phase A
42
N/C / Phase B
43
N/C / Phase C
Overtemp High
44
Overtemp Low
45
Drive Fault
46
47
48
49
50
The following figure shows the server connector signals (from left to right) 50 - 34.
N/C
Server
Connector
Signals Table
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
23
22
21
19
20
24 Vdc
24
Brake Output
(Auxilary Output 1)
25
Auxilary Output 2
26
24 V Common
27
Auxilary Output 3
Auxilary Input 5
Auxilary Input 6
28
Limit CW
(Auxilary Input 1)
29
Limit CCW
(Auxilary Input 2)
30
Auxilary Input 7
Analog Output
31
Home
(Auxilary Input 3)
32
Auxilary Input 4
33
Analog Common
Analog Input
The following figure shows the server connector signals (from left to right) 33 - 18.
18
Rear Panel
Switches
314
Encoder 1 Phase B-
Encoder 1 Phase B+
Encoder 1 Phase A-
Encoder 1 Phase A-
10
Encoder 1 Mark+
11
Encoder 2 Phase B-
Encoder 2 Mark+
Encoder 2 Mark12
Encoder 1 Mark-
13
Encoder 2 Phase A+
14
N/C
N/C
N/C
15
Encoder 2 Phase A-
16
Encoder 2 Phase B+
17
N/C
The following figure shows the server connector signals (from left to right) 17 - 1.
The MSX has an RS-232 serial port to connect the module to an IBM PC (or
compatible) running the Modicon Motion Development Software (MMDS). A twoposition Dip switch is located on the rear panel of the module (below). SW1 is used
to specify the modules operating mode (984 or MMDS control). SW2 is used to
specify the communication characteristics of the Modbus port upon power-up.
Intelligent/Special Purpose
DIP Switch
Setting Figure
CLOSED
OPEN
SLIDE SWITCH
AREA OF DETAIL
Dip Switch
Settings Table
The following table shows the settings for the Dip switch settings.
Switch
SW1
Setting
Function
SW2
* Closed
MMDS control
Open
PLC control
Closed
Programmed baud
* Open
Modbus default
* Factory setting
Note: SW1 and SW2 are open when they are switched away from the internal PCB
of the module.
315
Intelligent/Special Purpose
With the 140 XBE 100 00 Backplane Expander you can add a second backplane to
a local or remote drop. A custom communications cable, 3.0 meters maximum,
provides the data communication transfer.
The Backplane
Expander
Connector
316
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Expander
Specifications
Specifications for the 140 XBE 100 00 Backplane Expander are below.
Number of Connected
Backplanes
Maximum Distance
3 meters
Backplane Requirements
Size
Slots used
1 per backplane
LEDs
None.
Required Addressing
Power Requirements
Power Consumption
2.5 watts
500 mA
Connector
37 pin D-type
Compatibility
Primary Backplane
No restrictions
Secondary Backplane
Programming Software
Executive Firmware
64 in /64 out
64 in /64 out
317
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Cable
Specifications
Specifications for the the three possible Expander Cables are below.
Part Number
Length
2 meters
318
1 meter
3 meters
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Basic
configuration
The backplane containing the the CPU or RIO drop adapter is designated the
Primary backplane and the adjacent backplane is designated the Secondary
backplane. Each backplane requires its own power supply.
Backplane Expander
140 XBE 100 00
Power
Supply
CPU or RIO
Adapter
Cable end
marked Primary
Primary Backplane
Backplane Expander Cable
140 XCA 7170X
Power
Supply
Backplane Expander
140 XBE 100 00
Secondary Backplane
CAUTION
Possible communications cable failure
Do not Hot Swap a Backplane Expander module into a powered
backplane unless the communications cable has first been connected
to the module.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
319
Intelligent/Special Purpose
Backplane
Expander
Guidelines
l The same 140 XBE 100 00 Backplane Expander modules are used for the
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
320
primary and secondary backplanes. The end of the Backplane Expander cable
marked Primary" always connects to the Backplane Expander module in the
Primary Backplane.
The system can use any Quantum type power supply. Each backplane can have
a different type of power supply.
Loss of power in the secondary backplane will not shut down the entire drop. Only
modules located in the Secondary" backplane will lose power.
Backplane expander modules can be located in any slot in the backplane and do
not have to be placed in corresponding slots in the primary and secondary
backplanes.
I/O modules that have downloadable executive firmware, such as the ESI
module, are allowed in the secondary backplane except when downloading their
execs. Executive firmware cannot be downloaded to modules in the secondary
backplane.
It may be necessary to update the CPU or RIO drop executive firmware. See
firmware section of table above
The Backplane Expander will not be recognized by the programming panel
software. It will look like an unfilled slot in the PLC I/O map.
The Backplane Expander will allow configuration or I/O mapping of additional
modules in the local drop containing a CPU or RIO drop adapter up to the drop
word limit or physical slot address limitation.
Option modules, such as NOMs, NOEs and CHSs must reside in the primary
backplane.
Any Interrupt module can be located in the secondary backplane, but the interrupt
mode is not supported.
The Backplane Expander module can not be Hot Swapped into a powered
backplane without first attaching the communications cable. In order to install the
Backplane Expander in a powered backplane, first connect the cable to the
Backplane Expander module and then mount the module into the powered
backplane.
At a Glance
Introduction
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
322
342
350
329
356
321
322
The Quantum 140 AIO 300 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module controls and
monitors current loops in intrinsically safe applications. The module provides 8 dualended output channels that are referenced over sense resistors to a single
Common. The output ranges are 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, and 0 ... 25 mA. This
module detects broken wires on a per-channel basis and indicates their location on
the front panel LEDs, and then transmits the status to the PLC.
Specifications
Specifications for the Quantum 140 AIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output
module are as follows.
Number of Channels
LEDs
Active-1 (Green)
F-1 (Red)
1 ... 8 (Green) - Module output switched ON
1 ... 8 (Red) - Broken wire on indicated Channel
(4 ... 20 mA)
Loop Resistant
Ranges
4 ... 20 mA (0 to 4095)
4 ... 20 mA (0 to 16000)
Accuracy Drift w/
Temperature
Linearity
+/- 1 LSB
Isolation
Channel to Channel
None
Channel to Bus
Update Time
Settling Time
2.5 Amp
Power Dissipation
12.5 W
External Power
Fault Detection
Output Impedance
62.5 W Typical
Wire Length
1 m maximum
Hot Swap
Fusing
Programming Software
323
Outputs
Eight
Intrinsic Safety
Galvanically isolated barriers prevent this module from releasing sufficient energy to
ignite volatile gases or vapors in the hazardous area. Galvanic isolation in the form
of an opto-isolator and DC/DC converter is provided between the field side output
circuitry and the Quantum bus circuitry. The DC/DC converter provides the field side
power no external field power is required.
Agency
Approvals
l
l
l
l
Wiring Diagram
Agency Approvals, p. 873Wiring diagrams for the Quantum 140 DII 330 00 module
are included in this instruction set in the appendix Agency Approvals, p. 873
Field Wiring
Field wiring to the module should consist of separate shielded, twisted pair wires.
The acceptable field wire gauge should be AWG 30 to AWG 18. Wiring between the
module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring
practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.
Fixed Wiring
System
The Quantum140 AIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module is designed
with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed
position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module.
Terminal Strip
Color and Keying
Assignment
The modules 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to
identify it as an intrinsically safe connector.
The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the
module. The keying assignment is given below.
Module Class
Module Coding
Intrinsically Safe
324
CEF
ABD
The most significant bit in the I/O map status byte is used for this module as follows.
8
7 6
5 4 3
2 1
I/O Register
Assignments
The 140 AIO 330 00 module requires eight contiguous output (4x) registers
assigned as follows:
Register 1
Register 2
Channel 2 data
Register 3
Channel 3 data
Register 4
Channel 4 data
Register 5
Channel 5 data
Register 6
Channel 6 data
Register 7
Channel 7 data
Register 8
Channel 1 data
Channel 8 data
325
Modsoft Module
Zoom Selections
Use Modsofts Module Zoom feature to display and select the time-out state for each
channel. Time-out state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
The following figure shows the time-out state for the Modsoft module zoom feature.
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
0 to 25 mA
0 - 16,000
0 - 4,095
0 - 20,000
0 - 25,000
Disabled
Last Value
User Defined
DEC
Intrinsically Safe
Data
Intrinsic Safety
Intrinsic safety is a technique for ensuring that electrical energy supplied to circuits
in a hazardous area is too low to ignite volatile gases either by spark or thermal
means. Intrinsically safe circuits use energy-limiting devices known as intrinsically
safe barriers to prevent excess electrical energy from being applied to electrical
equipment located in the hazardous area.
Module Location
Intrinsically Safe
Barriers
All Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules use galvanic isolation to provide the
intrinsically safe barrier between them and the field devices located in hazardous
areas. Opto-isolators are located within the modules between the field side and the
Quantum backplane bus circuitry. The maximum agency-specified intrinsically safe
parameters are:
Voc < 28 Vdc and Isc < 100mA
326
Intrinsically Safe
Power Supply
Installation of
Quantum
Intrinsically Safe
Modules
Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules are designed to fit into a standard 140 XBP 0XX
00 Quantum backplane. The modules can be installed in any slot position in the
backplane. (The first slot is normally reserved for the power supply module.)
Hot Swapping
Hot swapping Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is not allowed per intrinsic safety
standards.
CAUTION
Injury to personnel or equipment
Do not attempt to hot swap a Quantum Intrinsically Safe Module.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Intrinsically safe wiring between Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules and the field
devices located in the hazardous area must be separated from all other wiring. This
can be accomplished by any one of the following methods.
l Use a separation of two inches (50 mm) of air space between the intrinsically safe
and non-intrinsically safe wiring. With this method, the intrinsically safe and nonintrinsically safe wires must be tied down in separate bundles to maintain the
required separation.
Identification
and Labeling
Intrinsically safe wiring must be properly identified and labeled. Light blue colorcoding should be used for all intrinsically safe wiring. The terminal strip wiring
connector on all Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is colored blue to distinguish it
from all non-intrinsically safe modules.
All wire ducts, raceways, cable trays, and open wiring must be labeled "Intrinsically
Safe Wiring" with a maximum spacing of 25 ft. between labels.
327
Shielded twisted pair wires shall be used for each of the input or output pairs
connected to the Quantum Intrinsically Safe module blue terminal strip. The wire
gage size can be between AWG 20 and AWG 12. Each twisted pair wire shield must
be connected to the ground screws on the backplane, at the module end, and left
open at the field device connection end in the hazardous area. The instruction sheet
packaged with each Quantum Intrinsically Safe module contains a wiring diagram
applicable to that type of module.
Intrinsically Safe
Wiring Diagram
A
R
E
A
Questions
Regarding
Intrinsically Safe
Wiring Practices
328
S
A
F
E
A
R
E
A
STANDARD I/O
WIRING
C
P
U
BACKPLANE
STD STD STD
I/O I/O I/O
M M M
O O
O
D
D
D
U
U
U
L
L
L
E
E
E
I.S.
M
O
D
U
L
E
(Intrinsically Safe)
INTRINSICALLY
SAFE WIRING
IN SEPARATE
BLUE RACEWAY
SAFE
WIRING
SAFE
WIRING
INTRINSICALLY
SAFE WIRING
LABELS
The information contained in this Instruction Set concerning intrinsic safety wiring
practices is general in nature and is not intended to cover installation requirements
for any specific site. Questions regarding intrinsic safety wiring requirements for your
site should be referred to the approval agencies listed at the beginning of this
module.
The Quantum 140 AII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module will interface
with eight intrinsically safe analog inputs, which are software-configurable on a
module basis with either RTD/Resistance or thermocouple/millivolt inputs.
When it is configured as an RTD/Resistance Input module, it supports 100W, 200W,
500W, and 1000W platinum (American or European) and nickel sensors. The
module also allows any mix and match of sensor type or resistance inputs that can
be configured by the software.
When it is configured as a Thermocouple/Millivolt Input module, it accepts B, J, K,
E, R, S and T type thermocouples. The module also allows any mix and match of
thermocouple or millivolt inputs that can be configured by the software.
329
RTD/Resistance
Module
Specifications
LEDs
Measurement Current
PT100, PT200, N100, N200
PT500, PT1000, N500,
N1000
2.5 mA 0.5 mA
Input Impedance
>10M ohms
Linearity
Resolution
Absolute Accuracy
Isolation
Channel to Channel
None
Channel to Bus
Input Filter
400 mA
Power Dissipation
2W
External Power
Hot Swap
Fusing
Programming Software
330
Fault Detection
Thermocouple/
Millivolt Module
Specification
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the Thermocouple/Millivolt module.
Number of Channels
LEDs
Millivolt Ranges
TC Circuit Resistance/Max
Source Resistance
Input Impedance
>1M ohms
Input Filter
120 dB min @ 50 or 60 Hz
Programming Software
Resolution
TC Ranges
Millivolt Ranges
331
Isolation
Channel to Channel
None
Channel to Bus
Update Time
Fault Detection
400 mA
Power Dissipation
2W
External Power
Hot Swap
Fusing
Programming Software
Notes:
1.
Absolute accuracy includes all errors from the internal CJC, TC curvature,
offset plus gain, for module temperature of 0 ... 60C. User-supplied TC
errors not included. 2. For type J and K, add 1.5C inaccuracy for
temperatures below -100C. 3. Type B cannot be used below 130C. 4.
All TC ranges have an open TC detect and upscale output. This results in
a reading 7FFFh or 32767 decimal when an open TC is detected.
Outputs
Eight.
Intrinsic Safety
Galvanically isolated barriers prevent this module from releasing sufficient energy to
ignite volatile gases or vapors in the hazardous area. Galvanic isolation in the form
of an opto-isolator and DC/DC converter is provided between the field side output
circuitry and the Quantum bus circuitry. The DC/DC converter provides the field side
power no external field power is required.
Agency
Approvals
l
l
l
l
332
RTD/Resistance
and
Thermocouple/
Millivolt Wiring
Diagrams
Wiring diagrams for the Quantum 140 AII 330 00 module are included in Agency
Approvals, p. 873.
Field Wiring
Field wiring to the module shall consist of separate shielded twisted pair wires. The
acceptable field wire gauge shall be AWG 20 to AWG 12. In a 2-wire field
configuration, the maximum field wire length is a function of the required accuracy.
Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow
intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to
the hazardous area.
RTD/Resistance
Input Wiring
Thermocouple/
Millivolt Input
Wiring
Fixed Wiring
System
The Quantum140 AII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module is designed with
a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed
position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module.
Terminal Strip
Color and Keying
Assignment
The modules 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to
identify it as an intrinsically safe connector.
The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the
module. The keying assignment is given below.
Module Class
Module Coding
Intrinsically Safe
CDF
ABE
333
Channel 1 data
Register 2
Channel 2 data
Register 3
Channel 3 data
Register 4
Channel 4 data
Register 5
Channel 5 data
Register 6
Channel 6 data
Register 7
Channel 7 data
Register 8
Channel 8 data
Register 9
1 2
3 4
6 7
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
334
Thermocouple/
Millivolt Map
Register
Assignments
Channel 1 data
Register 2
Channel 2 data
Register 3
Channel 3 data
Register 4
Channel 4 data
Register 5
Channel 5 data
Register 6
Channel 6 data
Register 7
Channel 7 data
Register 8
Channel 8 data
Register 9
1 2
3 4
6 7
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Register 10
335
The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 AII 330 00 module as follows.
LSB
MSB
7 6
5 4 3
2 1
336
Modsoft Module
Zoom Selections
Use Modsofts Module Zoom feature to select the module input type and then
configure the input appropriate to the input type selected.
For RTD / Resistance Input
For TC / mV Input
1.0 Deg
1.0 Deg
Resolution (Temp):
Resolution (Temp):
0.1 Deg
0.1 Deg
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Fahrenheit
Value Type:
Temperature
Raw Value
Celsius
On Board
Channel 1
337
Configure each channel (1 through 8) appropriate to the module input type selected.
For RTD Module Input:
Channel Enable/Disable:
Enable
Disable
4 Wire
3 Wire
2 Wire
Pt100,
-200 to 850
Pt200,
-200 to 850
Pt500,
-200 to 850
Pt1000,
-200 to 850
Ni 100,
-60 to 180
Ni 200,
-60 to 180
Ni 500,
-60 to 180
Ni1000,
-60 to 180
R, 0 to 766.66 OHM
R, 0 to 4000 OHM
APt100,
-100 to 450
APt200,
-100 to 450
APt500,
-100 to 450
APt1000,
-100 t0 450
K, gain=25
E,
T,
S,
R,
B,
gain=25
gain=100
gain=100
gain=100
gain=100
Intrinsically Safe
Data
No
Open circuit test:
Yes
25
100
Yes
No
For general information concerning the safety aspects of installing the Quantum
family of Intrinsically Safe modules, please review the following pages.
The following information is specifically concerned with the application of intrinsic
safety with regards to the installation and field wiring of the Quantum Intrinsically
Safe series of modules. It provides a general description of intrinsic safety and how
it is accomplished in Quantum modules, how they should be installed, precautions
that should be observed, and wiring and grounding practices that must be followed.
338
Intrinsic Safety
Intrinsic safety is a technique for ensuring that electrical energy supplied to circuits
in a hazardous area is too low to ignite volatile gases either by spark or thermal
means. Intrinsically safe circuits use energy limiting devices known as intrinsically
safe barriers to prevent excess electrical energy from being applied to electrical
equipment located in the hazardous area.
Module Location
Intrinsically Safe
Barriers
All Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules use galvanic isolation to provide the
intrinsically safe barrier between them and the field devices located in hazardous
areas. Opto-isolators are located within the modules between the field side and the
Quantum backplane bus circuitry. The maximum agency specified intrinsically safe
parameters are:
V oc 28 Vdc and Isc 100 mA
Intrinsically Safe
Power Supply
Installation of
Quantum
Intrinsically Safe
Modules
Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules are designed to fit into a standard 140 XBP 0XX
00 Quantum backplane. The modules can be installed in any slot position in the
backplane. (The first slot is normally reserved for the power supply module.)
Hot Swapping
CAUTION
Injury to personnel or equipment
Do not attempt to hot swap a Quantum Intrinsically Safe Module.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
339
Intrinsically safe wiring between Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules and the field
devices located in the hazardous area must be separated from all other wiring. This
can be accomplished by any one of the following methods:
l Make sure a separation of two inches (50 mm) of air space between the
intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe wiring. With this method, the
intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe wires must be tied down in separate
bundles to maintain the required separation.
Identification
and Labeling
Intrinsically safe wiring must be properly identified and labeled. Light blue colorcoding should be used for all intrinsically safe wiring. The terminal strip wiring
connector on all Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is colored blue to distinguish it
from all non-intrinsically safe modules.
All wire ducts, raceways, cable trays, and open wiring must be labeled "Intrinsically
Safe Wiring" with a maximum spacing of 25 ft. between labels.
340
Shielded twisted pair wires should be used for each of the input or output pairs
connected to the Quantum Intrinsically Safe module blue terminal strip. The wire
gage size can be between AWG 20 and AWG 12. Each twisted pair wire shield must
be connected to the ground screws on the backplane, at the module end, and left
open at the field device connection end in the hazardous area. The instruction sheet
packaged with each Quantum Intrinsically Safe module contains a wiring diagram
applicable to that type of module.
Intrinsically Safe
Wiring Diagram
A
R
E
A
S
A
F
E
A
R
E
A
STANDARD I/O
WIRING
C
P
U
BACKPLANE
STD STD STD
I/O I/O I/O
M M M
O O
O
D
D
D
U
U
U
L
L
L
E
E
E
I.S.
M
O
D
U
L
E
(Intrinsically Safe)
INTRINSICALLY
SAFE WIRING
IN SEPARATE
BLUE RACEWAY
SAFE
WIRING
SAFE
WIRING
INTRINSICALLY
SAFE WIRING
LABELS
Questions
Regarding
Intrinsically Safe
Wiring Practices
The information contained in this Instruction Set concerning intrinsic safety wiring
practices is general in nature and is not intended to cover installation requirements
for any specific site. Questions regarding intrinsic safety wiring requirements for your
site should be referred to the approval agencies listed at the beginning of this
module.
341
342
The Quantum 140 AII 330 10 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module interfaces with
eight intrinsically safe analog inputs which are software-configurable. The module
accepts 0 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 25 mA, and 4 ... 20 mA inputs. The module also allows any
mix and match of current input ranges that can be configured by the software. The
module provides power to intrinsically safe transmitters located in hazardous areas.
Specifications
Table
Specifications for the Quantum 140 AII 330 10 Intrinsically Safe Current Input
module are as follows.
Number of Channels
LEDs
Current Input
Linear Measuring Range
25 mA internally limited
Input Impedance
Resolution
Available Voltage
Linearity
Input Filter
Isolation
Channel to Channel
Update Time
Fault Detection
1.5 A
Power Dissipation
7.5 W
External Power
Not required
Hot Swap
Fusing
Programming Software
None
Channel to Bus
343
Inputs
Eight analog.
Intrinsic Safety
Galvanically isolated barriers prevent the module from releasing sufficient energy to
ignite volatile gases or vapors in the hazardous area. Galvanic isolation, in the form
of an opto-isolator and DC/DC converter, is provided between the field side input
circuitry and the Quantum bus circuitry. The DC/DC converter provides the field side
power no external field power is required.
Agency
Approvals
Interpretation of
LEDs
Color
Indication When On
Active
Green
Red
1 .. 8
Red
Field Wiring
Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded, twisted pair wires. The
acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and
the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to
avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.
Wiring Diagram
Wiring diagrams for the Quantum 140 DII 330 10 module are included in Agency
Approvals, p. 873.
Fixed Wiring
System
The Quantum 140 AII 330 10 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module is designed
with a fixed wiring system, where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed
position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module.
344
Terminal Strip
Color and Keying
Assignment
The modules 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to
identify it as an intrinsically safe connector.
The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the
module. The keying assignment is given below.
Module Class
Module Coding
Intrinsically Safe
CEF
ABD
The most significant bit in the I/O map status byte is used for this module.
MSB
2 3
4 5 6
7 8
Modsoft Module
Zoom Selections
Use Modsofts Module Zoom feature to display and select the Analog Current Input.
4 to 20mA 0 - 16,000
4 to 20mA 0 - 4095
0 to 20mA 0 - 20,000
0 to 25mA 0 - 25,000
345
The 140 AII 330 10 module requires nine contiguous input (3x) registers assigned
as follows.
Register 1
Channel 1 data
Register 2
Channel 2 data
Register 3
Channel 3 data
Register 4
Channel 4 data
Register 5
Channel 5 data
Register 6
Channel 6 data
Register 7
Channel 7 data
Register 8
Channel 8 data
Register 9
1 2
3 4
6 7
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
346
Intrinsically Safe
Data
For general information concerning the safety aspects of installing the Quantum
series of Intrinsically Safe modules, please review the following.
The following information is specifically concerned with the application of intrinsic
safety with regards to the installation and field wiring of the Quantum Intrinsically
Safe series of modules. It provides a general description of intrinsic safety and how
it is accomplished in Quantum modules, how they should be installed, precautions
that should be observed, and wiring and grounding practices that must be followed.
Intrinsic Safety
Intrinsic safety is a technique for ensuring that electrical energy supplied to circuits
in a hazardous area is too low to ignite volatile gases either by spark or thermal
means. Intrinsically safe circuits use energy-limiting devices known as intrinsically
safe barriers to prevent excess electrical energy from being applied to electrical
equipment located in the hazardous area.
Module Location
Intrinsically Safe
Barriers
All Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules use galvanic isolation to provide the
intrinsically safe barrier between them and the field devices located in hazardous
areas. Opto-isolators are located within the modules between the field side and the
Quantum backplane bus circuitry. The maximum agency specified intrinsically safe
parameters are:
Voc < 28 Vdc and Isc < 100mA
Intrinsically Safe
Power Supply
Installation of
Quantum
Intrinsically Safe
Modules
Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules are designed to fit into a standard 140 XBP 0XX
00 Quantum backplane. The modules can be installed in any slot position in the
backplane. (The first slot is normally reserved for the power supply module.)
347
Hot Swapping
Hot swapping Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is not allowed per intrinsic safety
standards.
CAUTION
Injury to personal or equipment.
Do not attempt to hot swap a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Intrinsically safe wiring between Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules and the field
devices located in the hazardous area must be separated from all other wiring. This
can be accomplished by any one of the following methods.
l Use a separation of two inches (50 mm) of air space between the intrinsically safe
and non-intrinsically safe wiring. With this method, the intrinsically safe and nonintrinsically safe wires must be tied down in separate bundles to maintain the
required separation.
Identification
and Labeling
Intrinsically safe wiring must be properly identified and labeled. Light blue colorcoding should be used for all intrinsically safe wiring. The terminal strip wiring
connector on all Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is colored blue to distinguish it
from all non-intrinsically safe modules.
All wire ducts, raceways, cable trays, and open wiring must be labeled "Intrinsically
Safe Wiring" with a maximum spacing of 25 ft. between labels.
348
Shielded twisted pair wires shall be used for each of the input or output pairs
connected to the Quantum Intrinsically Safe module blue terminal strip. The wire
gage size can be between AWG 20 and AWG 12. Each twisted pair wire shield must
be connected to the ground screws on the backplane, at the module end, and left
open at the field device connection end in the hazardous area. The instruction sheet
packaged with each Quantum Intrinsically Safe module contains a wiring diagram
applicable to that type of module.
Intrinsically Safe
Wiring Diagram
A
R
E
A
S
A
F
E
A
R
E
A
STANDARD I/O
WIRING
C
P
U
BACKPLANE
STD STD STD
I/O I/O I/O
M M M
O O
O
D
D
D
U
U
U
L
L
L
E
E
E
I.S.
M
O
D
U
L
E
(Intrinsically Safe)
INTRINSICALLY
SAFE WIRING
IN SEPARATE
BLUE RACEWAY
SAFE
WIRING
SAFE
WIRING
INTRINSICALLY
SAFE WIRING
LABELS
Questions
Regarding
Intrinsically Safe
Wiring Practices
The information contained in this Instruction Set concerning intrinsic safety wiring
practices is general in nature and is not intended to cover installation requirements
for any specific site. Questions regarding intrinsic safety wiring requirements for your
site should be referred to the approval agencies listed at the beginning of this
module.
349
The Quantum 140 DII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Input module provides safe
power to dry contact closures e.g., push buttons, selector switches, float switches,
flow switches, limit switches, etc., in a hazardous area, and receives the proportional
current to indicate an on/off state. The received current is converted into digital
signals that is transferred to the PLC.
Specifications
Table
Specifications for the Quantum140 DII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Input module
are as follows.
Number of Input Points
LEDs
8 Vdc
8 mA
Switching point
Switching hysteresis
0.2 mA
Switching Frequency
100 Hz maximum
Response
OFF-ON
1 ms
ON-OFF
1 ms
Isolation
Channel to Channel
None
Channel to Bus
Internal Resistance
2.5 K ohms
Input Protection
Resistor limited
Fault Detection
None
400 mA
Power Dissipation
Not required
Hot Swap
Fusing
Programming Software
350
2W
External Power
Outputs
Eight.
Intrinsic Safety
Galvanically isolated barriers prevent the module from releasing sufficient energy to
ignite volatile gases or vapors in the hazardous area. Galvanic isolation in the form
of an opto-isolator and DC/DC converter is provided between the field side output
circuitry and the Quantum bus circuitry. The DC/DC converter provides the field side
power no external field power is required.
Agency
Approvals
l
l
l
l
Fixed Wiring
System
The Quantum 140 DII 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Input module is designed with
a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed
position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module.
Wiring Diagram
Wiring diagrams for the Quantum 140 DII 330 00 module are included in Agency
Approvals, p. 873.
Field Wiring
Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded twisted pair wires. The
acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and
the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices, to
avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.
Terminal Strip
Color and Keying
Assignment
The modules 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to
identify it as an intrinsically safe connector.
The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the
module. The keying assignment is given below.
Module Class
Module Coding
Intrinsically Safe
Active LED
CDE
ABF
351
Channel Status
LEDs
A green front panel LED indicator is associated with each channel (1 to 8). When the
LED is illuminated, the corresponding input contact is closed. When the LED is not
illuminated, the corresponding input contact is open.
The 140 DII 330 00 module can be configured as either 8 contiguous 1x references
or as one 3x register.
The following figure shows an I/O map register.
1
2 3
4 5 6
7 8
Modsoft Module
Zoom Selections
Use Modsofts Module Zoom feature to display and select the Input Type.
Input Type:
BIN
BCD
Intrinsically Safe
Data
For general information concerning the safety aspects of installing the Quantum
series of Intrinsically Safe modules, please review the following.
The following information is specifically concerned with the application of intrinsic
safety with regards to the installation and field wiring of the Quantum Intrinsically
Safe series of modules. It provides a general description of intrinsic safety and how
it is accomplished in Quantum modules, how they should be installed, precautions
that should be observed, and wiring and grounding practices that must be followed.
Intrinsic Safety
Intrinsic safety is a technique for ensuring that electrical energy supplied to circuits
in a hazardous area is too low to ignite volatile gases either by spark or thermal
means. Intrinsically safe circuits use energy limiting devices known as intrinsically
safe barriers to prevent excess electrical energy from being applied to electrical
equipment located in the hazardous area.
Module Location
352
Intrinsically Safe
Barriers
All Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules use galvanic isolation to provide the
intrinsically safe barrier between them and the field devices located in hazardous
areas. Opto-isolators are located within the modules between the field side and the
Quantum backplane bus circuitry. The maximum agency specified intrinsically safe
parameters are:
Voc < 28 Vdc and Isc < 100mA
Intrinsically Safe
Power Supply
Installation of
Quantum
Intrinsically Safe
Modules
Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules are designed to fit into a standard Quantum
backplane. They can be mounted in any slot size (3 ... 16 slots) Quantum 140 XBP
0XX 00 backplane.)
Hot Swapping
Hot swapping Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is not allowed per intrinsic safety
standards.
Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules can be installed in any slot position in the
backplane. The first slot is normally reserved for the power supply module.
CAUTION
Injury to personnel or equipment
Do not attempt to hot swap a Quantum Intrinsically Safe Module.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Intrinsically safe wiring between Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules and the field
devices located in the hazardous area must be separated from all other wiring. This
can be accomplished by any one of the following methods.
l Use a separation of two inches (50 mm) of air space between the intrinsically safe
and non-intrinsically safe wiring. With this method, the intrinsically safe and nonintrinsically safe wires must be tied down in separate bundles to maintain the
required separation.
353
Identification
and Labeling
Intrinsically safe wiring must be properly identified and labeled. Light blue colorcoding should be used for all intrinsically safe wiring. The terminal strip wiring
connector on all Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is colored blue to distinguish it
from all non-intrinsically safe modules.
All wire ducts, raceways, cable trays, and open wiring must be labeled "Intrinsically
Safe Wiring" with a maximum spacing of 25 ft. between labels.
Shielded twisted pair wires shall be used for each of the input or output pairs
connected to the Quantum Intrinsically Safe module blue terminal strip. The wire
gage size can be between AWG 20 and AWG 12. Each twisted pair wire shield must
be connected to the ground screws on the backplane, at the module end, and left
open at the field device connection end in the hazardous area. The instruction sheet
packaged with each Quantum Intrinsically Safe module contains a wiring diagram
applicable to that type of module.
Intrinsically Safe
Wiring Diagram
A
R
E
A
354
S
A
F
E
A
R
E
A
STANDARD I/O
WIRING
C
P
U
BACKPLANE
STD STD STD
I/O I/O I/O
M M M
O O
O
D
D
D
U
U
U
L
L
L
E
E
E
I.S.
M
O
D
U
L
E
(Intrinsically Safe)
INTRINSICALLY
SAFE WIRING
IN SEPARATE
BLUE RACEWAY
SAFE
WIRING
SAFE
WIRING
INTRINSICALLY
SAFE WIRING
LABELS
Questions
Regarding
Intrinsically Safe
Wiring Practices
The information contained in this Instruction Set concerning intrinsic safety wiring
practices is general in nature and is not intended to cover installation requirements
for any specific site. Questions regarding intrinsic safety wiring requirements for your
site should be referred to the approval agencies listed at the beginning of this
module.
355
The Quantum 140 DIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Output module switches
intrinsically safe power to a variety of components such as solenoid valves, LEDs,
etc., that are located in a hazardous area. This module is for use with sink devices
only.
Specifications
Table
Specifications for the Quantum 140 DIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Output
module are as follows.
Number of Output Points
LEDs
Output Voltage
24 V (open)
45 mA
Per Module
360 mA
0.4 mA
1 ms
ON-OFF
1 ms
Isolation
Channel to Channel
None
Channel to Bus
Fault Detection
None
Power Dissipation
5 W (full load)
External Power
Programming Software
356
Fusing
Outputs
Not required
Hot Swap
Eight.
Intrinsic Safety
Galvanically isolated barriers prevent this module from releasing sufficient energy to
ignite volatile gases or vapors in the hazardous area. Galvanic isolation in the form
of an opto-isolator and DC/DC converter, is provided between the field side output
circuitry and the Quantum bus circuitry. The DC/DC converter provides the field side
power no external field power is required.
Agency
Approvals
l
l
l
l
Fixed Wiring
System
The Quantum 140 DIO 330 00 Intrinsically Safe Digital Output module is designed
with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed
position, blue terminal strip, which is plugged into the module.
Wiring Diagram
Wiring diagrams for the Quantum 140 AII 330 00 module are included in Agency
Approvals, p. 873.
Field Wiring
Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded, twisted pair wires. The
acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and
the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices, to
avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.
Terminal Strip
Color and Keying
Assignment
The modules 140 XTS 332 00 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to
identify it as an intrinsically safe connector.
The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the
module. The keying assignment is given below.
Module Class
Module Coding
Intrinsically Safe
CDE
ABF
Active LED
Channel Status
LEDs
A green front panel LED indicator is associated with each channel (1 to 8). When the
LED is illuminated, the corresponding channel is switched ON. When the LED is not
illuminated, the corresponding channel is switched OFF.
357
The Quantum 140 DIO 330 00 module can be configured as one output 4x register.
1
2 3
4 5 6
7 8
Modsoft Module
Zoom Selections
Use Modsofts Module Zoom feature to display and select the output type and timeout state. Time-out state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
The following figure shows the user defined time-out state.
Output Type:
BIN
Time-out State:
Last Value
User Defined
BCD
User Defined Time-out State Points 1-8: 00000000
Intrinsically Safe
Data
For general information concerning the safety aspects of installing the Quantum
series of Intrinsically Safe modules, please review the following.
The following information is specifically concerned with the application of intrinsic
safety with regards to the installation and field wiring of the Quantum Intrinsically
Safe series of modules. It provides a general description of intrinsic safety and how
it is accomplished in Quantum modules, how they should be installed, precautions
that should be observed, and wiring and grounding practices that must be followed.
Intrinsic Safety
Intrinsic safety is a technique for ensuring that electrical energy supplied to circuits
in a hazardous area is too low to ignite volatile gases either by spark or thermal
means. Intrinsically safe circuits use energy-limiting devices known as intrinsically
safe barriers to prevent excess electrical energy from being applied to electrical
equipment located in the hazardous area.
Module Location
358
Intrinsically Safe
Barriers
All Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules use galvanic isolation to provide the
intrinsically safe barrier between them and the field devices located in hazardous
areas. Opto-isolators are located within the modules between the field side and the
Quantum backplane bus circuitry. The maximum agency specified intrinsically safe
parameters are:
Voc < 28 Vdc and Isc < 100mA
Intrinsically Safe
Power Supply
Installation of
Quantum
Intrinsically Safe
Modules
Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules are designed to fit into a standard 140 XBP 0XX
00 Quantum backplane. The modules can be installed in any slot position in the
backplane. (The first slot is normally reserved for the power supply module.)
Hot Swapping
Hot swapping Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is not allowed per intrinsic safety
standards.
CAUTION
Hot Swap
Do not attempt to hot swap a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Intrinsically safe wiring between Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules and the field
devices located in the hazardous area must be separated from all other wiring. This
can be accomplished by any one of the following methods.
l Use a separation of two inches (50 mm) of air space between the intrinsically safe
and non-intrinsically safe wiring. With this method, the intrinsically safe and nonintrinsically safe wires must be tied down in separate bundles to maintain the
required separation.
359
Intrinsically safe wiring must be properly identified and labeled. Light blue colorcoding should be used for all intrinsically safe wiring. The terminal strip wiring
connector on all Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is colored blue to distinguish it
from all non-intrinsically safe modules.
All wire ducts, raceways, cable trays, and open wiring must be labeled "Intrinsically
Safe Wiring" with a maximum spacing of 25 ft. between labels.
360
Shielded twisted pair wires shall be used for each of the input or output pairs
connected to the Quantum Intrinsically Safe module blue terminal strip. The wire
gage size can be between AWG 20 and AWG 12. Each twisted pair wire shield must
be connected to the ground screws on the backplane, at the module end, and left
open at the field device connection end in the hazardous area. The instruction sheet
packaged with each Quantum Intrinsically Safe module contains a wiring diagram
applicable to that type of module.
Intrinsically Safe
Wiring Diagram
PS
S
A
F
E
A
R
E
A
STANDARD I/O
WIRING
C
P
U
BACKPLANE
STD STD STD
I/O I/O I/O
M M M
O O
O
D
D
D
U
U
U
L
L
L
E
E
E
I.S.
M
O
D
U
L
E
(Intrinsically Safe)
INTRINSICALLY
SAFE WIRING
IN SEPARATE
BLUE RACEWAY
SAFE
WIRING
SAFE
WIRING
INTRINSICALLY
SAFE WIRING
LABELS
Questions
Regarding
Intrinsically Safe
Wiring Practices
The information contained in this Instruction Set concerning intrinsic safety wiring
practice is general in nature and is not intended to cover installation requirements
for any specific site. Questions regarding intrinsic safety wiring requirements for your
site should be referred to the approval agencies listed at the beginning of this
module.
361
362
At a Glance
Introduction
This chapter provides information on the applications for discrete and analog
simulators for the 140 XSM 002 00, 16 point discrete simulator module.
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
364
365
363
Simulator Modules
The 140 XSM 002 00 module consists of 16 toggle switches which are used to
generate up to 16 binary input signals to the 140 DAI 540 00 and the 140 DAI 740
00 AC input modules.
Point Discrete
Simulator
Module Figure
The following figure shows the 140 XSM 002 00 16 Point Discrete Simulator module.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Switch
Position
Function
Right
Middle
Left
Momentary Signal
Off
Constant Signal
Power
Connector
364
Simulator Modules
The 140 XSM 010 module is used for simulating 4 ... 20 mA field current loops used
with current input Quantum modules. It provides two adjustable 4 ... 20 mA analog
signals and one fixed 24 Vdc output. The simulator also measures and displays
voltages from 0 ... 5 Vdc.
The simulator module includes the following:
365
Simulator Modules
Analog
Simulator
Module Figure
The following figure shows the XSM 010 00 Analog Simulator module.
140
XSM 010 00
Analog simulator
Removable Door
Voltmeter
Analog out
Potentiometers
Analog in1
Analog in2
Note: The 140 XSM 010 00 can be placed in any slot in the Quantum.
Note: The 140 XSM 010 00 is not a functional module and should be used only for
testing, simulating, and calibrating current input Quantum modules.
366
Simulator Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the XSM 010 00 analog simulator
module.
Voltage
Operating Voltage
Output Continuous
Operating Current
Voltmeter Range
Internal Fusing
None
0 ... 5 Vdc
None
367
Simulator Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
The following figure shows the 140 XSM 010 00 generic wiring diagram for the 140
Axl 030 00 input modules, 140 Ax0 020 00 output modules, and the 140 AMM 090
00 input/output
module.
Wiring Example
Analog Simulator
140 XSM 010 00
Analog Output
Red
Black
White
0-5 Vdc
1
Monitor
2 (Typical)
7
9
Blue
10
Analog Input
Yellow
IN 1
1
2
Input X
(Typical)
3
Violet
5
6
Input Y
(Typical)
7
IN 2
24 Vdc
L
N
Black
White
115...240 Vac
Green/Yellow
140 XSM 010 00 Generic Wiring Diagram for the 140 AxI 030 00 Input
Modules, 140 AxO 020 00 Output Modules, and the 140 AMM 090 00
368
Simulator Modules
Note: The above diagram shows a typical connection between the simulator, a 140
ACI 030 00 input module, and a 140 ACO 020 00 output module. The simulator
provides a variable 4 ... 20 mA input to the input module. The input can then be
read by a Quantum CPU, and, if required, outputted through an output module. For
the output module to operate properly, the main current loop must be active, and,
as shown above, 24 Vdc is supplied between terminals 9 and 10 with a 249 W
voltage drop resistor. (For a more detailed description of these modules, refer to
Quantum I/O Modules, p. 377)
369
Simulator Modules
370
This chapter describes the battery module, its installation and replacement
considerations.
371
Battery Module
Battery Module
Figure
140
XCP 900 00
BATTERY BACKUP
Module Number
Module Description
Color Code
LED Area
Removable Door
Customer
Identification
Label
Battery 1
Battery Slot 1
(with battery installed)
Battery Access Tape
(for removal/replacement)
Changed:
Battery Slot 2
(with battery installed)
Battery2
Changed:
372
Battery Module
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the battery module.
Battery Type
C, 3 V lithium
100 mA
Service Life
8000 mAh
Shelf Life
Note: The formula to calculate the life cycle of one battery in the battery module is:
Life cycle = 1(4 x I) days
where I (in Amps) is the total battery current load of all modules in the backplane.
LED Indicators
Figure
Active
Bat1 Low
Bat2 Low
LED
Descriptions
Table
Color
Indication when On
Active
Green
Bat1 Low
Red
Bat2 Low
Red
Note: The Bat1 Low and Bat2 Low LEDs turn ON when a battery is not installed,
installed backwards, or in need of replacement.
373
Battery Module
Battery
Installation and
Replacement
Considerations
When single battery backup is required, install the battery in Battery Slot 1. The
circuitry is designed so Battery 1 supplies the current until it is used up. Battery
2 (when installed) then assumes the load requirement without interruption.
Battery status is indicated via LEDs and Modsoft status bytes.
374
When the controller is in operation, the batteries can be replaced at any time.
Note: When the controller is powered OFF, battery replacement can be done
without RAM loss only when a second functioning battery is installed.
Battery Module
Installing/
Removing a
Battery
If necessary, remove the old battery. Detach it from its housing (on the front of
the module), by pulling the battery access strip (see below) until the battery
pops out.
Insulating Strip
CAUTION
Pull on this tape to remove
battery. Do not use mettallic
tool.
Battery
Batt. install date:
Access trip
Replace it with the new battery using the reverse of the procedure in step 2.
WARNING
May cause personal injury or damage to equipment.
Do not use any metallic tools (i.e., pliers, screwdriver, etc.) when
removing or replacing a battery in this module. Using tools during
removal and replacement may cause personal injury and/or damage to
the battery and this module.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe injury or
equipment damage.
WARNING
May cause personal injury of damage to equipment.
Ensure that proper polarity is maintained when connecting and inserting
new batteries into the XCP 900 00. Inserting the battery improperly may
cause personal injury and/or damage to this module.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe injury or
equipment damage.
375
Battery Module
CAUTION
Hazardous waste.
Used batteries (hazardous waste) must be disposed of according to
local rules and regulations governing hazardous waste.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Battery Backup
The 140 XCP 900 00 provides RAM backup power for expert modules. One nonrechargeable 3.6 V lithium battery is provided and is accessible from the front of the
module in Battery Slot 1 (the upper slot) for easy removal when it is necessary to
change it.
376
At a Glance
Introduction
377
I/O Modules
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
380
394
Quantum High Density analog In I/O Module (140 ACI 040 00)
398
Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module (140 ACO 020 00)
403
Quantum High Density Analog Out I/O Module (140 ACO 130 00)
407
412
Quantum I/O RTD Input 8 Channel Module (140 ARI 030 10)
418
Quantum I/O Thermocouple Input 8 Channel Module (140 ATI 030 00)
422
Quantum I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module (140 AVI 030 00)
427
Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module (140 AVO 020 00)
431
436
439
443
446
Quantum I/O AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 Module (140 DAI 453 00)
451
456
Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 Module (140 DAI 543 00)
461
Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 Module (140 DAI 553 00)
466
Quantum I/O AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 Module (140 DAI 740 00)
471
Quantum I/O AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 Module (140 DAI 753 00)
475
Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 (140 DAM 590
00)
478
Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1 Module (140 DAO 840 00)
485
Quantum I/O 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1 Module (140 DAO 840 10)
489
Quantum I/O AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4 Module (140 DAO 842 10)
495
Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ... 48 Vac 4x4 Module (140 DAO 842 20)
501
Quantum I/O AC Output 230 Vac 4x8 Module (140 DAO 853 00)
507
Quantum I/O DC Input 5 V TTL 4x8 Source Module (140 DDI 153 10)
513
Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vac 4x8 Sink Module (140 DDI 353 00)
521
524
DC Input 125 Vdc 3x8 Sink Module (140 DDI 673 00)
529
Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink Module (140 DDI 841 00)
378
517
Quantum I/O 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Input Module (140 DDI 353 10)
536
I/O Modules
Topic
Page
Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module (140 DDI 853 00)
540
Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink / DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source
Module (140 DDM 390 00)
543
Quantum I/O 125 VDC Input/High Power Output Module (140 DDM 690 00)
551
Quantum I/O DC Output 5 V TTL 4x8 Sink Module (140 DDO 153 10)
558
Quantum I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source Module (140 DDO 353 00)
562
567
Quantum I/O 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Output Module (140 DDO 353 10)
572
Quantum 24VDC 6X16 Telefast Output Module (140 DDO 364 00)
577
Quantum I/O DC Output 10 ... 60 Vdc 2x8 Source Module (140 DDO 843 00)
584
Quantum I/O DC Output 24 - 125 Vdc 2x6 Source Module (140 DDO 885 00)
595
Quantum I/O Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open / Normally Closed (140 DRC
830 00)
600
605
Quantum Verified 10-30 VDC Out I/O Module (140 DVO 853 00)
588
Quantum I/O Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open Module (140 DRA 840 00)
610
379
I/O Modules
The following section describes the general Input/Output (I/O) modules including the
LED indicators and descriptions for the various types of module.
I/O Module
Figure
The following figure shows the I/O modules and its components.
140
DDO 843 00
10 80 vdc out
LED Area
Model Number
Module Description
Color Code
Field Wiring
Terminal Strip
Fuse
Cutouts
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
3
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
Note: When field wiring the I/O modules, the maximum wire size that should be
used is 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG; the minimum size is 20 AWG.
Note: The field wiring terminal strip (Modicon #140 XTS 002 00) must be ordered
separately. (The terminal strip includes the removable door and label.)
380
I/O Modules
Specifications
and Wiring
Diagrams for the
I/O Modules
The following table shows the specifications and wiring diagrams for the following I/
O modules.
Module Number
Short Description
Analog In
Analog Input/Output
RTD In
TC In
Analog In
24 Vac In
24 Vac In
48 Vac In
48 Vac In
115 Vac In
115 Vac In
115 Vac in
230 Vac in
230 Vac in
5 V TTL In
24 Vdc In
24 Vdc In Source
125 Vdc In
10 ... 60 Vdc In
10 ... 60 Vdc In
24 Vdc In/Out
5 V TTL Out
24 Vdc Out
381
I/O Modules
Relay Out
Relay Out
These tables describe the generic LED blocks used in Quantum I/O modules.
Descriptions of each I/O modules unique LED configuration are included in the
individual I/O module specifications in this section.
LED Indicators
for Discrete
Modules
The following table shows the LED indicators for discrete 16 point and analog I/O
modules.
Active
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
LED
Descriptions
16
16
The following table shows the LED descriptions for discrete 16 point and analog I/O
modules.
LEDs
Indication when ON
Green
Red
1 ... 16
Green
1 ... 16
382
Color
Active
Red
I/O Modules
LED Indicators
for 24 Point Input
Modules
Note: The following LED table pertains to the 140 DDI 673 00 module.
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 24 point input modules.
Active
1
17
10
18
11
19
12
20
13
21
14
22
15
23
LED
Descriptions for
24 Point Input
Modules
16
24
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 24 point input modules.
Color
Indication when ON
Active
Green
Red
1 ... 24
LED Indicators
for 32 Point I/O
Modules
LEDs
Green
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 32 point I/O modules.
Active
17
25
10
18
26
11
19
27
12
20
28
13
21
29
14
22
30
15
23
31
16
24
32
383
I/O Modules
LED
Descriptions for
32 Point I/O
Modules
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 32 point I/O modules.
Color
Indication when ON
Active
Green
Red
1 ... 32
LED Indicators
for Bi-Directional
Modules
LEDs
Green
Note: The following LED table pertains to the 140 AMM 090 00 module.
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 AMM 090 00 bi-directional
module.
Active
2
3
4
384
I/O Modules
LED
Descriptions for
Bi-Directional
Modules
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 AMM 090 00 bidirectional module.
LEDs
Color
Indication when ON
Active
Green
Red
1 and 2 (middle
column)
Red
Note: The following LED table pertains to the 140 DAM 590 00 and 140 DDM 390
00 modules.
The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140 DAM 590 00 and DDM 390
00 bi-directional modules.
Active
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140 DAM 590 00 and DDM
390 00 bi-directional modules.
LEDs
Color
Indication when ON
Active
Green
Red
Green
Green
385
I/O Modules
Note: The following LED table pertains to the 140 DDM 690 00 module.
The following table shows the LED indicators for the DDM 690 00 bi-directional
module.
Active
The following table shows the LED descriptions for bi-directional modules.
LEDs
Color
Indication when ON
Active
Green
Red
Green
1 and 4 (middle
columns)
Red
Note: To clear a fault condition, the point must be commanded OFF as follows:
l If the point is not in fast trip mode, this is done by setting the output command
bit to "point OFF."
l If the point is in fast trip mode, the fast trip must be disabled and then the point
commanded off by setting the output command bit to "point OFF."
386
I/O Modules
LED Indicators
for Discrete 12
Point Modules
Note: The following LED table pertains to the 140 DDO 885 00 module.
The following table shows the LED indicators for the discrete 12 point 140 DDO 885
00 module with fault indication.
Active
10
10
11
11
12
12
5
6
LED
Descriptions for
12 Point Modules
The following table shows the LED descriptions for discrete 12 point modules with
fault indication.
LEDs
Color
Indication when ON
Active
Green
Red
1 ... 12
Green
1 ... 12
Red
Note: To clear a fault, the point must be commanded OFF in user logic.
387
I/O Modules
Field Wiring
Terminal Strip/
Module Keying
Assignments
Field wiring terminal strips and module housings are slotted on the left and right
sides of the PCB card slot to accept keying pins (see I/O Module figure). The
purpose of keying is to prevent plugging the terminal strip into the wrong module,
once wiring connections have been made. Keying is implemented at the discretion
of the user.
CAUTION
Safety precaution
For maximum safety and protection, Modicon recommends that module
key coding be part of the system installation procedure.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Primary keying is provided on the right side of the module, marked A through F (top
and bottom positions are coded the same). Primary keying provides module class
coding. Primary codes have been pre-defined (see the following chart).
Secondary keying is provided on the left side of the module, marked 1 through 6.
Secondary keying codes are user-definable and may be used to identify module
personality within module classes, or other unique site requirements.
388
I/O Modules
I/O Module
Figure
The following figure shows the I/O module and its components.
Secondary
Key Slots
Right Side of
Terminal Strip
Primary
Key Slots
Left Side of
Terminal Strip
A
B
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
F
E
C
B
C
B
X
Note: The primary/secondary keys shown (in black) in this example reflect the
recommended coding of a 24 Vdc module in slot 6 to its field wiring terminal strip.
To support keying, all I/O modules accepting terminal strips come with 12 customerinstallable primary keys (six yellow keys each for the module and terminal strip) and
six secondary keys (three white keys each for the module and terminal strip). In the
following table, check the Primary Module and Terminal Strip Coding columns for
key locations.
389
I/O Modules
The following table shows the primary module and terminal strip keying for the I/O
modules.
Module Class
Module
Coding
Terminal Strip
Coding
5 Vdc
ABC
DEF
9 ... 12 Vdc
Unassigned
ABD
CEF
ABE
CDF
ABF
CDE
ACD
BEF
ACE
BDF
ACF
BDE
ADE
BCF
ADF
BCE
24 Vdc
125 Vdc
24 Vac
48 Vac
115 Vac
230 Vac
Relay
AEF
BCD
Analog I/O
BCD
AEF
I/O Modules
BCE
ADF
BCF
ADE
TC In / RTD / PT100
In
BDE
ACF
Analog In/Out
BDF
ACE
Intelligent/ Special
Purpose
BEF
ACD
Unassigned
CDE
ABF
Unassigned
CDF
ABE
Unassigned
CEF
ABD
Unassigned
DEF
ABC
391
I/O Modules
Secondary
Keying and
Backplane
Positions
The following table shows the secondary keying and backplane positions.
Backplane
Position
Module
Coding
Terminal Strip
Coding
123
456
124
356
125
346
126
345
134
256
135
246
136
245
145
236
146
235
10
156
234
11
234
156
12
235
146
13
236
145
14
245
136
15
246
135
16
256
134
The user may also use personality keying to differentiate between like module types
(i.e., DAO 840 00 and DAO 842 10 both have the same primary keying pin
combinations), using the white keys for each code.
Discrete I/O True
High/True Low
Circuit
392
The following illustrates discrete I/O module true high and true low logic circuits.
I/O Modules
The following figure shows true high/current sink input/current source output
schematic.
Power
Supply
Current
Power
Supply
+
L
O
G
I
Input
+
Output
Load
Common
Current
The following figure shows true low/current source input/current sink output
schematic.
Power
Supply
Power
Supply
Current
Load
Input
L
O
G
I
Output
Common
Current
Current Sinking
This describes a physical implementation of the I/O hardware, which when in the
true state, sinks current from the external load.
Current Sourcing
This describes a physical implementation of the I/O hardware, which when in the
true state, sources current to the external load.
393
I/O Modules
394
The Analog Input 8 Channel Unipolar module accepts mixed current and voltage
inputs. Required jumpers between the input and sense terminals for current input
measuring are included with the module.
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the ACI 030 ANALOG IN module.
Number of Channels
8 Differential
LEDs
Active
F
NOTE: This module produces a fault signal F if any one
channel detects a broken wire condition (4 ... 20 mA
only) or under voltage (1 ... 5 V only).
Required Addressing
9 Words In
Voltage Input
Linear Measuring Range
1 ... 5 Vdc
50 Vdc
Input Impedance
>20 MW ohms
Current Input
Linear Measuring Range
4 ... 20 mA
25 mA
Input Impedance
Resolution
12 Bits
+/- 0.04%
Input Filter
Isolation
Channel to Bus
Operating Voltage
Channel to Channel
30 Vdc max
Update Time
Fault Detection
240 mA
Power Dissipation
2W
External Power
395
I/O Modules
396
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the ACI 030 module.
INPUT 1(-)
INPUT 1(+)
Jumper
I SENSE 1
N/C
6
8
N/C
10
Current
Source
N/C
INPUT 2(-)
INPUT
INPUT 3(-)
I SENSE 2
N/C
INPUT 3(+)
12
13
16
15
N/C
18
17
N/C
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
N/C
28
27
N/C
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
N/C
38
37
N/C
40
39
Voltage
Source
11
14
I SENSE 3
N/C
INPUT
INPUT 4(-)
I SENSE 4
INPUT 5(+)
INPUT 5(-)
N/C
I SENSE 5
INPUT 6(-)
INPUT
I SENSE 6
N/C
INPUT 7(+)
INPUT 7(-)
N/C
N/C
INPUT 8(-)
I SENSE 7
INPUT 8(+)
I SENSE 8
N/C
397
I/O Modules
Note: 1. The current and voltage sources are supplied by the user (fusing is at the
discretion of the user). 2. Either a shielded or unshielded signal cable may be
used. Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal
source end. 3. Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F LED. To avoid
this occurrence, wire unused channels in voltage mode to a channel that is in use.
4. N / C = Not Connected.
Quantum High Density analog In I/O Module (140 ACI 040 00)
Overview
398
The 140 ACI 040 00 is a 16 channel analog input module which accepts mixed
current inputs.
I/O Modules
Specifications
The following table shows the specifications for the ACI 040 00 analog input module.
Number of Channels
LEDs
Required Addressing
17 Words In
Current Input
Linear Measuring Range
30 mA
Input Impedance
Accuracy Error @ 25
degrees C
Typical:
Maximum:
Input Filter
Isolation
Field to bus
Operating Voltage
Channel to Channel
30 Vdc max
Update Time
Fault Detection
360 mA
Power Dissipation
5W
External Power
Fusing
399
I/O Modules
Internal
External
400
None
User discretion
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
INPUT 1(-)
INPUT 2 (-)
INPUT 3(-)
INPUT 4 (-)
NC
12
11
14
17
19
22
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
33
36
INPUT 11 (-)
INPUT 12 (-)
N/C
INPUT13 (-)
37
40
39
INPUT 15 (-)
N/C
Current
Source
35
38
Single Ended
Input
+
INPUT 5(+)
INPUT 8 (+)
N/C
INPUT 9(+)
INPUT 14 (-)
INPUT 16 (-)
N/C
21
34
INPUT 10 (-)
INPUT 4 (+)
INPUT 7(+)
N/C
INPUT 9 (-)
INPUT 3(+)
15
18
Differential
Input
Current
Source
INPUT 6 (+)
INPUT 7(-)
INPUT 8 (-)
INPUT 3(+)
13
20
INPUT 6 (-)
16
INPUT 5(-)
10
INPUT 1(+)
INPUT 10 (+)
INPUT 11(+)
INPUT 12 (+)
N/C
INPUT 13(+)
INPUT 14 (+)
INPUT 15(+)
INPUT 16 (+)
N/C
401
I/O Modules
Notes on Wiring
Diagram
l The current sources are supplied by the user ( fusing is at the discretion of the
user.)
402
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module (140 ACO 020 00)
Overview
The Analog Output 4 Channel Current module controls and monitors current in 4 ...
20 mA loops.
403
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
LEDs
Active
F
1 ... 4 (Green) - Module outputs switched on
1 ... 4 (Red) - Broken wire on indicated channels
NOTE: When the green channel status LEDs are off,
the loop current is 0 mA.
Required Addressing
4 Words Out
Loop Voltage
Loop Resistance
Resolution
12 Bits
Linearity
+/- 1 LSB
Isolation
Channel to Channel
Update Time
Settling Time
Fault Detection
480 mA
Power Dissipation
404
Channel to Bus
5.3 W max
I/O Modules
Fusing
Internal
None
WARNING
Possible injury to personnel or equipment.
Before removing the connector, ensure that it is safe to have field wiring
in an open circuit condition.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe injury or
equipment damage.
Voltmeter
Monitor
Specifications
Table
Scaling
Output Impedance
Wire Length
Range
1 m max
405
I/O Modules
ACO 020 00
Wiring Diagram
Figure
The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 ACO 020 00 module.
I SOURCE 1(-)
MONITOR 1(+)
N/C
N/C
N/C
VM
N/C
N/C
I SOURCE 1(-)
I SOURCE 1(-)
I SINK 1(+)
FIELD
- DEVICE +
MONITOR 2(+)
10
12
11
14
13
N/C
N/C
16
15
N/C
N/C
18
17
N/C
20
19
22
21
24
23
N/C
N/C
26
25
N/C
N/C
28
27
I SOURCE 2(-)
I SOURCE 2(-)
I SOURCE 2(-)
I SINK 2(+)
MONITOR 3(+)
I SOURCE 3(-)
I SOURCE 3(-)
+
FIELD
DEVICE
-
I SOURCE 3(-)
N/C
I SINK 3(+)
30
29
32
31
34
33
N/C
N/C
36
35
N/C
N/C
I SOURCE 4(-)
38
37
N/C
40
39
I SOURCE 4(-)
MONITOR 4(+)
I SOURCE 4(-)
I SINK 4(+)
-
+
LOOP SUPPLY
406
I/O Modules
Note: Unused channels will indicate broken wire status unless wired to the loop
supply, as shown on Channel 4. In this example, loop supply must be 30 V or less.
2. VM is an optional voltmeter that can be connected to read voltage that is
proportional to the current. Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter maximum.
3. The wiring example shows Channel 1 acting as a current sink and Channel 2
acting as a current source for their respective field devices. 4. N / C = Not
Connected.
Note: At power up, the channel outputs are all disabled (current = 0). Configuring
any channel as disabled will cause all channels to be disabled when a
communication loss occurs.
Quantum High Density Analog Out I/O Module (140 ACO 130 00)
407
I/O Modules
Overview
The 140 ACO 130 00 is an eight channel analog output module used to control and
monitor current in 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, and 0 ... 25 mA loops.
The following table shows the module specifications.
Number of Channels
LEDs
Required Addressing
8 Words Out
Loop Voltage
Accuracy Error @ 25 C
Linearity
Isolation
Channel to Channel
none
Field to Bus
Update Time
Step Change
Fault Detection
Broken wire
550 mA
Power Dissipation
5.0 W
Fusing
408
I/O Modules
Internal
External
None
None
409
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
VM
RETURN
410
OUTPUT 2 SINK
N/C
N/C
11
MONITOR 3
OUTPUT 3 SINK 14
13
N/C
15
MONiTOR 4
OUTPUT 4 SINK 18
17
N/C
19
N/C
21
MONITOR 5
OUTPUT 5 SINK 24
23
N/C
25
MONITOR 6
OUTPUT 6 SINK 28
27
N/C
29
N/C
31
MONITOR 7
OUTPUT 7 SINK 34
33
N/C
RETURN 36
24 Vdc
loop
supply
MONITOR 2
RETURN 32
N/C 30
Field Device
RETURN 26
Field Device
N/C
RETURN 22
Field Device
N/C 20
Field Device
RETURN 16
Field Device
OUTPUT 1 SINK
RETURN 12
Field Device
MONITOR 1
N/C 10
Field Device
RETURN
Field Device
35
MONITOR 8
OUTPUT 8 SINK 38
37
N/C
N/C 40
39
N/C
VM
I/O Modules
Notes on Wiring
Diagram
shielded cable is recommended. Shielded cable should have a shield tied to earth
ground near the signal source end.
l Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F (fault) LED. To avoid this
occurrence the unused channels should be configured in the 0 ... 25 mA range.
l All terminals labeled RETURN" are common inside the module.
l N/C = Not connected
411
I/O Modules
The Analog In/Out 4/2 bi-directional module combines four analog inputs which
accept a mix of current and voltage, with two isolated analog outputs that control and
monitor current in 4 ... 20 mA loops.
Topology
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the topology specifications for the analog input/output
module.
Number of Input
Channels
4 channels
Number of
Output Channels
2 isolated channels
LEDs
Active
F (red) - No power applied to the output group(s) or input out of range
1 ... 2 (Green - left column) - Indicates output is active
1 ... 2 (Red - middle column) - Indicates output status: broken wire
1 ... 4 (Red- right column) - Indicates input status: under/over range
412
I/O Modules
Input
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the input specifications for the analog input/output
module.
Operating Ranges
Bipolar
+/- 10 Vdc
+/-5 Vdc
+/- 20 mA
0 ... 20 mA
Unipolar
0 ... 10 Vdc
0 ... 5 Vdc
Unipolar w/Offset
1 ... 5 Vdc
4 ... 20 mA
Voltage Input
Linear Measuring Range
+/- 50 Vdc
>10 M ohms
Current Input
Linear Measuring Range
+/- 25 mA
Input Impedance
250 ohms
Resolution
16 Bit
+/- 10 Vdc
0 ...10 Vdc
15 Bit
+/- 5 Vdc
0 ... 5 Vdc
14 Bit
1 ... 5 Vdc
4 ... 20 mA
Typical:
+/- 0.03%
Maximum:
+/-20 mA
Linearity
Better than 80 dB @ 50 or 60 Hz
Input Filter
0 ... 20 mA
Operating Voltage
Channel to Channel
Isolation
Channel to Bus
Update Time
Fault Detection
413
I/O Modules
Output
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the output specifications for the analog input/output
module.
Loop Voltage
.. 30 Vdc, up to 60 Vdc with an external resistor
Loop Resistance
RMIN * =
V LOOP - 30 Vdc
0.020 A
R MAX =
V LOOP - 7 Vdc
0.020 A
Resolution (bits)
12
Accuracy Error @ 25
degrees C
Linearity
Typical: +/- 0.004% degrees/C of full scale. Maximum:+/0.007% degrees/C of full scale
Isolation
Channel to Channel
Channel to Bus
Update Time
15 ms for 2 channels
Settling Time
414
Fault Detection
I/O Modules
Voltmeter
Monitor
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the voltmeter monitor for the analog
input/output module.
1 ... 5 V (Loop current must be active)
Scaling
Output Impedance
Common
Specifications
Range
1 meter
The following table shows the common specifications for the analog input/output
module.
Required Addressing
350 mA
Fusing
Internal
None required
External
User discretion
415
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 AMM 090 00 analog input/
output module.
CURRENT SOURCE(-)1
MONITOR 1
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
CURRENT SOURCE(-)1
CURRENT SOURCE(-)1
CURRENT SOURCE(-)2
10
Optional Monitor
Voltmeter
1 V= 4 mA
24 Vdc
Field
Supply
N/C
CURRENT SINK(+)1
MONITOR 2
12
11
14
13
N/C
N/C
16
15
N/C
N/C
18
17
N/C
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
N/C
28
27
N/C
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
N/C
38
37
N/C
40
39
Field
Device
4 - 20 mA
Current
CURRENT SOURCE(-)2
CURRENT SOURCE(-)2
IN(-)1
N/C
N/C
IN(-)4
Field
Device
4 - 20 mA
Current
IN(+)
SENSE 1
IN(-)2
IN(-)3
CURRENT SINK(+)2
IN(+)
SENSE 2
N/C
IN(+)
SENSE 3
IN(+)
SENSE 4
N/C
Sensor +
0 - 10 V
Output -
I/O Modules
Channel 2
Channel 2
Note: 1. Pins 1 ... 20 are outputs Pins 21 ... 40 are inputs. 2. N / C = Not Connected
3. Jumpers are required between IN (+) and SENSE terminals for all current input
ranges.
417
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O RTD Input 8 Channel Module (140 ARI 030 10)
Overview
418
The RTD Input 8 Channel module accepts input from up to eight 2-, 3-, and 4-wire
RTD sensors, and provides temperature measurement data to the Quantum CPU.
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
LEDs
Active
F
1 ... 8 (Red) - Indicated channel is out of range.
(This includes broken wire and short circuit
conditions.)
R - Module has passed power-up diagnostics
Required Addressing
10 Words In
Range (degrees C)
- 200 to + 850
- 100 to + 450
- 60 to + 180
Measurement Current
PT100, PT200, N100, N200
2.5 mA
0.5 mA
Input Impedance
> 10 M ohms
Linearity
Resolution
0.1 degree C
Absolute Accuracy
Isolation
Channel to Channel
300 V peak-to-peak
Channel to Bus
640 ms
4-wire
3-wire
1.2 s
Fault Detection
200 mA
Power Dissipation
1W
External Power
419
I/O Modules
420
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
I SOURCE 1(+)
I SOURCE 1(-)
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
V SENSE 1(+)
V SENSE 1(-)
I SOURCE 2(+)
V SENSE 2(+)
I SOURCE 2(-)
SHIELD 2
SHIELD 1
I SOURCE 3(-)
I SOURCE 3(+)
2-WIRE RTD
V SENSE 3(-)
V SENSE 3(+)
I SOURCE 4(-)
I SOURCE 4(+)
V SENSE 4(+)
V SENSE 4(-)
SHIELD 3
SHIELD 4
I SOURCE 5(-)
I SOURCE 5(+)
V SENSE 5(+)
V SENSE 5(-)
I SOURCE 6(+)
I SOURCE 6(-)
V SENSE 6(+)
V SENSE 6(-)
SHIELD 6
SHIELD 5
I SOURCE 7(+)
3-WIRE RTD
I SOURCE 7(-)
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
V SENSE 7(+)
V SENSE 7(-)
I SOURCE 8(+)
I SOURCE 8(-)
V SENSE 8(-)
V SENSE 8(+)
SHIELD 7
SHIELD 8
V SENSE 2(-)
421
I/O Modules
Note: The module is calibrated per: IEC Publication 751 for platinum RTDs: 100
ohms @ 0 degrees C, TCR = 0.00385ohms/ohms/degrees C. DIN 43760 for nickel
RTDs, American Platinum RTDs: 100 ohms @ o degrees C, TRC ( ) =
0.00392ohms/ohms/degrees C. 2. Terminals labeled shield are not connected
internally. Shields should be grounded at the field device end. 3. When using 2-wire
configurations, the temperature equivalent of twice the lead resistance of one leg
must be subtracted from the temperature reading.
Quantum I/O Thermocouple Input 8 Channel Module (140 ATI 030 00)
Overview
422
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
LEDs
Active
F
1 ... 8 (Red) - Indicated channel is out of range - Broken
wire condition is detected
Required Addressing
10 Words In
Range (degrees C)
- 50 ... + 1665
- 50 ... + 1665
Millivolt Ranges
Input Impedance
> 1 M ohms
Input Filter
120 dB min @ 50 or 60 Hz
Resolution
TC Ranges
423
I/O Modules
Millivolt Ranges
Operating Voltage
Channel to Channel
Isolation
Channel to Bus
Update Time
1 s (all channels)
Fault Detection
280 mA
Power Dissipation
1.5 W
External Power
Note: 1. Absolute accuracy includes all errors from the internal CJC, TC
curvature, offset plus gain, for module temperature of 0 ... 60 degrees C. User
supplied TC errors not included.
2. For Type J and K, add 1.5 degrees C inaccuracy for temperatures below -100
degrees C.
3. Type B cannot be used below 130 degrees C.
4. All TC ranges have an open TC detect and upscale output. This results in a
reading of 7FFFh or 32767 decimal when an open TC is detected.
424
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
10
Not used
12
11
Not used
14
13
Not used
16
15
Not used
18
17
Not used
20
19
Not used
22
21
Not used
24
23
Not used
26
25
Not used
28
27
Not used
30
29
Not used
32
31
Not used
34
33
Not used
36
35
Not used
38
37
Not used
40
39
+
-
Not used
+
+
-
Not used
+
+
-
Not used
+
+
-
Not used
425
I/O Modules
Note: 1. Either shielded or unshielded TCs may be used. (The user should
consider using shielded wire in a noisy environment.) Shielded types should have
a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end. 2. Connections marked
Not Used are not electrically connected within the module. These points are used
as a thermal link to ambient air. They are not recommended as electrical tie points
as this could affect the accuracy of cold junction compensation.
426
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module (140 AVI 030 00)
Overview
The Analog In 8 Channel Bipolar module accepts a mix of current and voltage
inputs. Jumpers are required between the input and sense terminals for current
inputs.
427
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the ANALOG IN module.
Number of Channels
8 Differential
LEDs
Active
F
1 ... 8 (Red) - Indicated channel is out of range (1 ... 5
V) - Broken wire condition is detected (4 ... 20 mA)
Required Addressing
9 Words In
+/- 10 Vdc
+/- 5 Vdc
+/- 20 mA
Unipolar
0 ... 10 Vdc
0 ...5 Vdc
0 ... 20 mA
Unipolar w/Offset
1 ... 5 Vdc
4 ... 20 mA
Voltage Input
Linear Measuring Range
50 Vdc
Input Impedance
>20 M ohms
Current Input
Linear Measuring Range
25 mA
Input Impedance
Resolution
16 Bit
15 Bit
14 Bit
Linearity
+/- 0.008%
Input Filter
Isolation
Channel to Bus
Operating Voltage
Channel to Channel
428
Update Time
I/O Modules
Fault Detection
280 mA
Power Dissipation
2.2 W
External Power
Linear
Measuring
Ranges Table
The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140 AVI 030 00
Analog Input Module.
Data Format
Under
Warning
Normal
Over
Warning
+/- 10 V
< 768
> 64,768
+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA
< 16,768
> 48,768
0 ... 10 V
0 ... 64,000
> 64,000
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA
16-bit Format
Input
0 ... 32,000
> 32,000
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA
<6,400
> 32,000
+/- 10 V
< 10,000
> 10,000
+/-5 V, +/- 20 mA
< -5,000
> 5,000
0 ... 10 V
0 ... 10,000
> 10,000
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA
Voltmeter*
Format
0 ... 5,000
> 5,000
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA
< 1,000
> 5,000
+/- 10 V
0 ... 4,095
4,095
+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA
12-bit Format
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA
4,095
4,095
0 ... 4,095
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA
0 ... 4,095
0 ... 4,095
0 ... 10 V
4,095
0 ... 4,095
4,095
429
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
INPUT
N/C
N/C
N/C
10
INPUT
INPUT
12
11
N/C
14
13
16
15
INPUT
INPUT
Jumpe
1 SENSE
current
source
INPUT
1 SENSE
N/C
INPUT
voltage
source
1 SENSE
INPUT
1 SENSE
N/C
18
17
N/C
20
19
22
21
N/C
24
23
INPUT
26
25
N/C
28
27
N/C
30
29
INPUT
INPUT
1 SENSE
INPUT
1 SENSE
N/C
INPUT
INPUT
32
31
N/C
34
33
36
35
N/C
38
37
N/C
40
39
INPUT
430
N/C
1 SENSE
INPUT
1 SENSE
N/C
I/O Modules
Note: 1. The current and voltage sources are supplied by the user (fusing is at the
discretion of the user). 2. Either a shielded or unshielded signal cable may be
used. Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal
source end. 3. To prevent improper fault indications, unused inputs should have
the + (plus) and - (minus) inputs tied together and be configured for a bipolar input
range. 4. N / C = Not Connected.
Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module (140 AVO 020 00)
Overview
The Analog Out 4 Channel module outputs voltages in mixed modes and levels.
These are selected using jumpers on the field-wiring connector.
431
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the Analog Out 4 channel module.
Number of Channels
LEDs
Active
1 ... 4 (Green) - Indicates module outputs switched on
NOTE: When the green channel status LEDs are off, the
module is not generating outputs, however, an output may
still be present if the master override signal is used.
Required Addressing
4 words out
Unipolar
Output Current
Source Resistance
0.1 ohms
Resolution
12 bits
Accuracy Error @ 25
degrees
Bipolar Ranges
Linearity
+/- 1 LSB
Isolation
Channel to Channel
Channel to Bus
Update Time
Fault Detection
None
Wire Length
700 mA
Power Dissipation
432
400 m max
4.5 W max
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
I/O Modules
External Power
Fusing
Internal
None
External
WARNING
Possible injury to personnel or equipment.
Before removing the connector, ensure that it is safe to have field wiring
in an open circuit condition.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe injury or
equipment damage.
WARNING
Malfunction of equipment
Master override must be connected to an external source through 1/16
A in line fuse, or strapped to common to avoid erroneous outputs in this
module.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe injury or
equipment damage.
Note: The output levels of this module are either those generated within the
module based on data inputs from the system, or from the master override inputs
on the field-wiring terminal strip.
During normal operation, the front panel Active and 1 ... 4 green LEDs are ON. If bus
communication to the module stops for any reason, the Active LED will go off and,
depending on panel software configuration.
l When LEDs 1 ... 4 are ON, the channel output levels will be as predetermined and
held by the module.
433
I/O Modules
l When LEDs 1 ... 4 are OFF, the master override levels are output on each
channel.
If module power is lost or the module fails, the master override levels will be output.
The master override inputs must be from an external supply with a source
impedance of <200 ohms or tied to system common. These inputs for channels that
are in use should not be allowed to float and may be unique for each.
434
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 AVO 020 00 module.
COMMON 1 (-)
COMMON 1 (-)
N/C
MASTER OVERRIDE
See
NOTE 1
COMMON 1 (-)
COMMON 2 (-)
COMMON 2 (-)
N/C
MASTER OVERRIDE
See
NOTE 1
COMMON 2 (-)
COMMON 3 (-)
COMMON 3 (-)
N/C
OUTPUT 1 (+)
R1
CONTROL 1
Jumper
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
N/C
22
21
OUTPUT 3 (+)
24
See
NOTE 1
CHANNEL 1
JUMPERED
FOR +/-10 V
23
REFERENCE 1
NOTE 2: N/C = Not Connected
N/C
OUTPUT 2 (+)
Jumper
R2
Jumper
CHANNEL 2
JUMPERED
FOR 0 TO 5 V
CONTROL 2
REFERENCE 2
26
25
28
27
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
Channel
Output X
Normally
Closed
37
REFERENCE 4
40
39
CHANNEL 3
JUMPERED
FOR +/-5 V
Master
Override X
CONTROL 4
38
Typical one
of four
Normally
Open
Jumper
R3
CONTROL 3
30
MASTER OVERRIDE
FIELD
DEVICE
N/C
Jumper
REFERENCE 3
COMMON 3 (-)
COMMON 4 (-)
COMMON 4 (-)
N/C
See
NOTE 1
MASTER OVERRIDE
COMMON 4 (-)
N/C
OUTPUT 4 (+)
Jumper
R4
CHANNEL 4
JUMPERED
FOR 0 TO 10 V
FIELD
DEVICE
1/16A
EXTERNAL
VOLTAGE
SOURCE
435
I/O Modules
436
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 24 VAC IN module.
Number of Input Points
16 Individually Isolated
LEDs
Active
1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
1 Word In
60 Hz
1.9 mA
30 Vac
10 s
32 Vac
1 cycle
50 Vac
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
Isolation
Input to Input
Input to Bus
Fault Detection
None
180 mA
Power Dissipation
5.5 W max
External Power
Fusing
Internal
External
None
User discretion
437
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
RETURN 1
INPUT 1
2
4
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
RETURN 2
INPUT 2
RETURN 3
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
RETURN 4
N/C
RETURN 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
RETURN 7
INPUT 8
RETURN 8
RETURN 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
RETURN 11
INPUT 12
RETURN 12
RETURN 14
INPUT 14
RETURN 15
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
RETURN 16
438
N/C
INPUT 13
RETURN 13
N/C
N/C
INPUT 9
RETURN 10
N/C
N/C
INPUT 5
RETURN 6
N/C
N/C
I/O Modules
439
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the AC input 24 VAC IN module.
Number of Input Points
32 in 4, 8 point groups
LEDs
Active
1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 words in
60 Hz
1.9 mA
Input Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
30 Vac
10 s
32 Vac
1 cycle
50 Vac
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
Isolation
Group to Group
Input to Bus
Fault Detection
None
250 mA
Power Dissipation
10.9 W max
External Power
Fusing
Internal
External
440
None
User discretion
I/O Modules
Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum
frequency.
441
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
INPUT 1
2
4
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
N/C
GROUP A COMMON
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 12
INPUT 11
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
N/C
GROUP B COMMON
INPUT 17
INPUT 18
INPUT 19
INPUT 20
INPUT 22
INPUT 21
INPUT 23
INPUT 24
N/C
GROUP C COMMON
INPUT 26
INPUT 25
INPUT 27
INPUT 28
INPUT 29
INPUT 30
INPUT 31
INPUT 32
GROUP D COMMON
N/C
442
I/O Modules
140 DSI 353 00 32 32 Point Input Module for 24 Vdc with Open-circuit Monitoring
443
I/O Modules
Modicon TSX
Quantum 32
Point Input
Module for 24
Vdc with Opencircuit
Monitoring
The input module is designed for 24 VDC and has 4 groups with 8 sink ports each.
Number of Input Points
LEDs
ON (current)
2.5mA
OFF (current)
min. 0.3mA
Isolation
Group to Group
Output to Bus
Fault Detection
None
250 mA
Power Dissipation
Open-Circuit Monitoring
Broken-wire detection
Shunt Resistor
recommended 56 kW
Fusing
Internal
External
444
None
User discretion
I/O Modules
INPUT 1
INPUT 4
INPUT 3
INPUT 6
INPUT 5
INPUT 8
INPUT 7
GROUP A
EXT. SUPPLY
INPUT 10
GROUP A COMMON
INPUT 9
INPUT 12
INPUT 11
INPUT 14
INPUT 13
INPUT 16
INPUT 15
GROUP B
EXT. SUPPLY
56k
GROUP B COMMON
INPUT 18
INPUT 17
INPUT 20
INPUT 19
INPUT 22
INPUT 21
INPUT 24
INPUT 23
GROUP C
EXT. SUPPLY
INPUT 26
GROUP C COMMON
INPUT 25
INPUT 28
INPUT 27
INPUT 30
INPUT 29
INPUT 32
INPUT 31
GROUP D
EXT. SUPPLY
56 k
GROUP D COMMON
recommended Value for Uextern=24V
445
I/O Modules
446
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 48 VAC IN module.
Number of Input Points
16 individually isolated
LEDs
Active
1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
1 word in
60 Hz
1.7 mA
56 Vac
10 s
63 Vac
1 cycle
100 Vac
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
Isolation
Input to Input
Input to Bus
Fault Detection
None
180 mA
Power Dissipation
5.5 W max
External Power
Fusing
Internal
None
External
User discretion
447
I/O Modules
Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum
frequency.
448
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
RETURN 1
INPUT 1
2
4
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
RETURN 2
INPUT 2
RETURN 3
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
RETURN 4
N/C
RETURN 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
RETURN 7
INPUT 8
RETURN 8
RETURN 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
RETURN 11
INPUT 12
RETURN 12
RETURN 14
INPUT 14
RETURN 15
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
RETURN 16
N/C
INPUT 13
RETURN 13
N/C
N/C
INPUT 9
RETURN 10
N/C
N/C
INPUT 5
RETURN 6
N/C
N/C
449
I/O Modules
450
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 Module (140 DAI 453 00)
Overview
451
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the AC input 48 VAC IN module.
Number of Input Points
32 in 4, 8 point groups
LEDs
Active
1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 words in
60 Hz
1.7 mA
Input Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
56 Vac
10 s
63 Vac
1 cycle
100 Vac
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
Isolation
Group to Group
Input to Bus
Fault Detection
None
250 mA
Power Dissipation
10.9 W max
External Power
Fusing
Internal
External
452
None
User discretion
I/O Modules
Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum
frequency.
453
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
2
4
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
N/C
GROUP A COMMON
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 12
INPUT 11
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
N/C
GROUP B COMMON
INPUT 17
INPUT 18
INPUT 19
INPUT 20
INPUT 22
INPUT 21
INPUT 23
INPUT 24
N/C
GROUP C COMMON
INPUT 26
INPUT 25
INPUT 27
INPUT 28
INPUT 29
INPUT 30
INPUT 31
INPUT 32
GROUP D COMMON
N/C
454
I/O Modules
455
I/O Modules
456
The AC Input 115 Vac 16x1 module accepts 115 Vac inputs.
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 115 VAC IN module.
Number of Input Points
16 individually isolated
LEDs
Active
1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
1 word in
60 Hz
12 k ohms capacitive
2.1 mA
132 Vac
10 s
156 Vac
1 cycle
200 Vac
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
Isolation
Input to Input
Input to Bus
Fault Detection
None
180 mA
Power Dissipation
5.5 W max
External Power
Fusing
Internal
None
External
User discretion
457
I/O Modules
Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum
frequency.
458
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
The following figure shows the 140 DAI 540 00 wiring diagram.
RETURN 1
INPUT 1
2
4
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
RETURN 2
INPUT 2
RETURN 3
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
RETURN 4
N/C
RETURN 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
RETURN 7
INPUT 8
RETURN 8
RETURN 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
RETURN 11
INPUT 12
RETURN 12
RETURN 14
INPUT 14
RETURN 15
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
RETURN 16
N/C
INPUT 13
RETURN 13
N/C
N/C
INPUT 9
RETURN 10
N/C
N/C
INPUT 5
RETURN 6
N/C
N/C
459
I/O Modules
460
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 Module (140 DAI 543 00)
Overview
The AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 module accepts 115 Vac inputs.
461
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the AC input 115 VAC IN module.
Number of Input Points
16 in 2, 8 point groups
LEDs
Active
1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
1 word in
2.1 mA
Input Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
132 Vac
10 s
156 Vac
1 cycle
200 Vac
1.3 ms
276 Vac
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
Isolation
Input to Input
Group-to-Group
Input to Bus
Fault Detection
None
180 mA
Power Dissipation
5.5 W max
External Power
Fusing
Internal
462
None
External
User discretion
I/O Modules
Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum
frequency.
463
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
INPUT 1
N/C
N/C
4
6
N/C
N/C
10
N/C
1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
N/C
INPUT 5
N/C
12
11
N/C
14
13
N/C
16
15
N/C
18
17
N/C
20
19
N/C
22
21
N/C
24
23
N/C
26
25
N/C
28
27
N/C
30
29
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
GROUP A COMMON
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
N/C
INPUT 13
N/C
32
31
N/C
34
33
N/C
36
35
N/C
38
37
N/C
40
39
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
GROUP B COMMON
464
I/O Modules
Note: 1. All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line-input voltage.
2. This module is not polarity sensitive. 3. N / C = Not Connected.
465
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 Module (140 DAI 553 00)
Overview
466
The AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 module accepts 115 Vac inputs.
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 115 VAC IN module.
Number of Input Points
32 in 4, 8 point groups
LEDs
Active
1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 words in
2.1 mA
Input Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
132 Vac
10 s
156 Vac
1 cycle
200 Vac
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
Isolation
Input to Input
Group to Group
Input to Bus
Fault Detection
None
250 mA
Power Dissipation
10.9 W max
External Power
Fusing
Internal
External
None
User discretion
467
I/O Modules
Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum
frequency.
468
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
2
4
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
N/C
GROUP A COMMON
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 12
INPUT 11
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
N/C
GROUP B COMMON
INPUT 17
INPUT 18
INPUT 19
INPUT 20
INPUT 22
INPUT 21
INPUT 23
INPUT 24
N/C
GROUP C COMMON
INPUT 26
INPUT 25
INPUT 27
INPUT 28
INPUT 29
INPUT 30
INPUT 31
INPUT 32
GROUP D COMMON
N/C
469
I/O Modules
Note: 1. All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line-input voltage.
2. This module is not polarity sensitive. 3. N / C = Not Connected.
470
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 Module (140 DAI 740 00)
Overview
The AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 module accepts 230 Vac inputs.
471
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 230 VAC IN module.
Number of Input Points
LEDs
16 individually isolated
Active
1 - 16 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
1 word in
264 Vac
10 s
300 Vac
1 cycle
400 Vac
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
Isolation
Input to Input
Input to Bus
Fault Detection
None
180 mA
Power Dissipation
5.5 W max
External Power
Fusing
Internal
None
External
User discretion
Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum
frequency.
472
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
RETURN 1
INPUT 1
2
4
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
RETURN 2
INPUT 2
RETURN 3
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
RETURN 4
N/C
RETURN 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
RETURN 7
INPUT 8
RETURN 8
RETURN 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
RETURN 11
INPUT 12
RETURN 12
RETURN 14
INPUT 14
RETURN 15
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
RETURN 16
N/C
INPUT 13
RETURN 13
N/C
N/C
INPUT 9
RETURN 10
N/C
N/C
INPUT 5
RETURN 6
N/C
N/C
473
I/O Modules
474
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 Module (140 DAI 753 00)
Overview
The AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 module accepts 230 Vac inputs.
475
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the AC 230 VAC IN module.
Number of Input Points
LEDs
32 in 4, 8 point groups
Active
1 - 32 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 words in
2.6 mA
264 Vac
10 s
300 Vac
1 cycle
400 Vac
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
Isolation
Input to Input
Input to Bus
Fault Detection
None
250 mA
Power Dissipation
9 W max
External Power
Fusing
Internal
None
External
User discretion
Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum
frequency.
476
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
INPUT 1
INPUT 4
INPUT 3
INPUT 6
L
INPUT 5
INPUT8
INPUT 7
N
GROUP A COMMON
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
N/C
37
40
39
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
GROUP B COMMON
N/C
INPUT 18
INPUT 17
INPUT 20
INPUT 19
INPUT 22
INPUT 21
INPUT 24
INPUT 23
GROUP C COMMON
N/C
INPUT 26
INPUT 25
INPUT 27
INPUT 28
INPUT 29
INPUT 30
INPUT 31
INPUT 32
GROUP D COMMON
N/C
CAUTION
Voltage Compatibility
All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
477
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 (140 DAM 590 00)
Overview
The AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 / AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 module accepts 115 Vac inputs
and switches 115 Vac loads.
Topology
Specification
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 115 VAC and AC IN/OUT
module for the Topology.
Topology
Number of Input Points
16 in 2, 8 point groups
8 in 2, 4 point groups
LEDs
Active
F (red) - No power applied to the group(s) or blown fuse
1 ... 16 (Green - right two columns) - Indicates input status
1 ... 8 (Green - left column) - Indicates output status
Required Addressing
478
I/O Modules
Input
Specifications
Table
ON: 85 ... 132 Vac (11.1 mA max) OFF: 0 ... 20 Vac 14.4 k
ohms capacitive
60 Hz Typical Input
Impedance
ON: 79 ... 132 Vac (13.2 mA max) OFF: 0 ... 20 Vac 12 k ohms
capacitive
2.1 mA
132 Vac
10 s
156 Vac
1 cycle
200 Vac
Response (Inputs)
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
Note: Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6% THD and 63 Hz maximum
frequency.
479
I/O Modules
Output
Specifications
Table
10 seconds
156 Vac
1 cycle
200 Vac
1.5 Vac
5 mA
4 A continuous
Each Group
4 A continuous
Per Module *
85-132V ms
40
45
50
55
60
2 mA @ 115 Vac
Per Point
Per Group
30 A
45 A
Two Cycles
20 A
30 A
Three Cycles
10 A
25 A
One Cycle
Response (Outputs)
OFF - ON, ON - OFF
480
Applied DV / DT
I/O Modules
Common
Specification
Table
47 ... 63 Hz
Isolation (Module)
Group to Group
Fault Detection
Input
None
Output
250 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
Input
Output
Note: Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to
gain access to the fuses.
481
I/O Modules
Module Fuses
Location Figure
The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAM 590 00 module.
140
DDO 843 00
10 80 vdc out
Fuse Locations
Points
1-4
Points
5-8
Note: If the 140 DAM 590 00 module is used in a RIO drop, the 140 CRA 93X 00
RIO Drop must be Version 1.04 at a minimum. Check the version label (see below)
on the top front of the 140 CRA 93X 00 module and ensure that it is at the proper
revision level
482
I/O Modules
RIO Drop
Location Figure
483
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
N/C
OUTPUT 2
N/C
N/C
N/C
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT GROUP A COMMON
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 7
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT GROUP B COMMON
INPUT 1
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
N/C
INPUT 10
INPUT 12
INPUT 16
N/C
INPUT 14
484
OUTPUT 1
INPUT 15
N
INPUTGROUP B COMMON
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1 Module (140 DAO 840 00)
Overview
The AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1 module switches 24 ... 230 Vac powered loads.
485
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the AC Output 24 ... 230 VAC OUT
module.
Number of Output Points
16 isolated
LEDs
Active
1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
1 word out
Voltage (rms)
Working
Absolute Maximum
Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
1.5 Vac
5 mA
Per Module *
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20-132 V ms
170-253 V rms
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
486
I/O Modules
Per Point
One Cycle
30 A
Two Cycles
20 A
Three Cycles
10 A
Applied DV / DT
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
RC snubber suppression
Isolation (rms)
Output to Output
Output to Bus
350 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
Internal
External
None
Each output point must be fused with an external fuse.
The recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse (Part #
043502405 or equivalent) or any other fuse with an
I2T rating of less than 87.
487
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
OUTPUT 1 LINE
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
OUTPUT 2 LINE
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3 LINE
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 4 LINE
N/C
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 5 LINE
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 6 LINE
OUTPUT 7
OUTPUT 7 LINE
OUTPUT 8 LINE
N/C
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT 10
OUTPUT 10 LINE
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 11 LINE
OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 12 LINE
OUTPUT 15 LINE
OUTPUT 14
OUTPUT 15
OUTPUT 16
OUTPUT 16 LINE
N/C
488
N/C
OUTPUT 13
OUTPUT 13 LINE
OUTPUT 14 LINE
N/C
OUTPUT 9
OUTPUT 9 LINE
N/C
N/C
N/C
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1 Module (140 DAO 840 10)
Overview
The AC Output 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1 module switches 24 ... 115 Vac powered loads.
489
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the AC Output 24-115 VAC OUT
module.
Number of Output Points
16 isolated
LEDs
Active
1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
1 word out
Voltage (rms)
Working
Absolute Maximum
Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
1.5 Vac
5 mA
Per Module
490
I/O Modules
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20-132 V rms
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
Per Point
One Cycle
30 A
Two Cycles
20 A
Three Cycles
10 A
Applied DV / DT
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
RC snubber suppression
Isolation (rms)
Output to Output
Output to Bus
350 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
Internal
None
491
I/O Modules
External
492
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
The following figure shows the 140 DAO 840 10 wiring diagram.
5 A ( see CAUTION 2)
OUTPUT 1 LINE
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
OUTPUT 2 LINE
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3 LINE
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 4 LINE
N/C
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 5 LINE
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 6 LINE
OUTPUT 7
OUTPUT 7 LINE
OUTPUT 8 LINE
N/C
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT 10
OUTPUT 10 LINE
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 11 LINE
OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 12 LINE
OUTPUT 15 LINE
OUTPUT 14
OUTPUT 15
OUTPUT 16
OUTPUT 16 LINE
N/C
N/C
OUTPUT 13
OUTPUT 13 LINE
OUTPUT 14 LINE
N/C
OUTPUT 9
OUTPUT 9 LINE
N/C
N/C
N/C
493
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Connectivity Compatibility
Each output point must be fused with an external fuse. The
recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse (Part # 043502405), or any other fuse
with an I2T rating of less than 87.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
494
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4 Module (140 DAO 842 10)
Overview
The AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4 module switches 100 ... 230 Vac powered loads.
495
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the 100 ... 230 VAC OUT module.
Number of Output Points
16 in 4, 4 point groups
LEDs
Active
F
1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status
1 - 4, 5 - 8, 9 - 12, 13 - 16 (Red) - Indicated group has a
blown fuse or no field power
Required Addressing
1 word out
Voltage (rms)
Working
Absolute Maximum
Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
1.5 Vac
5 mA
Each Group
4 A continuous
Per Module *
496
I/O Modules
20-132 V rms
170-253 V rms
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
One Cycle
30 A
45A
Two Cycles
20 A
30 A
Three Cycles
10 A
25 A
Applied DV / DT
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
RC snubber suppression
Isolation (rms)
Group to Group
Output to Bus
Fault Detection
350 mA
Power Dissipation
Fusing
Internal
I/O Modules
External
User discretion
WARNING
Possible injury to personnel or equipment
First turn off the power to the module to remove the field wiring terminal
strip to gain access to the fuses.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe injury or
equipment damage.
Fuse Locations
Figure
The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAO 842 10 module.
140
DDO 842 10
10 80 vdc out
Fuse Locations
Points
1-4
Points
5-8
Points
9-12
498
Points
13-16
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the DAO 842 10 module.
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
GROUP A HOT
10
N/C
12
11
N/C
14
13
N/C
16
15
N/C
18
17
20
19
N/C
22
21
N/C
24
23
N/C
26
25
N/C
28
27
30
29
N/C
32
31
N/C
34
33
N/C
36
35
N/C
38
37
40
39
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
Optional
Fuse
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
GROUP A COMMON
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
GROUP B COMMON
GROUP B HOT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT 10
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 12
GROUP C HOT
GROUP C COMMON
OUTPUT 13
OUTPUT 14
OUTPUT 15
OUTPUT 16
GROUP D HOT
GROUP D COMMON
499
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Power Compatibility
The AC power energizing each group must be from a common, singlephase AC power source.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
CAUTION
Wiring Compatibility
If an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with
the module output, then an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or
equivalent) must be wired in parallel with the switch.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
500
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ... 48 Vac 4x4 Module (140 DAO 842 20)
Overview
The AC Output 24 ... 48 Vac 4x4 module switches 24 ... 48 Vac powered loads.
501
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 24 - 48 VAC OUT module.
Number of Output Points
16 in 4, 4 point groups
LEDs
Active
F
1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status
1 - 4, 5 - 8, 9 - 12, 13 - 16 (Red) - Indicated group has a
blown fuse or no field power
Required Addressing
1 word out
Voltage (rms)
Working
Absolute Maximum
20 ... 56 Vac
63 Vac for 10 s
100 Vac for 1 cycle
111 Vac peak for 1.3 ms
Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
1.5 Vac
5 mA
Each Group
502
4 A continuous
Per Module *
1 mA max
I/O Modules
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20-56 V rms
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
One Cycle
30 A
Two Cycles
20 A
30 A
Three Cycles
10 A
25 A
Applied DV /DT
RC snubber suppression
45 A
Isolation (rms)
Group to Group
Input to Bus
Fault Detection
350 mA
Power Dissipation
20 ... 56 Vac
Fusing
Internal
503
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Possible injury to personnel or equipment
First turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal
strip to gain access to fuses.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Fuse Locations
140
DDO 842 20
10 80 vdc out
Fuse Locations
Points
1-4
Points
5-8
Points
9-12
504
Points
13-16
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
N/C
N/C
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
N/C
N/C
GROUP A HOT
10
N/C
12
11
N/C
14
13
N/C
16
15
N/C
18
17
20
19
N/C
22
21
N/C
24
23
N/C
26
25
N/C
28
27
30
29
N/C
32
31
N/C
34
33
N/C
36
35
N/C
38
37
40
39
OUTPUT
GROUP A COMMON
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
GROUP B COMMON
GROUP B HOT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT 10
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 12
GROUP C HOT
GROUP C COMMON
OUTPUT 13
OUTPUT 14
OUTPUT 15
OUTPUT 16
GROUP D HOT
GROUP D COMMON
505
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Power Compatibility
The AC power energizing each group must be from a common, singlephase AC power source.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
CAUTION
Wiring Compatibility
If an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with
the module output, then an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or
equivalent) must be wired in parallel with the switch.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
506
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O AC Output 230 Vac 4x8 Module (140 DAO 853 00)
Overview
The AC Output 230 Vac 4x8 module accepts 230 Vac powered loads.
507
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 230 VAC OUT module.
Number of Output Points
LEDs
Active
1 - 32 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 words out
Absolute Maximum
Frequency
47 ... 63 Hz
1.5 Vac
30 mA
Each Group
4 A max
Per module
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NO POINT
EXCEEDS 1.0A
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
508
I/O Modules
30 A per point
Two Cycles
20 A per point
Three Cycles
10 A per point
Applied DV/DT
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
RC snubber protection
Isolation (rms)
Group to Group
Output to Bus
320 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
Not required
Fusing
Internal
External
509
I/O Modules
Fuse Locations
Figure
The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAO 853 00 module.
140
DDO 853 00
10 80 vdc out
Fuse Locations
Points
1-8
Points
9-16
Points
17-24
510
Points
25-32
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 1
4
6
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 7
OUTPUT 8
N/C
GROUP A HOT
OUTPUT 10
OUTPUT 9
OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 13
OUTPUT 14
OUTPUT 15
OUTPUT 16
GROUP B HOT
N/C
OUTPUT 17
OUTPUT 20
OUTPUT 22
OUTPUT 24
OUTPUT 28
OUTPUT 30
OUTPUT 32
OUTPUT 21
N/C
OUTPUT 25
OUTPUT 27
OUTPUT 29
OUTPUT 31
GROUP D HOT
OUTPUT 19
OUTPUT 23
GROUP C HOT
OUTPUT 26
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 18
N
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
N/C
511
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Power Compatibility
The AC power energizing each group must be from a common, singlephase AC power source.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
CAUTION
Wiring Compatibility
If an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with
the module output, then an external varistor (Harris V390ZA05 or
equivalent) must be wired in parallel with the switch.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
512
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O DC Input 5 V TTL 4x8 Source Module (140 DDI 153 10)
Overview
The DC Input 5 V TTL 4x8 Source module accepts 5 Vdc inputs, and is for use with
sink output devices and is compatible with LS, S, TTL, and CMOS logic.
513
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 5 V TTL IN module.
Number of Input Points
LEDs
32 in 4, 8 point groups
Active
1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 words in
Input Ratings
ON Level
OFF Level
OFF Leakage
7.5 k
5.5 Vdc
1.3 ms
Response
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
Input Protection
Resistor limited
Isolation
Group to Group
Group to Bus
Fault Detection
None
170 mA
Power Dissipation
5W
Module Supply
150 mA
Fusing
Internal
514
None
External
User discretion
I/O Modules
Logic States
Table
The following tables shows the logic states for the DDI 153 10 module.
Input Voltage
Input State
ON
LED
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
515
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
N/C
GROUP A POWER
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
GROUP B POWER
N/C
INPUT 17
INPUT 20
INPUT 22
INPUT 24
INPUT 28
INPUT 30
INPUT 32
INPUT 19
INPUT 21
INPUT 23
GROUP C POWER
INPUT 26
Open Collector
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
INPUT 18
TTL
INPUT 1
N/C
INPUT 25
INPUT 27
INPUT 29
INPUT 31
GROUP D POWER
N/C
+
516
US
5 Vdc
-
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vac 4x8 Sink Module (140 DDI 353 00)
Overview
The DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink module accepts 24 Vdc inputs and is for use with
source output devices.
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 24 VDC IN module.
Number of Input Points
32 in 4, 8 point groups
LEDs
Active
1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 words in
OFF (voltage)
-3 ... +5 Vdc
ON (current)
2.0 mA min
OFF (current)
0.5 mA max
30 Vdc
1.3 ms
Response
OFF - ON
1 ms (max)
ON - OFF
1 ms (max)
Internal Resistance
2.5 k
Input Protection
Resistor limited
Isolation
Group to Group
Group to Bus
Fault Detection
None
330 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
Internal
None
External
User discretion
517
I/O Modules
518
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
INPUT 2
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
INPUT 4
INPUT 6
INPUT 8
N/C
INPUT 10
INPUT 12
INPUT 14
INPUT 16
N/C
INPUT 18
INPUT 20
INPUT 22
INPUT 24
N/C
INPUT 26
INPUT 28
INPUT 30
INPUT 32
N/C
INPUT 1
INPUT 3
INPUT 5
INPUT 7
GROUP A COMMON
INPUT 9
INPUT 11
INPUT 13
FIELD DEVICE
INPUT 15
GROUP B COMMON
INPUT 17
INPUT 19
INPUT 21
INPUT 23
GROUP C COMMON
INPUT 25
INPUT 27
INPUT 29
INPUT 31
GROUP D COMMON
519
I/O Modules
520
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Input Module (140 DDI 353 10)
Overview
The 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Input module accepts 24 Vdc inputs and is for use with
sink output devices.
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 24 VDC IN SOURCE module.
Number of Output Points
LEDs
Active
1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 words in
Voltage
ON (Voltage)
OFF (Voltage)
ON (Current)
2 mA min; 14 mA max
OFF (Current)
0.5 mA max
30 Vdc
1.0 ms
1 ms (max)
ON - OFF
1 ms (max)
Fault Detection
None
Isolation
Group to Group
Output to Bus
Internal Resistance
2.4 k
Input Protection
Resistor limited
330 mA max
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
Internal
None
External
User discretion
521
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
INPUT 2
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
GROUP C SUPPLY
30
29
INPUT 26
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
INPUT 4
INPUT 6
INPUT 8
GROUP A SUPPLY
INPUT 10
INPUT 12
INPUT 14
INPUT 16
GROUP B SUPPLY
INPUT 18
INPUT 20
INPUT 22
INPUT 24
INPUT 28
INPUT 30
INPUT 32
GROUP D SUPPLY
522
INPUT 1
INPUT 3
INPUT 5
INPUT 7
N/C
INPUT 9
INPUT 11
FIELD DEVICE
INPUT 13
INPUT 15
N/C
INPUT 17
INPUT 19
INPUT 21
INPUT 23
N/C
INPUT 25
INPUT 27
INPUT 29
INPUT 31
N/C
I/O Modules
523
I/O Modules
Specifications
96 in six 16 groups
LEDs
ACT (green)
+32 (green)
+ 64 (green)
Required addressing
1 ... 32 (green)
6 words in
+15 VDC
ON (current)
2.5 mA minimum
OFF (voltage)
+5VDC
OFF (current)
0.7 mA
30 VDC
1.0 ms
50 VDC
2.0 ms maximum
ON - OFF
3.0 ms maximum
Internal resistance
6.7 KW
Input protection
Resistor limited
Isolation
Group to group
Bus current required
270 mA
Power dissipation
External power
Fusing
524
I/O Modules
525
I/O Modules
526
The front view of the 140 DDI 364 00 input module including terminal assignment
I/O Modules
numbers:
140
DDI 364 00
24 VDC IN
+32
+64
Act
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
D
I49
I51
I53
I55
I57
I59
I61
I63
NC
NC
A
I50
I52
I54
I56
I58
I60
I62
I64
COM
COM
I01
I03
I05
I07
I09
I11
I13
I15
NC
NC
I02
I04
I06
I08
I10
I12
I14
I16
COM
COM
I66
I68
I70
I72
I74
I76
I78
I80
COM
COM
I17
I19
I21
I23
I25
I27
I29
I31
NC
NC
I18
I20
I22
I24
I26
I28
I30
I32
COM
COM
I82
I84
I86
I88
I90
I92
I94
I96
COM
COM
I33
I35
I37
I39
I41
I43
I45
I47
NC
NC
I34
I36
I38
I40
I42
I44
I46
I48
COM
COM
E
I65
I67
I69
I71
I73
I75
I77
I79
NC
NC
F
I81
I83
I85
I87
I89
I91
I93
I95
NC
NC
Pushbutton
527
I/O Modules
Selecting Point
Status Indicator
LEDs
+64
Inputs 1 to 32
OFF
OFF
Inputs 33 to 64
ON
OFF
Inputs 65 to 96
Recommended
Cables
LED
OFF
ON
white
brown
green
yellow
pink
blue
red
black
10
purple
11
gray/pink
12
red/blue
13
white/green
14
brown/green
15
white/yellow
16
yellow/brown
17
white/gray
18
gray/brown
19
528
gray
white/pink
20
pink/brown
I/O Modules
DC Input 125 Vdc 3x8 Sink Module (140 DDI 673 00)
Overview
The DC Input 125 VDC 3x8 Sink module accepts 125 Vdc inputs and is for use with
source output devices. The module has software-selectable response time to
provide additional input filtering.
529
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the DDI 673 00 125 VDC IN module.
Number of Input Points
LEDs
24 in 3, 8 point groups
Active
1 ... 24 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 words in
OFF (voltage)
ON (current)
2.0 mA min
OFF (current)
0.5 mA max
0.7 ms
Non-default Filter
1.5 ms
Internal Resistance
OFF State
ON State
Input Protection
Resistor limited
Isolation
Group to Bus
Group to Group
Fault Detection
None
200 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
Internal
External
530
None
User discretion
I/O Modules
ON per Group
Number of Points
Operating Curve
Figure
8
7
Operating Voltages
125 Vdc
>140 Vdc
5
4
40
50
60
30
Ambient Temperature (_C)
Note: The following information baselines minimum version levels that will support
this module.
531
I/O Modules
Minimum
Version Levels
Table
The following table shows the minimum version level for the module products.
Products
< V02.20
V02.20
None
RIOs
< V02.00
Module upgrade
< V02.10
Module upgrade
None
< V02.40
Upgrade to V02.40
V02.40
Modsoft
None
V02.10
DIOs
> V02.20
None
CAUTION
Software compatibility
When using a DIO drop and the CPU and the NOM executive software
is not per the compatibility chart, channels 17 ... 24 of this module will
be seen as zeroes in the controller when configured as discretes.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
532
I/O Modules
Version Label
Figure
CPU 2M
2XMB+
02.20
140
CPU 424 02
Controller
Note: The version label is found on the top front of the module.
533
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
N/C
10
N/C
12
11
N/C
N/C
14
13
N/C
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
N/C
26
25
N/C
N/C
28
27
N/C
N/C
30
29
N/C
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
INPUT 4
INPUT 6
INPUT 8
INPUT 10
INPUT 12
INPUT 3
INPUT 5
INPUT 7
GROUP A COMMON
INPUT9
FIELD DEVICE
INPUT 11
GROUP B COMMON
N/C
INPUT 14
INPUT 16
INPUT 18
INPUT 20
INPUT 22
INPUT 24
N/C
534
INPUT13
INPUT15
INPUT 17
INPUT 19
INPUT 21
INPUT 23
GROUP C COMMON
I/O Modules
535
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink Module (140 DDI 841 00)
Overview
536
The DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink module accepts 10 ... 60 Vdc inputs and is for
use with source output devices. ON-OFF levels are dependent on the reference
voltage selected. Different reference voltages may be used for different groups.
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 10-60 VDC IN module.
Number of Input Points
16 in 8, 2 point groups
LEDs
Active
1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
1 word in
ON State*
OFF State*
12 Vdc / +/-5%
9 ... 12
11 ... 24
34 ... 48
45 ... 60
75 Vdc
5 ... 10 mA
@ 24 Vdc
6 ... 30 mA
@ 48 Vdc
2 ... 15 mA
@ 60 Vdc
1 ... 5 mA
Response
OFF - ON
4 ms
ON - OFF
4 ms
Switching Frequency
<100 Hz
Input Protection
Resistor limited
Isolation
Group to Group
Group to Bus
200 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
Internal
External
None
User discretion
537
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
+
INPUT 2
GROUP A SUPPLY
INPUT 4
GROUP B SUPPLY
N/C
INPUT 6
GROUP C SUPPLY
INPUT 8
GROUP D SUPPLY
N/C
INPUT 10
GROUP E SUPPLY
INPUT 12
GROUP F SUPPLY
N/C
INPUT 14
GROUP G SUPPLY
INPUT 16
GROUP H SUPPLY
N/C
538
GROUP A COMMON
GROUP B COMMON
10
N/C
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
GROUP F COMMON
30
29
N/C
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
INPUT 1
INPUT 3
FIELD DEVICE
INPUT 5
GROUP C COMMON
INPUT 7
GROUP D COMMON
N/C
INPUT 9
GROUP E COMMON
INPUT 11
INPUT 13
GROUP G COMMON
INPUT 15
GROUP H COMMON
N/C
I/O Modules
539
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module (140 DDI 853 00)
Overview
540
The DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink module accepts 10 ... 60 Vdc inputs and is for
use with source output devices. ON-OFF levels are dependent on the reference
voltage selected. Different reference voltages may be used for different groups.
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 10-60 VDC IN module.
Number of Input Points
32 in 4, 8 point groups
LEDs
Active
1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 Words In
ON State *
OFF State *
12 Vdc / +/- 5%
9 ... 12
11 ... 24
34 ... 48
45 ... 60
75 Vdc
5 ... 10 mA
@ 24 Vdc
6 ... 30 mA
@ 48 Vdc
2 ... 15 mA
@ 60 Vdc
1 ... 5 mA
Response
OFF - ON
4 ms
ON - OFF
4 ms
Switching Frequency
<100 Hz max
Input Protection
Resistor limited
Isolation
Group to Group
Group to Bus
Fault Detection
None
300 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
Internal
External
None
User discretion
541
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
+
INPUT 2
INPUT 4
INPUT 6
INPUT 8
GROUP A SUPPLY
INPUT 10
INPUT 12
INPUT 14
INPUT 16
GROUP B SUPPLY
INPUT 18
INPUT 20
INPUT 22
INPUT 24
GROUP C SUPPLY
INPUT 26
INPUT 28
INPUT 30
INPUT 32
GROUP D SUPPLY
542
INPUT3
INPUT5
INPUT 7
10
12
11
INPUT 9
14
13
INPUT 11
16
15
INPUT 1
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
INPUT 13
FIELD DEVICE
INPUT 15
25
28
GROUP A COMMON
GROUP B COMMON
INPUT 17
INPUT 19
INPUT 21
INPUT 23
GROUP C COMMON
INPUT 25
INPUT 27
INPUT 29
INPUT 31
GROUP D COMMON
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink / DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source Module
(140 DDM 390 00)
Overview
The DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink / DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source module accepts and
switches 24 Vdc inputs/outputs and is for use with sink input and source output
devices.
543
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 24 VDC IN/OUT module.
Topology
Number of Input Points
16 in 2, 8 point groups
8 in 2, 4 point groups
LEDs
Active
F (red) - No power applied to the group(s) or blown
fuse
1 ... 16 (Green - right two columns) - Indicates input
status
1 ... 8 (Green - left column) - Indicates output status
Required Addressing
Input Specifications
Operating Voltages and Currents (Input)
ON (voltage)
OFF (voltage)
-3 ... +5 Vdc
ON (current)
2.0 mA min
OFF (current)
0.5 mA max
30 Vdc
1.3 ms
2.5 k
Output Specifications
Voltage (Output)
Operating (max)
Absolute (max)
0.5 A
Each Group
2A
Per Module
4A
0.4 mA @ 30 Vdc
544
I/O Modules
I F
where: L = Load Inductance (Henry). I = Load
Current (A). F= Switching Frequency (Hz)
Load Capacitance Maximum
50 micro f
Common Specifications
Response (Input and Output)
OFF - ON
ON - OFF
Module Protection
Input Protection
Resistor limited
Output Protection
Group to Bus
Fault Detection
Input
None
Output
330 mA
Power Dissipation
Fusing
Input
Output
545
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Possible injury to personnel or equipment.
Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip
to gain access to fuses.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
546
I/O Modules
Fuse Location
Figure
The following figure shows the fuse locations of the DDM 390 00 module.
140
DDM 390 00
10 80 vdc out
Fuse Locations
Points
1-4
Points
5-8
Note: If the 140 DDM 390 00 module is used in an RIO drop, the 140 CRA 93X 00
RIO Drop must be Version 1.04 at a minimum. Check the version label (see figure)
on the top front of the 140 CRA 93X 00 module and ensure that it is at the proper
revision level.
547
I/O Modules
Version label
Figure
548
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
10
12
11
N/C
14
16
15
N/C
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
N/C
30
29
INPUT 10
32
31
34
33
INPUT 14
36
35
INPUT 16
38
37
N/C
40
13
N/C
1.25 A
OUTPUT 2
N/C
OUTPUT 1
39
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
1.25 A
INPUT 2
INPUT 4
INPUT 6
INPUT 8
INPUT 12
INPUT 9
INPUT 11
INPUT 13
INPUT15
INPUT GROUP B COMMON
549
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Possible Equipment Failure
Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from
catastrophic failure. The group fuse will not be guaranteed to protect
each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is
recommended that each point be fused with a 1.25 A fuse, Part #
043508930 (Littlefuse 3121.25, 1.25 A, 250 V).
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
550
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O 125 VDC Input/High Power Output Module (140 DDM 690 00)
Overview
The 125 VDC Input/High Power Output module provides four isolated outputs and
four grouped inputs. The outputs switch 24 to 125 Vdc powered loads and are for
use with sink and source devices. The outputs also have short-circuit sense,
indication, and shutdown circuitry. The inputs accept 125 Vdc inputs and are for use
with source output devices. The inputs have software-selectable response times to
provide additional input filtering.
551
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 125 VDC IN/OUT HP module.
Topology
Number of Input Points
4 in 1 group
4 isolated
LEDs
Active
F (red) - Over current condition on any point
1 ... 4 (Green - left column) - Indicated output point is turned
ON
1 ... 4 (Red - middle column) - Indicated output point has an
over current condition
1 ... 4 (Green - right column) - Indicated input point is turned
ON
Required Addressing
Input Specifications
Operating Voltages and Currents (Input)
ON (voltage)
OFF (voltage)
ON (current)
2.0 mA min
OFF (current)
1.2 mA max
Input Response
(OFF-ON, ON-OFF)
24 k (nominal)
Output Specifications
Voltage (Output)
Operating (max)
0.75 Vdc @ 4 A
4 A continuous
Per Module
552
I/O Modules
16 A
8A
30
40
50
60
Ambient Temperature (_C)
30 A @ 500 ms duration
I F
where: L = Load Inductance (Henry). I = Load Current (A). F =
Switching Frequency (Hz)
Load Capacitance
Maximum
Common Specifications
Module Protection
Input Protection
Resistor limited
Output Protection
Output-to-Output
Group to Bus
Fault Detection
Input
None
Output
350 mA
553
I/O Modules
Power Dissipation
Fusing
Input
Internal - None
External - User discretion
Output
Note: To clear a fault condition, the point must be commanded OFF as follows:
l If the point is not in fast trip mode, this is done by setting the output command
bit to "point OFF."
l If the point is in fast trip mode, the fast trip must be disabled and then the point
commanded OFF by setting the output command bit to "point OFF."
Note: The following information baselines minimum version levels that will support
this module.
554
I/O Modules
Version Levels
Table
The following table shows the version levels for the module types.
Products
< V02.20
V02.20
None
RIOs
< V02.00
Module upgrade
Module upgrade
V02.10
Modsoft
None
< V02.10
DIOs
V02.20
None
< V02.40
Upgrade to V02.40
V02.40
None
Note: The version label, see figure, is found on the top front of the module.
Version Label
Figure
CPU 2M
2XMB+
02.20
140
CPU 424 02
Controller
555
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 1 (-
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
10
N/C
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
N/C
20
19
N/C
N/C
22
21
N/C
N/C
24
23
N/C
26
25
28
27
OUTPUT 4 (-
30
29
N/C
32
31
34
33
36
35
N/C
N/C
38
37
N/C
N/C
40
39
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 4
N/C
125 VDC INPUT 2
125 VDC INPUT 4
556
OUTPUT 2 (OUTPUT 2 (-
OUTPUT 3 (-
+
OUTPUT Sinking
OUTPUT 3 (-
OUTPUT 4 (-
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Polarity awareness
The output points are not protected against reverse polarity. Reverse
polarity will turn an output point ON.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Note: 1. Each output has two terminals for multiple wire connections. 2. N / C =
Not Connected.
557
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O DC Output 5 V TTL 4x8 Sink Module (140 DDO 153 10)
Overview
558
The DC Output 5 V TTL 4x8 Sink module switches 5 Vdc loads and is for use with
source devices and is compatible with LS, S, TTL, and CMOS logic.
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 5 V TTL OUT module.
Number of Output Points
LEDs
32 in 4, 8 point groups
Active
F
1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 words out
Output Ratings
ON Level
OFF Level
440 ohms
75 mA (sinking)
Each Group
600 mA
Per Module
2.4 A
ON - OFF
Isolation
Group to Group
Output to Bus
Fault Detection
350 mA
Power Dissipation
4W
Fusing
Internal
External
559
I/O Modules
Module States
Table
The following table shows the module states for the DDO 153 10 module.
External Power
Command
Active
Output
LED
Fault
ON
OFF
ON
>3.2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
<0.2
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
CAUTION
Possible danger to equipment or personnel.
Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip
to gain access to fuses.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Fuse Locations
Figure
The following figure shows the locations of the fuses for the DDO 153 10 module.
140
DDO 153 10
5 vdc out
Fuse Locations
Points
1-8
Points
9-16
Points
17-24
560
Points
25-32
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 8
GROUP A SUPPLY
OUTPUT 10
OUTPUT 12
OUTPUT 14
OUTPUT 16
GROUP B SUPPLY
OUTPUT 18
OUTPUT 20
OUTPUT 22
OUTPUT 24
GROUP C SUPPLY
OUTPUT 26
OUTPUT 28
OUTPUT 30
OUTPUT 32
GROUP D SUPPLY
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 7
10
GROUP A COMMON
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
TTL Inverter
OUTPUT 9
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 13
OUTPUT 15
GROUP B COMMON
OUTPUT 17
OUTPUT 19
OUTPUT 21
OUTPUT 23
GROUP C COMMON
OUTPUT 25
OUTPUT 27
OUTPUT 29
OUTPUT 31
GROUP D COMMON
+
US
5 Vdc
561
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source Module (140 DDO 353 00)
Overview
562
The DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source module switches 24 Vdc powered loads and is
for use with sink devices.
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 24 VDC OUT module.
Number of Output Points
32 in 4, 8 point groups
LEDs
Active
F
1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 words out
Voltage
Operating (max)
Absolute (max)
0.5 A
Each Group
4A
Per Module
16 A
0.4 mA @ 30 Vdc
1 ms (max)
ON - OFF
1 ms (max)
50 micro f
Isolation
Group to Group
Output to Bus
330 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
Fault Detection
I/O Modules
Fusing
Internal
External
CAUTION
Possible danger to equipment or personnel.
Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip
to gain access to fuses.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Fuse Locations
Figure
The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DDO 353 00 module.
140
DDO 353 10
24 vdc out
Fuse Locations
Points
1-8
Points
9-16
Points
17-24
564
Points
25-32
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT 7
GROUP A SUPPLY
10
GROUP A COMMON
OUTPUT 10
12
11
OUTPUT 9
OUTPUT 12
14
13
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 14
16
15
OUTPUT 16
18
17
OUTPUT 15
20
19
GROUP B COMMON
OUTPUT 18
22
21
OUTPUT 17
OUTPUT 20
24
23
OUTPUT 19
OUTPUT 22
26
25
OUTPUT 21
OUTPUT 24
28
27
OUTPUT 23
GROUP C SUPPLY
30
29
GROUP C COMMON
OUTPUT 26
32
31
OUTPUT 25
OUTPUT 28
34
33
OUTPUT 27
OUTPUT 30
36
35
OUTPUT 29
OUTPUT 32
38
37
OUTPUT 31
40
39
3/4 A
3/4 A
GROUP B SUPPLY
OUTPUT 13
GROUP D SUPPLY
FIELD
DEVICE
GROUP D COMMON
565
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Possible Equipment Failure
Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from
catastrophic failure. The group fuse will not be guaranteed to protect
each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is
recommended that each point be protected with a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse
(Part # 57-0078-000).
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
566
I/O Modules
The 140 DDO 353 01 source module switches 24 Vdc powered loads, and is short
circuit and overload resistant.
567
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 24 VDC OUT module.
Number of Output Points
LEDs
Required Addressing
2 words out
Voltage
Operating
0.5 A
Each Group
4A
Per Module
16 A
<1 mA @ 24 Vdc
2 A (Internally limited)
<.1 ms
ON - OFF
<.1 ms
L=
0.5
l2 F
Load Capacitance Maximum
50 mF
Isolation
Group to Group
Output to Bus
Fault Detection
250 mA max.
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
Internal
568
I/O Modules
External
User discretion
CAUTION
Possible danger to equipment or personnel.
Disconnect the supply voltage to the module and remove the field wiring
terminal strip to gain access to fuses.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Fuse Locations
Figure
The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DDO 353 00 module.
140
DDO 353 10
24 vdc out
Fuse Locations
Points
1-8
Points
9-16
Points
17-24
Points
25-32
569
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT 7
GROUP A SUPPLY
10
GROUP A COMMON
OUTPUT 10
12
11
OUTPUT 9
OUTPUT 12
14
13
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 14
16
15
OUTPUT 16
18
17
OUTPUT 15
20
19
GROUP B COMMON
OUTPUT 18
22
21
OUTPUT 17
OUTPUT 20
24
23
OUTPUT 19
OUTPUT 22
26
25
OUTPUT 21
OUTPUT 24
28
27
OUTPUT 23
GROUP C SUPPLY
30
29
GROUP C COMMON
OUTPUT 26
32
31
OUTPUT 25
OUTPUT 28
34
33
OUTPUT 27
OUTPUT 30
36
35
OUTPUT 29
OUTPUT 32
38
37
OUTPUT 31
40
39
3/4 A
3/4 A
GROUP B SUPPLY
OUTPUT 13
GROUP D SUPPLY
570
FIELD
DEVICE
GROUP D COMMON
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Possible Equipment Failure
Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from
catastrophic failure.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
571
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Output Module (140 DDO 353 10)
Overview
572
The 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Output module switches 24 Vdc loads capable of driving
displays, logic, and other loads up to 500 mA sinking, in the ON state.
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the DDO 353 10 24 VDC OUT SINK
module.
Number of Output Points
LEDs
Active
F
1 ... 32 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
2 words out
Voltage
Operating (max)
1.0 ms
0.5 A
Each Group
4A
Per Module
16 A
0.4 mA @ 30 Vdc
1 ms (max)
ON - OFF
1 ms (max)
Fault Detection
Isolation
Group to Group
Output to Bus
I2 F
12 W @ 24 Vdc
330 mA max
Power Dissipation
50 micro f
573
I/O Modules
External Power
Fusing
Internal
External
CAUTION
Possible danger to equipment or personnel.
Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip
to gain access to fuses.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Fuses Location
Figure
The following figure shows the locations of the fuses for the DDO 353 10 module.
140
DDO 353 10
vdc out
Fuse Locations
Points
1-8
Points
9-16
Points
17-24
574
Points
25-32
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
OUTPUT 2
-24 Vdc
OUTPUT 1
1A
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT 7
GROUP A SUPPLY
10
GROUP A COMMON
OUTPUT 10
12
11
OUTPUT 9
OUTPUT 12
14
13
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 14
16
15
OUTPUT 16
18
17
OUTPUT 15
20
19
GROUP B COMMON
OUTPUT 18
22
21
OUTPUT 17
OUTPUT 20
24
23
OUTPUT 19
OUTPUT 22
26
25
OUTPUT 21
OUTPUT 24
28
27
OUTPUT 23
GROUP C SUPPLY
30
29
GROUP C COMMON
1A
OUTPUT 26
32
31
OUTPUT 25
OUTPUT 28
34
33
OUTPUT 27
OUTPUT 30
36
35
OUTPUT 29
OUTPUT 32
38
37
OUTPUT 31
40
39
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 6
1A
GROUP B SUPPLY
GROUP D SUPPLY
OUTPUT 13
FIELD
DEVICE
GROUP D COMMON
575
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Possible Equipment Failure
Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from
catastrophic failure. The group fuse will not be guaranteed to protect
each output switch for all possible overload conditions. It is
recommended that each point be fused with a 3/4 A, 250 V fuse Part #
57-0078-000.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
576
I/O Modules
Quantum 24VDC 6X16 Telefast Output Module (140 DDO 364 00)
Overview
The 140 DDO 364 00 module switches 24Vdc powered loads. Outputs are thermally
protected.
577
I/O Modules
Specifications
LEDs
Required Addressing
6 words out
Voltage
Operating
0.5 A
Each Group
3.2 A
Per Module
19.2 A
<1 mA @ 24 Vdc
2 A (Internally limited)
<.1 ms
ON - OFF
<.1 ms
0.5
l2 F
L=
50 mF
Isolation
Output to Bus
Fault Detection
250 mA max.
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
578
I/O Modules
External
579
I/O Modules
580
I/O Modules
The front view of the 140 DDO 364 00 output module including terminal assignment
581
I/O Modules
numbers:
140
DDO 364 00
24 VDC OUT
Input Indicator
+32
+64
Act
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
D
049
051
053
055
057
059
061
063
+24V
+24V
A
050
052
054
056
058
060
062
064
COM
COM
001
003
005
007
009
011
013
015
+24V
+24V
002
004
006
008
010
012
014
016
COM
COM
066
068
070
072
074
076
078
080
COM
COM
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
+24V
+24V
018
020
022
024
026
028
030
032
COM
COM
082
084
086
088
090
092
094
096
COM
COM
033
035
037
039
041
043
045
047
+24V
+24V
034
036
038
040
042
044
046
048
COM
COM
E
065
067
069
071
073
075
077
079
+24V
+24V
F
081
083
085
087
089
091
093
095
+24V
+24V
582
Pushbutton
I/O Modules
Use the pushbutton to select output points to be displayed as per thw following table:
LED
+32
+64
Out 1 to 32
Off
Off
Out 33 to 64
On
Off
Out 65 to 96
Off
On
Recommended cables:
TSX CDP X01
TSX CDP XX3
The following table shows the color codes for all groups:
1. White
2. Brown
3. Green
4. Yellow
5. Gray
6. Pink
7. Blue
8. Red
9. Black
10. Purple
11. Gray/pink
12 Red/blue
13. White/green
14. Brown/green
15. White/yellow
18. Gray/brown
19. White/pink
16. Yellow/brown
17. White/gray
20. Pink/brown
583
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O DC Output 10 ... 60 Vdc 2x8 Source Module (140 DDO 843 00)
Overview
584
The DC Output 10 ... 60 Vdc 2x8 Source module switches 10 ... 60 Vdc powered
loads and is for use with sink devices. External power supplies may be mixed
between groups.
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 10 ... 60 VDC OUT module.
Number of Output Points
16 in 2, 8 point groups
LEDs
Active
1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
1 word out
Voltage
Operating
Absolute Maximum
72 Vdc (continuous)
1 V max @ 2 A
2A
Each Group
6A
Per Module
12 A
1 mA @ 60 Vdc max
1 ms
ON - OFF
1 ms
Isolation
Group to Group
Group to Bus
160 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
10 ... 60 Vdc
Fusing
Internal
External
585
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Possible danger to equipment or personnel.
Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip
to gain access to fuses.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Fuse Locations
Figure
The following figure shows fuse locations for the DDO 843 00 module.
140
DDO 353 00
vdc out
Fuse Locations
Points
1-8
Points
9-16
586
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
OUTPUT 1
2A
N/C
N/C
OUTPUT 3
N/C
OUTPUT 4
N/C
10
GROUP A SUPPLY
N/C
12
11
OUTPUT 5
N/C
14
13
OUTPUT 6
N/C
16
15
N/C
18
17
OUTPUT 8
N/C
20
19
GROUP A COMMON
N/C
22
21
OUTPUT 9
N/C
24
23
OUTPUT 10
N/C
26
25
OUTPUT 11
N/C
28
27
OUTPUT 12
N/C
30
29
OUTPUT 2
N/C
2A
OUTPUT 7
GROUP B SUPPLY
587
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O DC Output 24 - 125 Vdc 2x6 Source Module (140 DDO 885 00)
Overview
588
The DC Output 24 125 Vdc 2x6 Source module switches 24 125 VDC powered
loads and is for use with sink devices.
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the 24-125 VDC OUT module.
Number of Output Points
12 in 2, 6 point groups
LEDs
Active
F (Red) - An over current condition on any point has
been detected
1 - 12 (Green) - The indicated point or channel is
turned ON
1 - 12 (Red) - The indicated output point has an over
current condition
Required Addressing
1 word in
1 word out
Voltages
Working
0.75 @ 0.5 A
Each Group
3 A, 0 ... 60 degrees C
Per Module
6 A, 0 ... 60 degrees C
Maximum
Tungsten
46 W per point
@ 115 Vdc
41 W per point
@ 24 Vdc
@ 130 Vdc
8 W per point
589
I/O Modules
The following figure shows the DDO 885 00 Output Point Operating Curve.
DDO 885 00 Output Point Operating Curve
0.75
0.625
0.5
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
Switching Frequency
50 Hz maximum
Group varistor
and individual
point over
current sense
Output
Protection
(internal)
Field to Bus
Field to Bus
Group-toGroup
Group-toGroup
Group varistor
and individual
point over
current sense
Output
Protection
(internal)
Field to Bus
Group-to-Group
Fault Detection
Over current
Fault Detection
(see note below)
Output Protection
(internal)
Isolation
Isolation
Isolation
Over current
Fault Detection
(see note below)
Bus Current
Required
6 points ON
375 mA
6 points ON
375 mA
6 points ON
12 points ON
650 mA
12 points ON
650 mA
12 points ON
Power Dissipation
External Power
None
None
Fusing
590
External Power
Fusing
External Power
Fusing
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
I/O Modules
Internal
4 A (Part #
043511382 or
equivalent) See
below for the
location of the
fuses.
Internal
4 A (Part #
043511382 or
equivalent) See
below for the
location of the
fuses.
Internal
External
External
External
Note: Each output point is protected by an over current sense circuit. When an
over current condition is detected, the point is turned OFF, its LED fault indicator is
turned ON, and the appropriate bit is set in the module fault register.
The output point will be turned OFF after a short is detected. A fault greater than
9.4 A will guarantee that the point will be turned OFF and will latch the output point
in the OFF state. To clear a fault, the point must be commanded OFF in user logic.
CAUTION
Possible danger to equipment or personnel.
Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip
to gain access to fuses.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
591
I/O Modules
Fuse Locations
Figure
The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DDO 885 00 module.
140
DDO 885 00
vdc out
Fuse Locations
Points
1-6
Points
7-12
592
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
N/C
N/C
N/C
OUTPUT2
N/C
OUTPUT 3
10
N/C
12
11
OUTPUT 4
N/C
14
13
N/C
N/C
16
15
N/C
18
17
N/C
20
19
N/C
22
21
N/C
24
23
N/C
26
25
N/C
28
27
30
29
N/C
32
31
OUTPUT 10
N/C
34
33
N/C
N/C
36
35
N/C
38
37
N/C
40
39
GROUP A SUPPLY
GROUP A
GROUP B
GROUP A RETURN
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 6
N/C
OUTPUT 7
N/C
OUTPUT 8
+
GROUP B SUPPLY
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 9
GROUP B RETURN
FIELD
DEVICE
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 12
N/C
593
I/O Modules
CAUTION
Reverse Polarity Possibility
This module is not protected against reverse polarity. If you want to
protect against polarity miswiring, an external diode in series with each
group supply line is recommended. This diode must be able to support
the group load current.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
594
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open Module (140 DRA 840 00)
Overview
The Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open module is used to switch a voltage source
using 16 relays with normally open contacts.
595
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the RELAY OUT module.
Number of Output Points
16 normally open
LEDs
Active
... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
1 word out
Voltage
Working
5
30
50 mA
Note:
Minimum load current if the contact is used at rated loads of 5
... 30 Vdc or 20 ... 250 Vac
Each Point
10 A capacitive load @ t = 10 ms
Switching Capability
Response
OFF - ON
10 ms max
ON - OFF
20 ms max
10,000,000
Electrical Operations
Electrical Operations
(30 ... 150 Vdc)
(see note below)
596
I/O Modules
Relay Type
Form A
Contact Protection
Isolation
Channel to Channel
Field to Bus
1100 mA
2500
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
Internal
None
External
User discretion
Note: Relay contact life for inductive loads may be significantly increased by using
external contact protection such as a clamping diode across the load.
597
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
RELAY 1 COMMON
OUTPUT 1
RELAY 2 COMMON
OUTPUT 2
RELAY 3 COMMON
OUTPUT 3
RELAY 4 COMMON
OUTPUT 4
N/C 10
N/C
RELAY 5 COMMON 12
11
OUTPUT 5
RELAY 6 COMMON 14
13
OUTPUT 6
RELAY 7 COMMON 16
15
OUTPUT 7
RELAY 8 COMMON 18
17
20
19
N/C
RELAY 9 COMMON 22
21
OUTPUT 9
RELAY 10 COMMON 24
23
OUTPUT 10
RELAY 11 COMMON 26
25
OUTPUT 11
N/C
RELAY 12 COMMON
28
27
30
See Note 1.
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT X
N.O.
N.O.
OUTPUT 12
29
N/C
RELAY 13 COMMON 32
31
OUTPUT 13
RELAY 14 COMMON 34
33
N/C
RELAY 15 COMMON
36
35
RELAY 16 COMMON 38
37
40
39
N/C
598
VOLTAGE
SOURCE
-
OUTPUT 14
N.C.
RELAY X
COMMON
One of 16 Typical
OUTPUT 15
OUTPUT 16
N/C
I/O Modules
599
I/O Modules
Quantum I/O Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open / Normally Closed (140 DRC 830
00)
Overview
600
The Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open / Normally Closed module is used to switch a
voltage source using eight relays with normally open and normally closed contacts.
I/O Modules
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the RELAY OUT module.
Number of Output Points
LEDs
Active
1 ... 8 (Green) - Indicates point status
Required Addressing
Voltage
Working
300 mA resistive
100 mA (L/R = 10 msec)
TOTAL MODULE
CURRENT (A)
50
60
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
(Degrees C)
50 mA
Note: Minimum load current if the contact is used at rated
loads of 5 ... 30 Vdc or 20 ... 250 Vac
30 Hz resistive loads
or
F = 0.5
I2 L
I/O Modules
20 A capacitive load @ t = 10 ms
Switching Capability
10 ms max
ON - OFF
20 ms max
10,000,000
Electrical Operations
Relay Type
Form C, NO / NC contacts
Contact Protection
Isolation
Channel to Channel
Field to Bus
1780 Vac rms for one minute, 2500 Vdc for one minute
560 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
Fusing
Internal
None
External
User discretion
Note: Relay contact life for inductive loads may be significantly increased by using
external contact protection such as a clamping diode across the load.
602
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
Figure
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
N/C
OUTPUT 2
RELAY 2 COMMON
N/C 10
N/C
N/C 12
11
OUTPUT 3
RELAY 3 COMMON 14
13
16
15
RELAY 4 COMMON 18
17
N/C
RELAY 1 COMMON
N/C
See Note 2.
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 4
N/C
20
19
N/C
N/C
22
21
OUTPUT 5
RELAY 5 COMMON 24
23
26
25
RELAY 6 COMMON 28
27
N/C
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 6
N.O.
OUTPUT X
N.O.
OUTPUT 6
N/C
30
29
N/C
N/C
32
31
33
N.C.
OUTPUT 7
OUTPUT X
N.C.
OUTPUT 7
RELAY 7 COMMON 34
N/C
36
35
RELAY 8 COMMON 38
37
40
39
N/C
VOLTAGE
SOURCE
-
RELAY X
COMMON
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT 8
N/C
603
I/O Modules
604
I/O Modules
The 140 DDI 353 00 module is used with source output devices. It accepts 24 Vdc
inputs. It has 32 input points (four groups of 8), and has broken wire detection for
each unit.
605
I/O Modules
Technical
Specifications
LEDs
Active (Green)
1 ... 32 (Green)
F (Red)
Required addressing
4 words in
+Vdc
ON (current)
2.5 mA min.
OFF (voltage)
+5Vdc
OFF (current)
30Vdc
10 ms
45Vp
Response time
OFF - ON
2.2 ms
ON - OFF
3.3 ms
Isolation
Group to Group
Output to Bus
250 mA
Power Dissipation
OpenCircuit Monitoring
Brockenwire detection
Shunt resistor
recommended 56 k
Fusing
Internal
606
None
External
User discretion
I/O Modules
607
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT 7
GROUP A SUPPLY
10
GROUP A COMMON
OUTPUT 10
12
11
OUTPUT 9
OUTPUT 12
14
13
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 14
16
15
OUTPUT 16
18
17
OUTPUT 15
20
19
GROUP B COMMON
OUTPUT 18
22
21
OUTPUT 17
OUTPUT 20
24
23
OUTPUT 19
OUTPUT 22
26
25
OUTPUT 21
OUTPUT 24
28
27
OUTPUT 23
GROUP C SUPPLY
30
29
GROUP C COMMON
OUTPUT 26
32
31
OUTPUT 25
OUTPUT 28
34
33
OUTPUT 27
OUTPUT 30
36
35
OUTPUT 29
38
37
40
39
* 56 K
OUTPUT 13
* 56 K
GROUP B SUPPLY
OUTPUT 32
GROUP D SUPPLY
608
OUTPUT 31
GROUP D COMMON
I/O Modules
609
I/O Modules
Quantum Verified 10-30 VDC Out I/O Module (140 DVO 853 00)
Overview
610
The Quantum 140 DVO 853 00 is a 10 ... 30 Vdc, 32 point output module with
diagnostic capability. The module will detect and report the output state sensed at
the field connector and, depending on the selected configuration, will verify that the
output point is in the state commanded by the PLC. The module is configured in four
groups of eight outputs.
I/O Modules
Module
Specification
Table
Key specifications for the Quantum 140 DVO 853 00 module are as follows:
Number of Output Points
LEDs
Required addressing
Voltage
Operating
Absolute Maximum
On state Drop/Point
0.5 A
Each Group
4A
Per Module
16 A
0.4 mA @ 30 Vdc
1 ms (typical), 2 ms (max)
ON - OFF
1 ms (typical), 2 ms (max)
L = 0.5
I2 F
Tungsten Load Maximum
2.5 W @ 10 Vdc
3 W @ 12 Vdc
6 W @ 24 Vdc
75 m F
Isolation
Group to Bus
Group to Group
Fault Detection
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
I/O Modules
500 mA
Power Dissipation
External Power
10 ... 30 Vdc
Fusing
Internal
External
Programming Software
Type and version
612
I/O Modules
Fuse Locations
140
Points
1-8
Fuse Locations
Points
9-16
Points
17-24
Points
25-32
X
CAUTION
Possible danger to equipment or personnel.
Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip
to gain access to fuses.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
613
I/O Modules
Wiring Diagram
A wiring diagram for the Quantum 140 DVO 853 00 module is shown below.
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 6
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 8
OUTPUT 7
GROUP A SUPPLY
10
OUTPUT 10
12
11
OUTPUT 12
14
13
OUTPUT 14
16
15
0.75 A
GROUP A COMMON
OUTPUT 9
OUTPUT 11
OUTPUT 1
0.75 A
OUTPUT 3
0.75 A
OUTPUT 13
OUTPUT 15
OUTPUT 16
18
17
GROUP B SUPPLY
20
19
OUTPUT 18
22
21
OUTPUT 17
24
23
OUTPUT 22
26
25
OUTPUT 24
28
27
GROUP C SUPPLY
30
29
OUTPUT 26
32
31
OUTPUT 28
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
Note:
When driving a load from
two different points, a
blocking diode is required
for each point. These diodes (shown above) will
prevent false fault reporting
when only one of the points
is commanded ON.
OUTPUT 19
OUTPUT 20
OUTPUT 30
OUTPUT 32
GROUP D SUPPLY
614
0.75 A
GROUP B COMMON
OUTPUT 21
OUTPUT 23
GROUP C COMMON
OUTPUT 25
OUTPUT 27
OUTPUT 29
OUTPUT 31
GROUP D COMMON
I/O Modules
LED Indicators
Activ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
F
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
615
I/O Modules
616
Miscellaneous Components
At a Glance
Introduction
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
Miscellaneous Components
TSX Quantum Automation Series 140 XBE 100 00 Backplane Expander
618
630
617
Misc. Components
Miscellaneous Components
Overview
Backplanes
Table
Weight
10
Mounting
Brackets Table
Part Number
16
125 mm Bracket
Cabling Table
Part Number
20 mm Bracket
Description
AS-MBII-004
618
AS-MBII-003
Prefabricated S908 RIO drop cable, RG-6 cable, 140 ft. (43 m)
Misc. Components
Illustrated
Miscellaneous
Components
The following illustrations show the various components of the Quantum modules.
The following figure shows the connector orientation for the 990 NAD.
990 NAD 218/219 X0
Connector Orientation
Coding Kit
Figure
The following figure shows the coding kit a typical 1 set of 18 (Plastic Keys: 6 white
sets, 12 yellow sets), part number 140 XCP 200 00.
619
Misc. Components
Empty Module
Figure 1
The following figure shows an empty module without a terminal strip, part number
140 XCP 500 00.
620
Misc. Components
Empty Module
Figure 2
The following figure shows an empty module without the terminal strip and with a
door cover, part number 140 XCP 510 00.
Terminal Strip
Jumper Kit
Figure
The following figure shows the terminal strip jumper kit (qty: 12), part number 140
XCP 600 00.
621
Misc. Components
Field Wiring
Terminal Strips
Figures
The following shows figures of field wiring terminal strips XTS 001 00, XTS 002 00,
and XTS 005 00.
The following figure shows the 40-pin field wiring terminal strip with screw down
bolts cover, part number 140 XTS 001 00.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
11
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
622
13
7
9
15
17
19
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
3
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
Misc. Components
The following figure shows the 40-pin field wiring terminal strip, part number 140
XTS 002 00. The 002 differs from the 001 in that it does not have the clear plastic
safety cover over the screw down bolts.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
11
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
13
7
9
15
17
19
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
3
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
623
Misc. Components
The following figure shows the 7-pin field wiring I/O power connector, part number
140 XTS 005 00.
Rear view
Front view
Battery Figure
The following figure shows the battery for the Battery Module, part number 990 XCP
900 00.
CAUTION
Pull on this tape to remove
battery. Do not use metallic
tool.
Batt. install date:
624
Misc. Components
CPU Battery
Figure
The following figure shows the CPU battery, part number 990 XCP 980 00.
The following figure shows the Modbus Plus tap, part number 990 NAD 230 00.
The following figure shows the Modbus Plus ruggedized tap, part number 990 NAD
230 10.
625
Misc. Components
Terminator
Figure
The following figure shows the terminator, part number 990 NAD 230 11.
Programming
Cable Figure
The following figure shows the programming cable, part number 990 NAA 21510.
626
Misc. Components
I/O Conversion
Connector
Figure
The following figure shows the 200 series I/O conversion connector, part number
990 XTS 003 00.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
MODICON
5
6
MODICON
MODICON
3
4
21
Front View
Side View
627
Misc. Components
The following figure shows the remote I/O tap, part number MA-0185-100.
MODICON
AN AEG COMPANY
OUT
Remote I/O
Splitter Figure
IN
The following figure shows the remote I/O splitter, part number MA-0186-100.
MODICON
AN AEG COMPANY
TRUNK SPLITTER
MA 0331 000 RCV/A
OUT
Remote I/O
Connectors
Figure
628
OUT
The following figure shows the remote I/O F connectors: part number MA-0329-001
F connector for quad shield RG 6 cable, and MA-0329-002 F connector for nonquad shield RG 6 cable.
Misc. Components
The following figure shows the remote I/O BNC connectors: part number 043509446
BNC connector for quad shield RG 6 cable, and 52-0487-000 BNC connector for
non-quad shield RF-6 cable.
629
Misc. Components
630
The 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander provides the Modicon TSX Quantum with
the capacity to expand Local and Remote I/O drops to a second backplane. For
improved I/O capacity and efficiency, the backplane expander will save money by
minimizing the number of Remote I/O drops. The Backplane Expander also
improves the overall performance of Remote I/O based systems by reducing the
number of Remote I/O drops the TSX Quantum CPU has to service. The Backplane
Expander effectively doubles the maximum number of Discrete I/O that can be
serviced by a TSX Quantum Remote I/O system.
Misc. Components
Features of the
Backplane
Expander
l Enhances system performance requiring fewer remote I/O drops for the CPU to
service.
l Cost effective for local I/O by eliminating the need for a remote I/O head and drop.
l Cost effective by eliminating the need for an additional remote I/O drop.
The Backplane Expander acts as a repeater for the data signals of the Quantum
backplane. Power is not provided to the Secondary backplane over the Expander
cable, power supplies are required in both backplanes. The Backplane Expander
does not have any LEDs to display its status, the Active LEDs of the I/O Mapped
modules in the secondary backplane and their associated diagnostic status bits
indicate proper operation of the Backplane Expander. Since the Backplane
Expander is effectively part of the Quantum backplane, Schneider Automation does
not recommend the hot swapping of Backplane Expanders.
631
Misc. Components
140
XBE 100 00
EXPANDER
Remote I/O
With XBE
With XBE
W/O XBE
W/O XBE
864
448
864
448
864
448
26,784
13,888
Misc. Components
Part Numbers
Backplane Expander
Expander Cable, 9
633
Misc. Components
Specifications
All
All
Modsoft V2.6
400 mA@5Vdc
LEDs
None
Environmental
Operating temperature
0 60C
System Configuration
C
C
P
P
U
U
PRIMARY
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
SECONDARY
634
Spare Parts
Spare Parts
Overview
Miscellaneous
Spare Parts
Table
The following table shows the miscellaneous spare parts for the Quantum modules.
Spare Part Number
Description
043504708
043503019
043504710
043504639
043502480
043506673
043504417
043504640
043505673
043504680
043502952
043513804
043502477
043506326
043503328
043503381
043503242
043503243
043503020
Spare Parts
140XTS00500
140XTS00100
043503416
043505125
Fuses Table
043503356
The following table shows the fuses for the Quantum modules.
Part Number
Description
AS-MBII-003
AS-MBII-004
636
Hardware Installation
At a Glance
Introduction
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
645
649
638
651
637
Hrdwre. Istallation
638
Hrdwre. Istallation
Two Position
Backplane
Figure
F
H
A
B
C
10 mm / 0.39 inches
15 mm / 0.59 inches
Ground Screws
639
Hrdwre. Istallation
Three Position
Backplane
Figure
=Mountign Hole
Diameter: 8mm/0.31 inches.
=Optional locations for Modbus Plus
communication cable grounding.
Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches
=Threaded mounting holes for
half and full height modules.
Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches
A
B
C
10 mm / 0.39 inches
15 mm / 0.59 inches
640
Ground Screws
Hrdwre. Istallation
Four Position
Backplane
Figure
A
B
C
Ground Screws
=Mountign Hole
Diameter: 8mm/0.31 inches.
=Optional locations for Modbus Plus
communication cable grounding.
Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches
=Threaded mounting holes for
half and full height modules.
Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches
10 mm / 0.39 inches
15 mm / 0.59 inches
641
Hrdwre. Istallation
Six Position
Backplane
Figure
A
B
C
Ground Screws
=Mountign Hole
Diameter: 8mm/0.31 inches.
=Optional locations for Modbus Plus
communication cable grounding.
Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches
=Threaded mounting holes for
half and full height modules.
Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches
A
B
10 mm / 0.39 inches
15 mm / 0.59 inches
642
Hrdwre. Istallation
Ten Position
Backplane
Figure
H
I
A
B
C
D
Ground Screws
=Mountign Hole
Diameter: 8mm/0.31 inches.
=Optional locations for Modbus Plus
communication cable grounding.
Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches
=Threaded mounting holes for
half and full height modules.
Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches
A
B
10 mm / 0.39 inches
15 mm / 0.59 inches
643
Hrdwre. Istallation
Sixteen Position
Backplane
Figure
H
I
J
A
B
C
D
E
Ground Screws
=Mountign Hole
Diameter: 8mm/0.31 inches.
=Optional locations for Modbus Plus
communication cable grounding.
Diameter: 8 mm/0.31 inches
=Threaded mounting holes for
half and full height modules.
Diameter: 4mm/0.16 inches
A
B
10 mm / 0.39 inches
15 mm / 0.59 inches
644
Hrdwre. Istallation
645
Hrdwre. Istallation
125 mm
Mounting
Bracket Figures
I
B
K
C
E
N
H
J
Hrdwre. Istallation
20 mm Mounting
Bracket Figure
A
I
B
K
C
E
F
N
H
J
J
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
20 mm / 0.79 inches
Hrdwre. Istallation
K
648
Hrdwre. Istallation
When mounting Quantum systems in a cabinet, a 4 in. (101.60 mm) space should
be maintained above and below the modules. Side spacing should be 1 in. (25.40
mm) minimum. Wiring ducts up to 2 in. (50.80 mm) square may be centered
horizontally between backplanes.
Duct work or similar items mounted in this manner that extend further out than 2 in.
require a 4 in. space (instead of 1 in.) between them and the upper and lower
modules, to allow for air movement. (Refer to the illustration below for the spacing
required when installing Quantum systems.)
Spacing
Requirements
Table
The following table gives a summary of the spacing requirements for a Quantum
system.
Minimum Spacing
Location
Between the top of the cabinet and the top of the modules in the
upper backplane.
4 in.
Between the cabinet bottom and the bottom of the lower modules in
the lower backplane.
4 in.
Between the upper and lower modules when the backplanes are
mounted one above the other.
Note: Wiring ducts up to 2 in. x 2 in. (50.80 mm x 50.80 mm) may be centered between back
planes. If the duct extends further than 2 in. out from the mounting panel, there must be a 4
in. space between the modules and duct on the top and bottom.
649
Hrdwre. Istallation
Spacing
Requirements
Figure
2 x 2 Maximum
(50.80 x 50.80 mm)
Wire Duct
1 (25.40 mm)
4 (101.60 mm)
1 (25.40 mm)
4 (101.60 mm)
Botom of Cabinet
650
Hrdwre. Istallation
Quantum modules, with the exception of power supply modules, can be inserted into
any slot of any backplane and removed under power (hot swapped) without
damaging modules or the backplane; power supply modules must be installed in the
first or last slots of the backplane. Refer to the following figures and procedure when
mounting modules.
CAUTION
Possible danger to personnel or equipment.
An I/O module can only be hot swapped with the field side terminal strip
removed.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
651
Hrdwre. Istallation
Mounting a
Quantum Module
Figure
The following figure shows a module and gives a step-by-step procedure for
mounting a Quantum module.
Power
Supply
b
c
Screw
Module
Mounting Screw
Terminal Strip
I/O Screws
Terminal
Strip
Mounting Screw
652
Hrdwre. Istallation
Installing Module
Terminal Strip
Jumper Clips
Terminal strip jumper clips (see below) are installed when contiguous I/O points
need to be jumpered (i.e., the AVO 020 00 Analog Voltage Out module). Follow the
procedure below for installing jumper clips.
Mounting
Jumper Clips
Figure
The following figure shows a module and gives a step-by-step procedure for
mounting jumper clips.
1
2
140
AVO 020 00
3
Insert
Jumper Clip
Terminal Strip
I/O Screw
Exploded view of an inserted jumper clip
Removing a
Quantum I/O
Terminal Strip
The Quantum Automation Series I/O terminal strips have been designed with a pry
slot to assist in their removal. Follow the procedure below to remove the terminal
strip.
653
Hrdwre. Istallation
Removing a
Quantum Module
Terminal Strip
Figure
The following figure shows an I/O terminal and a step-by-step procedure for
removing the terminal strip.
(Exploded View)
Mounting Screws
140
DDO84300
1
2
Pry Slot
(Insert screwdriver)
3
Backplane
Pry Slot
654
Module
(Side view)
Hrdwre. Istallation
Removing a
Quantum Module
Door
The Quantum Automation Series module terminal strips have been designed with a
flexible, removable door to allow for easier wiring and access to the terminal strip.
Follow the procedure below to remove the module door.
Removing a
Quantum Module
Door Figure
The following figure shows a module door and a step-by-step procedure for
removing the door.
2
3
140
DDO84300
10-80 VDC OUT
655
Hrdwre. Istallation
656
At a Glance
Introduction
This section provides information of power and grounding considerations for AC and
DC powered systems, system design considerations for Quantum power supplies,
grounding and closed system installation.
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
658
675
670
Grounding
677
657
The required power and grounding configurations for AC powered and DC powered
systems are shown in the following illustrations. Also shown are power and
grounding configurations of AC and DC systems required for CE* compliance.
Each backplane shown has its own ground connection; that is, a separate wire
returning to the main grounding point, rather than "daisy chaining" the grounds
between power supplies or mounting plates.
The main grounding point is the local common connection of the panel ground,
equipment ground, and earth grounding electrode.
*The CE mark indicates compliance with the European Directive on Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC). In
order to maintain compliance, the Quantum system must be installed per the
installation instructions.
658
AC Powered
Systems Figure
PS
FUSE
AC POWER
SOURCE
FUSE
AC POWER
SOURCE
AC L
GND
AC L
GROUND
SCREWS
BACKPLANES
AC N*
PS
EQUIPMENT
(CHASSIS)
GROUND
AC POWER
SOURCE
I/O I/O
or or
C C
O O
M M
M M
AC N*
PANEL
GROUND
POINT
FUSE
C I/O I/O
P or or
U C C
O O
M M
M M
AC L
EQUIPMENT
(CHASSIS)
GROUND
GND
C I/O I/O
P or or
U C C
O O
M M
M M
I/O PS
or
C RED
O
M
M
GND
GROUND
SCREWS
AC N*
*AC N should be earth grounded. If it is not earth
grounded, it must be fused (refer to local codes).
659
DC Powered
Systems Figure
PS
FUSE
24 V COM*
FUSE
GND
I/O
or
C
O
M
M
I/O
or
C
O
M
M
I/O
or
C
O
M
M
BACKPLANES
24 V COM*
PANEL
GROUND
POINT
EARTH GROUND
EQUIPMENT
(CHASSIS)
GROUND
PS
GND
C
P
U
I/O
or
C
O
M
M
I/O
or
C
O
M
M
I/O PS
or RED
C
O
M
M
GND
GROUND
SCREWS
660
I/O
or
C
O
M
M
+24 VDC
24 V
C
P
U
FUSE
+24 VDC
24 V COM*
AC Powered
Systems for CE
Compliance
REDUNDANT/SUMMABLE
POWER SUPPLY
FUSE
SHIELDED CABLE
AND FERRITE BEAD
AC L
AC
POWER AC N
SOURCE
BROWN
SHIELDED
CABLE
LINE LOAD
BROWN
BACKPLANE
PS
BLUE
L
N
GREEN/YELLOW
BLUE
C
P
U
PS
RED
GROUND
SCREWS
LINE
FILTER
L
N
SHIELDED
CABLE
PANEL
GROUND
EARTH
GROUND
SHIELDED CABLE
BROWN
BLUE
LINE LOAD
LINE
FILTER
BROWN
BLUE
CASE GND
CAUTION
European compliance
To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/
336/EEC), the AC power supplies must be installed in accordance with
these instructions.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
661
CAUTION
Requirements compliance
For installations that must meet "Closed System" requirements, as
defined in EN 61131-2 (without relying upon an external enclosure),
connector models 140 XTS 00100 and 140 XTS 00500 are required.
Also, if an external Line Filter is used, it must be protected by a separate
enclosure which meets the "finger safe" requirements of IEC 529, Class
IP20.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
662
Detailed AC
Powered System
Figure
The following figure shows the details for the AC powered system for CE
compliance.
AC LINE
(BROWN)
Quantum Backplane
140 XBP XXX 00
BACKPLANE
GND SCREWS
4
BROWN
GND
LEAD
1
BROWN
3 4
AC NEUT
(BLUE)
Line Filter
GND
(GRN/YEL)
SHIELD
BLUE
BLUE
PANEL
GROUND
CASE TAB
EARTH
GROUND
GREEN/YELLOW*
(TO GROUND SCREW ON
QUANTUM BACKPLANE)
Shield
GND Lead
Quantum Power Supply
Wire to the power supply as follows:
Line (Brown wire)
Neutral (Blue wire)
GND (Green/Yellow wire)
Note: Refer to Section 3.3, Power
Supply Modules, for wiring diagrams
of all power supply modules.
Parts List
663
Callout
Vendor ot
equivilant
Part Number
Description
Instruction
Stewart
28 B 0686-200
Ferrite Bead
Fairite
2643665702
Schaffner
FN670-3/06
Dimensions:
Length: 3.4" (85 mm)
Width: 2.2" (55 mm)
Height: 1.6" (40 mm)
Mounting Holes: 0.2 in (5.3 mm) dia.,
3 in (75 MM) centerline mounted.
Fast on terminals: 0.25 in (6.4 mm)
4
N?A
N?A
Ground Braid
N/A
664
Oflex Series
100cy
35005
Shielde Cable
The maximum legnth is 8.5" (215 mm)
24 Vdc Powered
Systems for CE
Compliance
The following figure shows the 3 A, 24 Vdc powered systems for CE compliance.
C
P
U
I/O
I/O
I/O
+24 Vdc
GND
SHIELD
GROUND
SCREWS
EARTH GROUND
BACKPLANE
CAUTION
European compliance
To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/
336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC), the 140 CPS
211 00, the 140 CRA 211 20, and the 140 CRA 212 20 must be installed
in accordance with these instructions.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
665
Detailed System
for CE
Compliance
Figure
The following figure shows the detailed installation for the CE compliance system
and the parts list callouts.
+24 VDC
24 VDC
COM
BLUE
EARTH
GROUND
GREEN/
YELLOW
QUANTUM BACKPLANE
140 XBP XXX 00
4 5 6
BROWN
QUANTUM
BACKPLANE
GND SCREWS
GND
LEAD
GREEN/
YELLOW
1 2
SHIELD
GND
LEAD
666
Parts List.
Callout
Part Number
Description
Instruction
Offlex Series
100cy
35005
Line Cord
Sreward
28 BO686-200
Ferrite Bead
Fairite
Vendor (or
equivalent)
2643665702
The following figure shows the 125 Vdc powered system for CE compliance.
BACKPLANE
PS
C
P
U
I/O
or
C
O
M
M
I/O
or
C
O
M
M
I/O
or
C
O
M
M
I/O
or
C
O
M
M
PS
RED
GND
SHIELD
GROUND
SCREWS
EARTH
GROUND
CAUTION
European compliance
To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/
336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC), the 140 CPS
511 00 and the 140 CPS 524 00 must be installed in accordance with
these instructions.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
667
The following figure shows the detailed installation for the 125 Vdc powered system
for CE compliance with parts list callouts.
QUANTUM BACKPLANE
140 XBP XXX 00
GND
LEAD
4 5 6
BROWN
1 2 3
BACKPLANE
GND SCREWS
GREEN/
YELLOW
+125 VDC
125 VDC COM
BLUE
GREEN/
YELLOW
SHIELD
GND LEAD
EARTH GROUND
668
Parts List.
Callout
Vendor (or
equivalent)
Part Number
Description
Instruction
Offlex Series
100cy
35005
Line Cord
Sreward
28 BO686-200
Ferrite Bead
Fairite
2643665702
CAUTION
European compliance
To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/
336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC), the 140 CPS
511 00 and the 140 CPS 524 00 must be installed in accordance with
these instructions.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
669
670
Standalone
Power Supplies
l
l
l
l
CAUTION
Equipment compatibility.
Standalone units must be the only power supply installed in a
backplane. No fault tolerant or redundant capability exists in systems
powered by standalone power supplies.
In systems powered by a standalone power supply, the internal power
supply POK is provided directly to the Quantum system POK.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
The following figure shows the direction of the internal POK to the Quantum system
POK.
Standalone CPS
Internal POK
QuantumSystem POK
671
Summable
Power Supplies
Summable CPS
Internal POK
and
Summable CPS
Internal POK
The proper method for starting systems powered by summable power supplies is to
insert both supplies in the backplane in an unpowered state, and then apply power
to each supply. There is no requirement to turn on each supply simultaneously. The
system designer must realize that the operation of the summable supply described
above is independent of total backplane load, i.e., even if the total load on the
backplane is less than 8 A, if there are two summable supplies installed in the
backplane, the system POK is generated as shown in this section.
For the special case of a single summable supply used as a standalone, the system
POK generation reverts to the standalone case as shown previously in this section.
672
Redundant
Power Supplies
l
l
l
l
8 A output
8 A output
8 A output
8 A output
Similar to the summable supplies, the Quantum redundant power supplies also
contain circuitry which forces the installed power supplies to share output current
almost equally. An important difference between the summable and the redundant
supply lies in the system POK generation circuitry.
The Quantum system POK signal in systems powered by redundant power supplies
is true (power is OK) if either or both internal POK is true.
The following figure shows the Quantum system POK redundant power supply
direction.
Redundant CPS
Internal POK
Quantum
System
POK
Redundant CPS
Internal POK
Note: Redundant power supply module health may be monitored in an I/O module
health status word.
Another important difference from the summable system is the total available
system backplane loading. If there are N redundant power supplies installed in a
backplane, the total backplane load must not exceed the capability of N-1 supplies.
For example, if two 8 A power supplies are installed in the backplane (N=2), the
maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is the current sourced
by N-1 ( = 1) supplies, which is 8 A. If three 8 A redundant power supplies are
installed (N = 3), the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is
the current sourced by N-1 ( = 2) supplies, which is 16 A.
If these constraints are observed, then in a system of two or three redundant
supplies, one supply (it doesnt matter which one) is hot-swappable. This is possible
because there is excess capacity in the N-1 remaining supplies to source the
backplane current while the Nth supply is being swapped.
673
An obvious extension to this argument is that a single redundant power supply may
be used as a standalone supply (but the lowest cost solution will be achieved by
using a summable or standalone supply for this application).
Compatibility
Issues
Power supplies:
l With the exception of standalone models, power supplies with the same model
number are always compatible when installed in the same backplane.
l Do not use a standalone power supply in combination with any other supply in the
same backplane.
DIO:
674
Grounding
Overview
This appendix provides information on grounding issues for the chassis, power
supply Modbus Plus, and other equipment and system requirements.
Chassis
Grounding
A chassis ground wire is required for each backplane. The wire is connected
between one of four ground screws (located on the backplane) and the main ground
point of the power system. This wire should be green (or green with a yellow stripe)
and the AWG rating must be (at a minimum) sized to meet the fuse rating of the
supply circuit.
Power Supply
Grounding
Note: It is recommended that the power supplying the I/O modules be grounded at
the main ground point.
Modbus Plus
(MB+)
Communication
Tap Grounding
Modbus Plus network drop cables require a ground connection to the backplane.
The connection is made by means of a metal loop clamp that grounds the cable
shield to the ground point. The maximum allowable distance from the ground point
to the drop cables connector is 30 cm (11.8 in).
675
Modbus Plus
Grounding
Figure
Loop Clamp
(supplied with
Modbus Plus Tap)
Modbus Plus
Drop Cable
Ground
Screws
0.5 in
(13 mm)
11.8 in
(30 cm)
min
max
Remove outer
jacket to expose
the shield braid.
Existing backplane
ground screw may be
used if wire space
and clearance allows.
MB+
CAUTION
European compliance
To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/
336/EEC), the Modbus Plus drop cables must be installed in
accordance with these instructions.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Other Equipment
Grounding
Other equipment in the installation should not share the grounding conductor of the
system. Each piece of equipment should have its own grounding conductor
returning to the main grounding point from which the equipment power originates.
Systems with
Multiple Power
Feeds
In systems with multiple power feeds, the grounding should proceed in the same
manner as single feed systems. However, a zero volt potential difference must be
maintained between the equipment grounding conductors of the separate systems
to prevent current flow on communication cables.
676
677
AC/DC
Installation
Figure
The following figure shows the detailed installation for the AC and DC powered
systems for CE closed system compliance.
BACKPLANE
GND SCREWS
GND
LEAD
STRAIN
RELIEF
BUSHING
STRAIN RELIEF
BUSHING
1 2
AC NEUT
(BLUE)
QUANTUM BACKPLANE
140 XBP XXX 00
SHIELD
PANEL
GROUND
EARTH
GROUND
PROTECTIVE COVER
FOR LINE FILTER
GND
(GRN/
YEL)
(WIRING DETAILS
FOR LINE FILTER
SHOWN ON NEXT
PAGE)
SHIELD
GND LEAD
GREEN/YELLOW*
(TO GROUND SCREW ON
QUANTUM BACKPLANE)
Protective Cover
678
The protective cover must completely enclose the line filter. Approximate
dimensions for the cover are 12.5 cm by 7.5 cm. Wire entry/exit shall be through
strain relief bushings.
Line Filter
Connections
Figure
The following figure shows the wiring connections to the enclosed line filter.
Brown
Brown
Blue
Blue
Case tab
Protective Cover
Green/Yellow
(To ground screw on
Quantum backplane)
679
680
At a Glance
Introduction
When you use the I/O Map utility in Modsoft to set up your I/O configuration, it
automatically assigns one or more registers in system memory to each I/O module.
This appendix describes how these registers are implemented for each type of
Quantum Series I/O module.
In a separate part of user memory, Modsoft also creates an I/O module status table
where a byte (eight bits in a register) is assigned to each module in the I/O map.
Modules report status and fault information to their assigned bytes. The bit
implementation of these status bytes is also described for each Quantum Series I/O
module.
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
682
684
688
Discrete Output Modules with Fault Indication ( 140 DDO 885 00 and 140 DVO
853 00)
693
701
721
726
731
Battery Module
706
762
681
This Quantum menu entry allows you to assign the 3x register that defines the start
of a table of 3x registers in which I/O-mapped module status is available. You may
either enter the 3x value, or the value 0 (indicating no choice). The value entered is
displayed in the summary information on the top of the Quantum I/O Map. Modules
in a backplane report status and fault information in an 8-bit byte therefore, one
word of a table conveys the status information for two modules.
The following figure shows an example of the Quantum report status and fault
information.
Enter status reg(
0): 300001
Tme AS
F5
Quit
OFF F9
QUANTUM
Re
: 1
x100 ms Module Status Reg:
Number of Outputs:
Ref
Output Ref
Available: 189
300001-300002
32
Description
If you choose to display or develop a program using these values, the table/module
relationship is given in the following example:
682
Table/Module
Configuration
Table
I/O
A
Slot 2
I/O
B
I/O
C
Slot 1
300001
Slot 4
I/O B
Slot 3
I/O A
Slot 6
Slot 5
300003
Given the above sample configuration, if you select 300001 as the starting address
of the status table and there are no I/O modules in the first two locations, the first I/
O module status is found in the least significant byte of the second word (i.e.,
position 3). The table fills until the last I/O mapped module is found.
Note: The bit pattern reported in each status/error byte is dependent on the module
type.
683
This appendix provides information on 16-, 24-, 32-, and 96-point input modules.
16-Point Input
Modules
l
l
l
l
l
l
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select the input type. This selection appears if the
module is I/O mapped to a 3x register.
The following figure shows the input type display.
input Type:
BIN
BCD
24-Point Input
Module
684
There is only one 24-point input module: 140 DDI 673 00 (DC Input 125 VDC 3x8
Sink).
The input module listed above can be configured as either 24 contiguous discrete
input (1x) reference, or as two contiguous input (3x) registers in the following format.
The following figures show the input point for Register 1 and Register 2.
Register 1
Input
Point 1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 18
19
20
21
22
23
24
There is no input I/O map status byte associated with this module.
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select the Input Type and the Filter Select options.
The following figures show the input type and the filter select option.
Input Type:
BIN
BCD
Group X
Filter Select on:
.7 msec
1.5 msec
32-Point Input
Modules
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
685
The input modules listed above can be configured as either 32 contiguous discrete
input (1x) references or as two contiguous input (3x) registers in the following format.
The following figure shows the input points for Register 1 and Register 2.
Register 1
Input
Point 1
21
22
23
24
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
25 26
27
28
29
30
31
32
18
19
20
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select the input type. This selection appears if the
module is I/O mapped to a 3x register.
The following figure shows the input type.
Input Type:
BIN
BCD
96-Point Input
modules
686
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
21
22
23
24
25 26
27
28
29
30
31
32
37
38
39
40
41 42
43
44
45
46
47
48
53
54
55
56
57 58
59
60
61
62
63
64
69
70
71
72
73 74
75
76
77
78
79
80
85
86
87
88
89 90
91
92
93
94
95
96
18
19
20
34
35
36
50
51
52
66
67
68
82
83
84
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select the input type. This selection appears if the
module is I/O mapped to a 3x register.
The following figure shows the input type.
Input Type:
BIN
BCD
687
This appendix provides information on 8, 16-, 32- and 96-point output modules.
16-Point Output
Modules
The output modules listed above can be configured as either 16 contiguous discrete
output (0x) references, or as one output (4x) register in the following formats.
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
The following figures show the formats for the output modules.
For the 140 DAO 840 00, 140 DAO 840 10, 140 DAO 842 10, 140 DAO 842 20, 140 DDO 843 00,
and the 140 DRA 840 00 modules.
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 DAO 842 10 and 140 DAO 842 20 output
modules.
The following figure shows I/O map status bytes use.
8
Group D fault
Group C fault
1
Group A fault
Group B fault
There is no I/O map status byte associated with the 140 DAO 840 00, 140 DAO 840
10, 140 DDO 843 00, 140 DRA 840 00, or 140 DRC 830 00 modules.
688
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the
module. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
The following figures show the output type and timeout state.
Output Type:
BIN
BCD
Last Value
User Defined
Timeout State:
32-Point Output
Module
l
l
l
l
l
The following figures show the formats for the output modules.
Register 1
Output
Point 1
21
22
23
24
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
25 26
27
28
29
30
31
32
18
19
20
689
Output A Fault
Output B Fault
Output C Fault
Output D Fault
Group A Point Fault
Group B Point Fault
These are for the 140 DDO 353 01
Module only
Group C Point Fault
Group D Point Fault
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the
module. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
The following figure shows the output type and timeout state.
Output Type:
BIN
BCD
Last Value
Timeout State:
User Defined
96-Point Output
and Input
modules
690
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
21
22
23
24
25 26
27
28
29
30
31
32
37
38
39
40
41 42
43
44
45
46
47
48
53
54
55
56
57 58
59
60
61
62
63
64
69
70
71
72
73 74
75
76
77
78
79
80
85
86
87
88
89 90
91
92
93
94
95
96
18
19
20
34
35
36
50
51
52
66
67
68
82
83
84
Output 1 to 16 Fault
Output 17 to 32 Fault
Output 33 to 48 Fault
Output 49 to 64 Fault
Output 65 to 80 Fault
Output 80 to 96 Fault
691
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the
module. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
The following figure shows the output type and timeout state.
Output Type:
BIN
BCD
Last Value
Timeout State:
692
User Defined
0000000000000000
0000000000000000
0000000000000000
0000000000000000
0000000000000000
0000000000000000
Discrete Output Modules with Fault Indication ( 140 DDO 885 00 and 140 DVO 853
00)
Overview
The following provides information on the 140 DDO 885 00 DC Output 24-125 Vdc
2x6 module, and the 140 DVO 853 00 DC output 10 - 30 Vdc 32 point module.
Module Zoom
Selections
(Inputs)
10
11
12
Push <Enter> to display and select the input type. This selection appears if the
module is I/O mapped to a 3x register.
The following figure shows the input type.
input Type:
BIN
BCD
Note: Do not use the BCD selection, as it will incorrectly display fault conditions.
The 140 DDO 885 00 can be configured as one output (4x) register in the following
format.
The following figure shows the register format for outputs.
1
10
11
12
693
The least significant bit in the output I/O map status byte is used as follows.
The following figure shows the status byte output register.
8
1
Module Fault
(any point fault turns on this bit)
Module Zoom
Selections
(Outputs)
Push <Enter> to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the
module. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
The following figure shows the output type and timeout state.
Output Type:
BIN
BCD
Last Value
Timeout State:
User Defined
Note: To clear a fault, the point must be commanded OFF in user logic.
694
The 140 The 140 DVO 853 00 requires two output and two input words that can be
configured as follows.
Register 1
Output
Point 1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20
21
22
23
24
25 26
27
28
29
30
31
32
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20
21
22
23
24
25 26
27
28
29
30
31
32
17
18
19
The eight bits in the I/O map status byte are used as follows:
8
The voltage fault bit is set when the fields supply is not present, or the group fuse is
blown.
The miscompare bit is set when any point within the group does not match its
commanded state.
695
Modsoft Zoom
Screens
Selections
Group Number
Group X
Fail States
User Defined
Values
Outputs OFF
Last Value
Status/Input
Verified Health
00000000
User Defined
Verified Fault
Input Only
Actual
NO
YES
696
Zoom Screen
Selection
Descriptions
Fail States
Disabled
Fail States: Group outputs are per the selection made in the Fail States column.
Disabled: Forces all outputs to be in the OFF state.
Fail States - Module output state choices if selected in "Output Shutdown State"
menu.
Fail States
Outputs OFF
Last Value
User Defined
Outputs OFF: Group outputs turn OFF
Last Value: Group outputs remain in the state they were in.
User Defined: Group output states may be individually selected in the
User Defined Values column to be ON or OFF.
00000000
Choices If Selected:
Lowest Numbered
Group Output (CH 1,9,17,25)
Highest Numbered
Group Output (CH 8,16,24,32)
697
Output point=OFF
Output point=ON
Status bit=0
Status bit=0
Status bit=1
Output LED=OFF
Output LED=OFF
Output LED=ON
Fault LED=OFF
Fault LED=ON
Fault LED=OFF
Verified Health
Output point=OFF
Output point=OFF
Output point=ON
Status bit=1
Status bit=1
Status bit=0
Output LED=OFF
Output LED=OFF
Output LED=ON
Fault LED=OFF
Verified fault
Fault LED=ON
Fault LED=OFF
698
On command sent
(After fault is
removed)
Output point=OFF
Output point=OFF
Output point=ON
Status bit=0
Status bit=0
Status bit=1
Output LED=OFF
Output LED=OFF
Output LED=ON
Fault LED=OFF
Fault LED=ON
Fault LED=OFF
Verified Health
Output point=OFF
Output point=OFF
Output point=ON
Status bit=0
Status bit=0
Status bit=1
Output LED=OFF
Output LED=OFF
Output LED=ON
Fault LED=OFF
Fault LED=ON
Fault LED=OFF
Actual
699
Thermally
Protected Output
Devices
WARNING
Possible Safety Hazard
When choosing "YES", the use of thermally protected output devices
with the 140 DVO 853 00 module can produce safety concerns.
In the event of an enabled output sensing an overcurrent condition, the
output will disable, until the overcurrent condition is removed. The
output will then re-enable itself, if still set ON in the logic program.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in severe injury or
equipment damage.
700
The following information pertains to the discrete 4-point input and 4-point output
module 140 DDM 690 00, 125 Vdc input/high power output.
There is no input I/O map status byte associated with the inputs.
701
Module Zoom
Selection
(Inputs)
Push <Enter> to display and select the Dual Mode and Filter Select options.
The following figures show the dual mode and the filter select entry.
Dual Mode:
Disabled
Enabled
.5 msec
Filter Select:
1.5 msec
Filter Select
This entry selects which filter response time to
use for the input circuits.
The 140 DDM 690 00 module can be configured as either one 4x register or 8
contiguous 0x references.
The following figure shows the outputs register.
Fast Trip 4 Enable
Fast Trip 3 Enable
Fast Trip 2 Enable
Fast Trip 1 Enable
Output 4
Output 3
Output 2
Output 1
1
In Fast Trip Mode, each output can be turned ON by the Command Bit (e.g., Output
1) or by the corresponding Input Bit plus the Fast Trip Enable Bit (e.g., last order
Input 1 controls Output 1 directly).
702
The four least significant bits in the I/O map status are used as follows.
The following figure shows the status byte output register.
8
Output 1 Fault
Output 2 Fault
Output 3 Fault
Output 4 Fault
Module Zoom
Selections
(Outputs)
Push <Enter> to display and select the timeout state for the module. Timeout state
is assumed when the system control of the module is stopped.
The following figure shows the default output state and user-defined timeout state
points.
0000
The following information pertains to the 140 DAM 590 00 (AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 /
AC Output 115 Vac 2x4) and the 140 DDM 390 00 (DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 / DC Output
24 Vdc 2x4) modules.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
There is no input I/O map status byte associated with these modules.
703
Module Zoom
Selections
(Inputs)
Push <Enter> to display and select the input type. This selection appears if the
module is I/O mapped to a 3x register.
The following figure shows the input type.
input Type:
BIN
BCD
The modules listed above can be configured as one output (4x) register in the
following format.
The following figure shows the outputs register.
1
The two least significant bits in the output I/O map status byte are used as follows.
The following figure shows the status outputs register.
8
1
Group B fault
Group A fault
704
Module Zoom
Selections
(Outputs)
Push <Enter> to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the
module. Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
The following figure shows the output type and timeout state.
Output Type:
BIN
BCD
Last Value
Timeout State:
User Defined
705
l
l
l
l
140 ACI 030 00
706
The following information pertains to the 140 ACI 030 00 Analog Input module.
The following figure shows the ACI 030 00 eight channel unipolar input module that
requires nine contiguous input (3x) registers, and assigned as follows.
Register 1
Register 2
Register 3
Register 4
Register 5
Register 6
Register 7
Register 8
Register 9
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
The most significant bit in the I/O map status byte is used for the 140 ACI 030 00
Input module.
The following figure shows the MSB register.
MSB
1
707
Module Zoom
Selections
The following information pertains to the 140 ARI 030 10 Analog Input module.
This module requires nine contiguous input 16-bit (3x) registers - eight for input data
and one for input status. The data registers formats are as follows.
Channel 1 data
Register 2
Channel 2 data
Register 3
Channel 3 data
Register 4
Channel 4 data
Register 5
Channel 5 data
Register 6
Channel 6 data
Register 7
Channel 7 data
Register 8
Channel 8 data
Note: The data format is 16-bit integer values in the positive range and an integer
value with the MSB indicating a negative sign in the negative range.
708
Data Format
Figure
Status Word
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
*A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value. An
out-of-range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2.34%
or when a broken wire is sensed on the channel. The warning bit is cleared (if set)
when the out-of-range bit is set.
I/O Map Status
Byte
The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 ARI 030 10 Input module as follows.
The following figure shows the MSB register with status warnings.
MSB
8
LSB
7
709
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select the timeout states for each channel. Timeout
state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
Module
Configuration
Byte Figure
Resolution:
1.0 DEG
0.1 DEG
Output unit:
CELSIUS
FAHRENHEIT
Value Type:
TEMPERATURE
RAW VALUE
710
Channel X
Configuration
Figure
Current Enable/Disable:
ENABLE
DISABLE
4-Wire/3-Wire/2-Wire:
4 WIRE
3 WIRE
2 WIRE
Pt100,
-200 ...850
Pt200,
-200 ...850
Pt500,
-200 ...850
Pt1000,
-200 ...850
Ni100,
Ni200,
Ni500,
Ni1000,
R, 0 ... 766.66
OHM
R, 0 ... 4000
OHM
APt100,
APt200,
APt500,
APt1000,
The following information pertains to the 140 ATI 030 00 Analog Input module.
This module requires ten contiguous, 16-bit words eight for input data, one for
channel status, and one for internal temperature of the module. The data words
formats are as follows.
711
The following figure shows the input formats and status warnings.
Word 1
Channel 1 data
Word 2
Channel 2 data
Word 3
Channel 3 data
Word 4
Channel 4 data
Word 5
Channel 5 data
Word 6
Channel 6 data
Word 7
Channel 7 data
Word 8
Channel 8 data
Word 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
712
* A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value, as
shown in the following table. An out-of-range bit is set when a channel input exceeds
the rated input value by 2.4% or when a broken wire is sensed on the channel. The
warning bit is cleared (if set) when the out-of-range bit is set.
Internal
Temperature
Figure
The I/O map status byte is used by the 140 ATI 030 00 Input Module as follows.
The following figure shows the MSB, LSB and status warnings.
Word 10
Internal temperature
MSB
8
LSB
7
713
Measurement
Ranges
Ranges in the following table are expressed in degrees C. The user can select either
0.1 or 1.0 degrees (C or F) for the output data format.
If the 0.1 degree format is selected, the decimal point is implied (i.e., a reading of
1234 should be interpreted as 123.4 degrees). The internal CJC data is reported in
the same units as the TC output.
All TC output data is in Modsoft signed format except as noted for Type B (see
below).
Note: If the TC is open, then the warning bit is cleared and the out-of-range bit is
set. If it is over range, then the channels output data word is always 7FFFH; if it is
under range, the channels output data word is always 8001H. These are the
possible highest and lowest values.
714
Measurement
Ranges Table
Data
Format
Input
Minimum
Reading
Normal
Over Range
Warning
Out-ofRange Set
Modsoft
Signed
Format
J Type TC
-228.5
-210 to +760
760.1 to 778.6
>778.7
K Type TC
-302.9
-270 to +1370
1370.1 to 1405.0
>1405.1
E Type TC
-293.8
-270 to +1000
1000.1 to 1023.9
>1024.0
T Type TC
-279.5
-270 to +400
400.1 to 409.6
>409.7
S Type TC
-89.9
-50 to +1665
1665.1 to 1705.0
>1705.1
R Type TC
-89.6
-50 to +1665
1665.1 to 1704.7
>1704.8
B Type TC
(See Note 3)
+86.4
+130 to +1820
1820.1 to 1863.7
>1863.8
None
See Note 2
None
See Note 2
Millivolt Ranges
Offset
Binary
-100 mV
0
0
0
+100 mV
FFFFh
-25 mV
0
+25 mV
8000h
0
0
8000h
FFFFh
Notes: 1. Open Circuit Detect is always enabled for all TC types and may be disabled for
linear ranges.
2. On millivolt ranges, if Open Circuit Detect is enabled, this bit is set on Open Circuit Detect
or input FFFFh.
3.Data format changes to unsigned if the output is requested in units of 0.1 degrees F to
accommodate readings above 3276.8 degrees F.
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select the timeout states for each channel. Timeout
state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
715
Module
Configuration
Figure
1.0 DEG
Resolution:
0.1 DEG
CENTIGRADE
Output Unit:
FAHRENHEIT
On board
CHANNEL X CONFIGURATION
Undefined
J,
gain=25
K,
gain=25
E,
Thermocouple Type:
gain=25
T,
Note:
Undefined = Linear Range
gain=100
S,
gain=100
R,
gain=100
B,
gain=100
NO
YES
25
100
YES
NO
716
The following information pertains to the 140 AVI 030 00 Analog Input module.
717
Map Register
Assignment
Figure
The following figure shows the assignment registers and the input status warnings.
Register 1
Channel 1 data
Register 2
Channel 2 data
Register 3
Channel 3 data
Register 4
Channel 4 data
Register 5
Channel 5 data
Register 6
Channel 6 data
Register 7
Channel 7 data
Register 8
Channel 8 data
Register 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
718
*A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value, as
shown in the following table. An out-of-range bit is set when a channel input exceeds
the rated input value by 2.4% or when a broken wire (4 ... 20 mA mode) is sensed
on the channel.
Linear
Measuring
Ranges Table
The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140 AVI 030 00
Analog Input module.
Data Format
Input
Under
Warning
Normal
Over
Warning
16-bit
Format
+/- 10 V
< 768
> 64,768
+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA
<16,768
> 48,768
0 ... 10 V
0 ... 64,000
> 64,000
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA
0 ... 32,000
> 32,000
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA
<6,400
> 32,000
+/- 10 V
< -10,000
-10,000 ...10,000
> 10,000
+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA
Voltmeter
Format*
< -5,000
> 5,000
0 ... 10,000
> 10,000
0 ... 10 V
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA
> 5,000
< 1,000
> 5,000
+/- 10 V
0 ... 4,095
4,095
+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA
12-bit
Format
0 ... 5,000
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA
4,095
4,095
0 ... 4,095
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA
0 ... 4,095
0 ... 4,095
0 ... 10 V
4,095
0 ... 4,095
4,095
The most significant bit in the I/O map status byte is used for the 140 AVI 030 00
Input module.
The following figure shows the input register.
1
719
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select data format for the module and the ranges for
the individual input channels.
Module Zoom
Selections
Figure
The following figures show the data formats and Channel X range (per channel).
16-bit Format
Data Formats (per node)
Voltmeter
12-bit Format
-10V to +10V
Channel X Range
(per channel)
0V to +10V
-5V to +5V
0V to +5V
1V to +5V
-20mA to +20mA
0mA to +20mA
+4mA to +20mA
720
This appendix provides information on modules 140 ACO 020 00, 140 AVO 020 00,
and 140 ACO 130 00.
The following information pertains to the 140 ACO 020 Analog Output module.
This module requires four contiguous output (4x) registers, which are assigned as
follows.
Register 2
Register 3
Register 4
The four least significant bits in the I/O map status byte are used for the 140 ACO
020 00 Output module.
721
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select the timeout states for each channel. Timeout
state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
Module Zoom
Figure
Last Value
User Defined
0 DEC
The following information pertains to the 140 AVO 020 00 Analog Output module.
This module requires four contiguous output (4x) registers, which are assigned as
follows.
Register 2
Register 3
Register 4
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select the timeout states for each channel. Timeout
state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
722
Module Zoom
Figure
Last Value
User Defined
0 DEC
Note: Selecting disabled for any channel causes all others to default to that state.
Output will be what is connected to the module master override terminals, either
common or an external voltage
The following information pertains to the 140 ACO 130 00 analog current sink output
module..
This module requires eight contiguous output (4x) registers, which are assigned as
follows.
723
Register 2
Channel 2 data
Register 3
Channel 3 data
Register 4
Channel 4 data
Register 5
Channel 5 data
Register 6
Channel 6 data
Register7
Channel 7 data
Register 8
Channel 1 data
Channel 8 data
The I/O map status is used for the 140 ACO 130 00 output module as follows:
1
724
Module Zoom
Selections
Push <Enter> to display and select the timeout states for each channel. Time out
state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.
Module Zoom
Figure
Last Value
User Defined
Channel X Range
Selection
0 DEC
4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
0 to 4,095
0 to 20 mA
0 to 20,000
0 to 25 mA
Range
0 to 25,000
725
Note: Modsoft V2.2 or above is required to set up your Quantum I/O configuration.
This module requires five contiguous input (3x) registers and two output (4x)
registers.
3x Registers
Figure
Register 2
Register 3
Register 4
Note: The input data format and resolution are selected in Zoom screen. Voltmeter
mode is recommended for bipolar ranges with signed decimal numbers.
726
Status Warning
Figure
Status
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
*A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value, as
shown in the following table. An out-of-range bit is set when a channel input exceeds
the rated input value by 2.4% or when a broken wire (4 ... 20 mA mode) is sensed
on the channel.
727
Linear
Measuring
Ranges Table
The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140 AMM 090 00
combination Analog module.
Data Format Input
Under
Warning
Normal
Over
Warning
16-bit
Format
+/- 10 V
< 768
> 64,768
+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA
< 16,768
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA
Voltmeter
Format*
< 6,400
> 48,768
> 64,000
0 ... 32,000
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA
0 ... 10 V
> 32,000
> 32,000
+/- 10 V
< -10,000
> 10,000
+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA
< -5,000
> 5,000
0 ... 10 V
0 ... 10,000
> 10,000
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA
0 ... 5,000
> 5,000
> 5,000
0 ... 4,095
4,095
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA
12-bit
Format
< 1,000
+/- 10 V
+/- 5 V, +/- 20 mA
0 ... 5 V, 0 ... 20 mA
1 ... 5 V, 4 ... 20 mA
4x Register
Figure
0 ... 4,095
4,095
0 ... 4,095
0 ... 10 V
4,095
0 ... 4,095
0
4,095
0 ... 4,095
4,095
Register 2
Note: The data format is always 0 ... 4095 decimal (in Modsoft).
728
The I/O map status byte is used for the 140 AMM 090 00 Combination module as
follows.
Module Zoom
Selections
Module Zoom selection screens have been created for inputs and outputs and are
shown below.
Module Zoom
Selections
(Inputs)
Push <Enter> to display and select the data format for the module and the ranges
for the individual input channels.
Module Zoom
Inputs Figure
The following figures show the data formats and the Channel X range.
16-bit Format
Data Formats (per node)
(Inputs)
Voltmeter
12-bit Format
Not installed
Channel X Range
(per channel)
(Inputs)
-10V to +10V
0V to +10V
-5V to +5V
0V to +5V
1V to +5V
-20mA to +20mA
0mA to +20mA
+4mA to +20mA
729
Module Zoom
Selections
(Outputs)
Push <Enter> to display and select the mode for the outputs after a communications
timeout. This mode is selected for each channel.
Module Zoom
Outputs Figure
Last Value
730
The 140 EHC 202 00 high speed counter requires six contiguous output (4X) and
six contiguous input (3X) registers in the I/O map.
The 4X registers perform the same configuration tasks as the Modzoom screenassigned parameters. Also, the preset and the enable inputs connected to the field
wiring terminal block perform the same functions as those software command
control bits. When both methods are used to:
l
l
l
l
There are four operations that can be performed. Each uses one or more of both
types of registers assigned to the module. In addition to the command definition
byte, the first 4X register for all commands contain control bits to preset and enable/
disable counters of either channel.
731
Command 1 CONFIGURES
3X
4X+1
3X+1
4X+2
3X+2
3X+3
3X+4
3X+5
There are four formats for this command. It uses up to six 4X registers and six 3X
registers (see below). Values loaded may be as shown in the following figure.
The following figure shows the format for registers 4X and 3X for command 2.
4X
3X
4X+1
3X+1
4X+2
3X+2
4X+3
3X+3
4X+4
3X+4
4X+5
3X+5
732
3X
3X+1
3X+2
3X+3
3X+4
3X+5
Command 4
READS RATE
SAMPLE or LAST
INPUT COUNT
BEFORE
PRESET
3X
3X+1
3X+2
3X+3
3X+4
3X+5
Note: 4X register formats for the commands are described first. The 3X register
contents after issuing Command 1 or 2 are listed after the 4X register description
for Command 2, since the responses are the same for both. The 3X responses for
Commands 3 and 4 immediately follow those commands.
Note: When Command 0 (4X = 00XX) or any other undefined commands are
asserted in the 4X register, the 3X registers will contain the count inputs if in count
mode (same as Command 3) and the rate sample values when in rate-sample
mode (same as Command 4).
733
Command 1 CONFIGURE,
Output Register
Format (4X =
02XX hex)
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
1 = Preset Counter 1
1 = Enable Counter 1
1 = Disable Counter 1
1 = Preset Counter 2
1 = Enable Counter 2
1 = Disable Counter 2
Configure Command Bit
The following figure shows the output register for command 1 (4X+1).
4X+1
16
15
14
13
12
0
0
1
1
11
0
1
0
1
10
734
The following figure shows the output register for command 1 (4X+2).
4X+2
16 15 14 13 12 11
10
Bits
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
Mode
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Disable Output
ON if Count = Setpoint
Latched ON if Count = Setpoint. Hardware RESET required to turn OFF
ON if Count = Maximum Count
Latched ON if Count = Maximum Count. Hardware RESET required to turn OFF
ON when Count = Setpoint for time specified in Command 2 register
ON when Count = Maximum Count for time specified in Command 2 register
Not Used
CAUTION
Module disable possibility
The Output ON time specified in the Command 2 registers may be used
by only one of the four outputs. When more than one output is set to
mode 5 or 6, the module firmware will operate the first one encountered,
and disable the other outputs set to modes 5 or 6.
Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or
equipment damage.
Command 2.
LOAD VALUES,
Output Register
Format (4X =
02XX hex)
The LOAD VALUES 4X register format depends on the Counter/Rate Sample mode
selected in Command 1, Register 4X+1, bits 11 and 12.
735
Command 2, 16
Bit Counters
If configured for 2, 16 bit Counters - Output Assert ON, the following information is
displayed.
The following figures show the counters for registers 4X through 4X+5 modules.
4X
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
1 = Preset Counter 1
1 = Enable Counter 1
1 = Disable Counter 1
1 = Preset Counter 2
1 = Enable Counter 2
1 = Disable Counter 2
Load Values Command
4X+1
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
15
14
13
12
11
10
15
14
13
12
11
10
15
14
13
12
11
10
15
14
13
12
11
10
736
Command 2, 32
Bit Counters
If configured for 1, 32 bit Counter - Output Assert ON, the following information is
displayed.
The following figure shows the counters for registers 4X through 4X+5, with low and
high word.
4X
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
1 = Preset Counter 1
1 = Enable Counter 1
1 = Disable Counter 1
1 = Preset Counter 2
1 = Enable Counter 2
1 = Disable Counter 2
Load Values Command
15
14
13
12
11
10
15
14
13
12
11
10
15
14
13
12
11
10
Note: Zero set into any 4X register pair for 32 bit values or any 4X register means
no change.
737
Command 2, 32
Bit Counters
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
1 = Preset Counter 1
1 = Enable Counter 1
1 = Disable Counter 1
1 = Preset Counter 2
1 = Enable Counter 2
1 = Disable Counter 2
Load Values Command
15
14
13
12
11
10
15
14
13
12
11
10
Note: Zero set into any 4X register pair for 32 bit values or any 4X register means
no change.
738
Command 2,
Rate Sample
Mode
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
1 = Preset Counter 1
1 = Enable Counter 1
1 = Disable Counter 1
1 = Preset Counter 2
1 = Enable Counter 2
1 = Disable Counter 2
Load Values Command
4X+1
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
15
14
13
12
11
10
Note: Zero set into any 4X register or any 4X register pair for 32 bit values means
no change.
739
Command 1 and
Command 2
Response
Formats
15
14
13
12
11
10
Configure or
Load Values
Command Byte
3X+1 to 3X+4 echoes 4X+1 to 4X+4 register contents.
3X+5
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
1 = Field Power Lost
Command 3,
READ INPUT
COUNTER,
Output Register
Format (4X =
03XX hex)
740
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
1 = Preset Counter 1
1 = Enable Counter 1
1 = Disable Counter 1
1 = Preset Counter 2
1 = Enable Counter 2
1 = Disable Counter 2
Read Counter Inputs Com-
Command 3
Response
Format
15
14
13
12
11
10
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
1 = Field Power Lost
Command 4,
READ RATE
SAMPLE or
READ LAST
COUNT VALUE
BEFORE MOST
RECENT
PRESET, Output
Register Format
(4X = 04XX hex)
10
1
1 = Preset Counter 1
1 = Enable Counter 1
1 = Disable Counter 1
1 = Preset Counter 2
1 = Enable Counter 2
1 = Disable Counter 2
Read Rate/Last Count
Command Bits
741
Command 4
Response
Format
The following figures show the counters for 3X through 3X+5 for command 4.
3X
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
3X+5
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
1 = Field Power Lost
The most significant bit in the I/O Map status byte is used for the 140 EHC 202 00
High Speed Counter Module.
The following figure shows the map status byte register.
8
Using I/O
Mapped
Registers to
Operate the High
Speed Counter
742
COUNT UP
Example
Field connections for this example are illustrated in the EHC 202 wiring diagrams 14 in this section. The maximum allowable Vref value is 30 Vdc. Input pulse on-off
threshold levels for the 5 ... 24 Vdc Vref range are listed in the module specification
table. The minimum differential input is 1.8 V.
The following user logic:
l
l
l
l
l
Input Ref
Output Ref
Description
300001-300006
400001-400006
In this example, block moves are used to load the operating parameters into the
module. This requires pre-defined tables be established. Register values are in HEX
format.
Module
Configuration
Table
400102 0000
Pulse input, two 16 bit counters, output assert on Rate Sample OFF,
disable outputs at bus communication loss
400103 3100
400104 0000
400105 0000
400106 0000
743
Load Values
Table
400202 0064
400203 0032
400204 0000
400205 0000
Zeros in the 4X registers also mean no change. Setpoint, maximum count and
assert time can only be set to zero using the Modzoom screens. When the registers
in this example are echoed, zeros will appear but the actual content in the module
will be unchanged from previous values. In this example, Counter 2 is disabled and
its outputs and timed assert have not been selected. Registers 400204 - 6 have no
meaning.
After the module executes the Configure and Load Values commands, they are
echoed in the I/O mapped 3X registers except for the command registers low 8 bits.
Command execution time by the module is 1 ms. Actual time between the 4X
register block move and the echo response display in the 3X registers is dependent
on User Logic and hardware configuration. An echo of the Configuration command
registers would appear as follows:
Echo Response
Table
The following table shows the echo response for the configuration command.
Value
300001
0100
300002
0000
300003
3100
300004
0000
300005
0000
300006
744
Register
0000
Read Input
Counter Tables
0300
40302
0000
40303
0000
40304
0000
40305
0000
40306
0000
When this command is issued, the content of the input pulse counter is retrieved.
The 3X register content would appear as follows:
The following table shows the content of the registers.
Register
Value
Description
300001
0300
Command echo
300002
XXXX
300003
0000
Zeros as the count will not exceed 100. For counts above 65,536,
this register is a multiplier. As an example: 30002 has a value of
324 and 30003 a value of 3.The total count is (65,536 x 3) + 324
= 196,932
300004
0000
Counter 2 is disabled
300005
0000
Counter 2 is disabled
300006
0X00
Reset of Latched
Outputs
If register 400103 in the Module Configuration Table has been set to 4200, Output
1A would have been latched on at setpoint and Output 1B latched on at maximum
count. Wiring Diagrams 2 and 4 show how the encoder Z outputs could be used to
reset the latched outputs. The minimum pulse width to reset outputs is 1 ms.
745
User Logic
746
The User Logic illustrated accomplishes the modules configuration and then cause
the input counter to be displayed after the first three successive scans by the PLC
when it is in RUN mode.
400101
000010
000010
400001
BLKM
#00006
000010
Load Values
P
400201
000011
400001
BLKM
#00006
Read Counter
P
400301
000012
400001
BLKM
#00006
#00256
TEST
#00001
Configuration Done
000011
#00512
TEST
#00001
747
COUNT DOWN
Example
The COUNT DOWN example uses the same wiring as in the count up example,
except the Input 1B+ level is changed to common (connected to Vref-) for Pulse
Inputs illustrated in Wiring Diagrams 1 and 2. For Quadrature Inputs, no wiring
change is required as the count direction is decoded internally by sensing the phase
shift change between inputs A and B.
The User Logic is the same as for the count example. The actual operation of the
module is different in that the output associated with maximum count turns on after
zero count has been reached.
The example configures the module to decrement the input count from the maximum
value, turn on an output at a setpoint value of 50, and turn on a second output after
the input counter had reached zero and rolled over to the maximum count; the
operation is then repeated. The initial loading of the maximum count will not cause
its associated output to turn on.
RATE SAMPLE
Example for
Either Pulse or
Quadrature Input
Field connections for this example are illustrated in Wiring Diagrams1-4. The
connections on terminals 15 and 16 are optional, depending on the use
requirements of the outputs. Terminals 39 and 40 always require the 24 Vdc supply
connections. The maximum allowable Vref value is 30 Vdc. Input pulse on-off
threshold levels for the 5 ... 24 Vdc Vref range are listed in the module specification
table. The minimum differential input is 1.8 V.
As with count examples, tables are set up and transferred to the module using block
moves. The User Logic for Rate Sample is the same as that used for Pulse Input
Count Up/Down.
Module
Configuration
Table
400102 1000
400103 0000
400104 0000
400105 0000
400106 0000
748
Load Values
Table
400202 XXXX
400203 0000
400204 0000
400205 0000
400206 0000
Note: Command echoes are the same as described in the Pulse Input Count Up/
Down examples.
749
Read Rate
Sample Table
400302 0000
400303 0000
400304 0000
400305 0000
400306 0000
When this command is issued, the input pulse counter content is retrieved. The 3X
register content is the count over the time period selected in the Load Values
registers 4X + 1 and 4X + 2. The 3X response to the Read-Rate Sample command
in register 40301 is as follows.
The following table shows the responses to the read rate sample command.
Register
Description
300001
0400
Command echo
300002
XXXX
300003
XXXX
300004
0000
Counter 2 is disabled
300005
0000
Counter 2 is disabled
300006
750
Value
0X00
Rate Sample
Mode Caution
If a version 02.00 or higher module replaces a module which has a version number
less than 02.00 in a Rate Sample mode application, extra software configuration
may be required.
Rate Sample mode is set using Command 1, CONFIGURE (01XX), 4X+1 register,
bit 13 = 1 (see the description of Command 1 in this section).
Note: To verify the version of the module, reference the indicated label found on
the top front of the module.
The following figure shows the modules label.
In modules prior to V02.00, when Rate Sample mode was selected, input was
always handled as if it were generated by a pulse encoder. For example, 60 count
per revolution encoders, either pulse or quadrature types, would give a rate of 60 for
a one-second revolution when the interval was set for one second.
Users are cautioned that beginning with V2.00 modules, if a quadrature type
encoder is used to provide count input and Pulse/Quadrature Input Counter 1 and
2, bits 9 or 10, are set to 1, the module will detect all edges. The result is four times
the rate sample value as would be accumulated with an equivalent pulse encoder
input. In the example in the above paragraph, the rate sample would be equal to
240.
Encoder type selection is set using Command 1, CONFIGURE (01XX), 4X+1
register, bits 9 or 10 (see the description of Command 1 in this section).
If the Encoder Type select bits are set to 0, either type of encoder will produce the
Rate Sample, as did versions of the module that were lower than V02.00.
751
Wiring Diagram 1
Figure
......
INPUT 1A-
OUTPUT
RESET 10-
N/C
VREF
OV
INPUT 1A+
ENABLE 1N/C
OUTPUT 1A
LO FILTER SEL 1
N/C
Pulse
PRESET 1C+
OUTPUT
RESET 10+
10
N/C
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
PRESET 1C-
INPUT 1B+
22
INPUT 1B-
PRESET 2COUTPUT
RESET 20N/C
ENABLE 2-
N/C
OUTPUT 2A
LO FILTER SEL 2
39
ENABLE 1+
N/C
OUTPUT 1B
VREF1
VREF
N/C
INPUT 2A+
INPUT 2B+
PRESET 2C+
OUTPUT
RESET 20+
N/C
ENABLE 2+
POWER SUPPLY
N/C
OUTPUT 2B
VREF2
RETURN
+
24 Vdc
752
l
l
l
l
l
l
753
Wiring Diagram 2
Figure
Z
INPUT 1AINPUT 1BPRESET 1C-
OUTPUT
RESET 10-
N/C
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
33
36
35
38
37
40
1.8 VMIN
PRESET 1C+
31
34
A+
A-
INPUT B1+
17
20
A
A
INPUT 1A+
39
OUTPUT
RESET 10+
+
VREF
-
ENABLE 1N/C
OUTPUT 1A
LO FILTER SEL 1
N/C
PRESET 2COUTPUT
RESET 20N/C
ENABLE 2-
N/C
OUTPUT 2A
LO FILTER SEL 2
ENABLE 1+
N/C
OUTPUT 1B
VREF1
N/C
N/C
INPUT 2A+
INPUT 2B+
PRESET 2C+
OUTPUT
RESET 20+
N/C
ENABLE 2+
POWER SUPPLY
N/C
OUTPUT 2B
VREF2
RETURN
+
24 Vdc
754
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
755
Wiring Diagram 3
Figure
INPUT 1A-
PRESET 1COUTPUT
RESET 10N/C
ENABLE 1N/C
OUTPUT 1A
LO FILTER SEL 1
N/C
INPUT 2AINPUT 2BPRESET 2COUTPUT
RESET 20N/C
ENABLE 2-
N/C
OUTPUT 2A
LO FILTER SEL 2
4
6
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
17
20
INPUT 1A+
40
INPUT 1B-
39
INPUT 1B+
PRESET 1C+
RESET 10+
+
N/C
VREF
ENABLE 1+
N/C
OUTPUT 1B
VREF1
N/C
INPUT 2B+
PRESET 2C+
OUTPUT
RESET 20+
N/C
ENABLE 2+
POWER SUPPLY
N/C
OUTPUT 2B
VREF2
RETURN
+
24 Vdc
756
l
l
l
l
l
Quadrature input.
Constant enable.
Outputs 1A and 1B operate relays.
Counter 2 not used
N/C = Not Connected.
757
Wiring Diagram 4
INPUT
INPUT 1BPRESET 1C-
3
5
N/C
10
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
33
36
35
38
37
40
PRESET 1C+
31
34
INPUT B1+
B Z
17
20
A
A
39
OUTPUT
RESET 10+
+
OUTPUT
RESET 10-
INPUT 1A+
ENABLE 1N/C
OUTPUT 1A
LO FILTER SEL 1
N/C
PRESET 2COUTPUT
RESET 20N/C
ENABLE 2-
N/C
OUTPUT 2A
LO FILTER SEL 2
ENABLE 1+
VREF
N/C
OUTPUT 1B
VREF1
N/C
N/C
INPUT 2A+
INPUT 2B+
PRESET 2C+
OUTPUT
RESET 20+
N/C
ENABLE 2+
POWER SUPPLY
N/C
OUTPUT 2B
VREF2
RETURN
+
24 Vdc
758
l
l
l
l
l
l
759
Module Zoom
Selections
Incremental
Quadrature
2x16 w/ Output
2x32 w/ Output
2x32 No Output
Rate Sample Mode
Off
On
Setpoint
Latched Setpoint
Terminal Count
Latched Terminal
Timed Setpoint
Timed Terminal
The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 2x16, Output Assert Mode:
Counter X Maximum Count:
* 0 DEC
* 0 DEC
*Refer to Load Values Command section, earlier in this section, for the maximum
values that may be used by the module.
The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 1x32, Output Assert Mode:
Counter 2 Maximum Count:
* 0 DEC
* 0 DEC
*Refer to Load Values Command section for the maximum values that may be used
by the module.
The following figure shows the number of counters in output assertion.
Number of counters, output assertion:
The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 2x32, No Output Assert Mode:
Words 2-3: Counter 1 Maximum Count:
* 0 DEC
* 0 DEC
*Refer to Load Values Command section for the maximum values that may be used
by the module.
The next line applies ONLY IF the counter is in Rate Sample Mode:
Rate Sample Timer X: 0 DEC milliseconds (65535 maximum)
Note: Any "Number of counters, output assertion" selection pop-up menu can be
used as they reflect each other.
761
Battery Module
Overview
The following provides information on the Battery module, 140 XCP 900 00 (Battery
Backup).
The two least significant bits in the I/O Map status byte are used as follows:
The following figure shows the status byte register.
8
1
Bat1 Low
Bat2 Low
Module Zoom
Selections
762
CableFast Cabling
At a Glance
Introduction
Whats in this
chapter?
Page
764
771
776
784
797
803
810
823
835
Appendix F10 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block (140 CFJ 004 00)
845
Appendix F11 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block (140 CFK 004 00)
864
855
CableFast Cables
870
763
CableFast Cabling
764
The CableFast wiring system consists of pre-wired Quantum field wiring terminal
strips, available in various cable lengths that are terminated with "D" type
connectors. The "D" connectors plug into DIN rail-mounted terminal blocks offered
in straight through or special application versions. Cables and terminal blocks are
ordered separately and all terminal blocks may be used with any cable length. Pigtail
cable versions are also available.
CableFast Cabling
The following figure shows the Quantum modules and backplane components.
AEG AEG
AEG AEG
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
2A82
Wiring
Panduit
AEG AEG
MODICON
2A81
Quantum
Modules and
Backplane
Figure
MODICON
CableFast Cables
Wiring
Panduit
CableFast Terminal
Blocks on DIN Rails
1A79
1A80
Note: Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft. cables.
765
CableFast Cabling
Specifications
Table
Number of Wires
#24
#22
#18
#16
#14
#12
M3
Captive
94 V-2
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Altitude
Shock
Vibration
Mounting Configuration
766
CableFast Cabling
Terminal Block
Selection Guide
Use this table to select valid combinations of Quantum I/O modules and CableFast
terminal blocks.
140
140
CFA
CFB
040 00 032 00
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
CFC
CFD
CFE
CFG
CFH
CFI
CFJ
CFK
032 00 004 00 032 00 016 00 008 00 008 00 004 00 004
00
X
X
X
X
767
CableFast Cabling
X = Valid Selections. = Limited to 0.5 A perpoint. *Limited to 0.5 A per point, 150 Vac/150 Vdc maximum.
Note: 1. When using the 140 CFA 040 00 terminal block, the indicated module
outputs are limited to 0.5 A per point, 150 Vac maximim. 2. When using the 140
CFG 016 00 terminal bloack and the 140 XTS 012 xx high power cable, the
indicated module output ratings are 2 A per point, 150 Vac maximum and 2 A per
point, 150 Vdc maximum.
768
CableFast Cabling
CableFast
Terminal Blocks
The following includes descriptions for the terminal blocks discussed in this
Appendix.
This table includes descriptions for the following terminal blocks.
Block Number
The B block is used for individually fused 2-wire digital inputs. This
terminal block is designed to prevent a single point failure from
affecting the remaining inputs. It is not recommended for sourced 1wire inputs (powered from the field).
The H block is used for analog inputs, with individual fusing provided
per channel. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power
supply interface for both field and loop power configurations.
The I block is used for analog inputs. This interface provides plus,
minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop
power configurations.
The J block is used for analog outputs, with individual fusing provided
per channel. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power
supply interface for both field and loop power configurations.
Block Description
The K block is used for analog outputs. This interface provides plus,
minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field and loop
power configurations.
769
CableFast Cabling
CableFast
Terminal Block
Features
UL component
recognized.
SHIELD
CableFast t
140 CFA 040 00
UL FILE E123528
CableFast
Terminal Block
Stacking
Convention
The following figure and table show the stacking convention used by CableFast
terminal blocks.
Layer 3
Layer 2
Layer 1
Signal
Positive
Negative
770
Signal
Positive
Layer 3
Signal Layer 2
Negative Layer 1
CableFast Cabling
Quantum
Modules and
Backplane
Figure
The following figure shows the Quantum modules and backplane components.
AEG AEG
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
AEG AEG
MODICON
2A81
AEG AEG
2A82
Wiring
Panduit
MODICON
CableFast Cables
Wiring
Panduit
CableFast Terminal
Blocks on DIN Rails
1A79
1A80
Note: Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft. cables.
771
CableFast Cabling
Specifications
Table
Number of Wires
#24
#22
#18
#16
#14
#12
M3
Captive
94 V-2
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Altitude
Shock
Vibration
Mounting Configuration
772
CableFast Cabling
Terminal Block
The following figure shows the terminal block for the 140 CFA 040 00 module.
A standard 50 pin D connector.
UL component
recognized.
SHIELD
CableFast t
140 CFA 004 00
UL FILE E123528
Terminal Block
Stacking
Convention
The following figure and table show the stacking convention used by CableFast
terminal blocks.
Layer 3
Layer 2
Layer 1
Signal
Positive
Negative
Signal
Positive
Layer 3
Signal Layer 2
Negative Layer 1
773
CableFast Cabling
CFA 040 00
Terminal Block
CableFast t
140 CFA 004 00
UL FILE E123528
Application
Notes
The following are the application notes for the 140 CFA 040 00 terminal block.
Note: This terminal block can be used with all Quantum I/O modules with the
exception of the 140 ATI 030 00 Thermocouple Module.
Dimensions of
the Terminal
Block
The following figures show the dimensions of the 140 CFA 040 00 terminal block.
VD-VC- VB-VA-
VD-VC- VB-VA-
32 31 30
32-31-30-
29 28 27
26 25
29-28-27- 26-25-
24 23 22
21 20 19
18 17
16-15-14-
13 12 11
10 9
13-12-11- 10- 9-
8 7 6
8- 7- 6-
5 4 3
5- 4- 3-
2 1
2- 1-
2.9 in
(73.7
8.0 in
774
16 15 14
3.0 in
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Figure
The following figure shows the wiring for the CFA 040 00 module.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
22
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
775
CableFast Cabling
776
The B block is used for individually fused 2-wire digital inputs. This terminal block is
designed to prevent a single point failure from affecting the remaining inputs. It is not
recommended for sourced 1-wire inputs (powered from the field).
CableFast Cabling
AEG AEG
AEG AEG
AEG AEG
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
2A82
Wiring
Panduit
MODICON
MODICON
2A81
Quantum
Modules and
Backplane
Figure
MODICON
CableFast Cables
Wiring
Panduit
CableFast Terminal
Blocks on DIN Rails
1A79
1A80
Note: Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft. cables.
777
CableFast Cabling
Specifications
Table
Number of Wires
#24
#22
#18
#16
#14
#12
M3
Captive
94 V-2
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Altitude
Shock
Vibration
Mounting Configuration
778
CableFast Cabling
The following figure shows the terminal block for the 140 CFB 032 00 module.
GROUP D
GROUP C
GROUP B
GROUP A
24
20
16
12
31
27
23
19
15
11
30
26
22
18
14
10
29
25
21
17
13
UL FILE E123528
28
TM
32
CableFast
140 CFB 032 00
Terminal Block
SHIELD
Application
Notes
The following are the application notes for the 140 CFB 032 00 terminal block.
l Configuration - Arranged in four groups of eight I/O points. Two terminals per
point prevent disruption of service due to a single point failure.
l This terminal block provides individual 32 point 0.8 A fusing for the following input
modules:140 DAI 353 00, 140 DAI 453 00, 140 DAI 553 00, 140 DDO 153 10,
140 DDI 353 00, and 140 DDI 853 00.
Dimensions
The following figures show the dimensions for the 140 CFB 032 00 terminal block.
VD+VC+ VB+VA+
VD-VC- VB-VA-
32 31 30
29 28 27 26 25
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
16 15 14
13 12 11 10 9
8 7 6
5 4
8 + 7+ 6+ 5 + 4 + 3+ 2+ 1+
3.3 in
(83.8
9.3 in
4.4 in
(111.8
779
CableFast Cabling
The following figure shows the 140 CFB 032 00 wiring for the following input
modules: 140 DAI 353 00, 140 DAI 453 00, 140 DAI 553 00, 140 DDI 353 00, and
140 DDI 853 00.
F1
0.8 A
Field Side
Connections
1+
2+
3+
4+
5+
6+
7+
8+
9+
10+
11+
12
12+
13
13+
14
14+
15
15+
16
16+
17
17+
18
18+
19
19+
20
20+
21
21+
22
22+
23
23+
24
24+
25
25+
26
26+
27
27+
28
28+
29
29+
30
30+
31
31+
32
32+
GROUP D
11
GROUP
10
GROUP B
GROUP
Module
Input 1
Group A Power
Module
Group A
Supply
Module
Group A
Common
VA-
VA+
VB+
VB- Group B
VB+
VC+
VC- Group C
VD- Group D
VC+
VD+
780
VA+
VD+
VA VB -
VC VD -
CableFast Cabling
Note: The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon # 140 CFX 002 10 (Qty. 10)
can be used to jumper the power between groups.
781
CableFast Cabling
The following figure shows the 140 CFB 032 00 wiring for the 140 DDO 153 10
output module.
Field Side
Connections
Module
Output 1
1
2
2+
Module
Output 4
3+
4+
Module
Output 5
5+
6+
7+
8+
F1 0.8 A
15+
16
16+
17
17+
18
18+
19
19+
20
20+
21
21+
22
22+
23
23+
24
24+
25
25+
26
26+
27
27+
28
28+
29
29+
30
30+
31
31+
32
32+
Group A Power
VA+
VB+
VC+
VD+
782
GROUP D
14+
15
GROUP C
13+
14
GROUP B
11+
12+
10+
13
GROUP A
9+
10
12
Module
Group A
Common
9
11
Module
Output 7
Module
Group A
Supply
TTL Inverter
1+
+
VAVB- Group B Power
VC- Group C Power
VD- Group D Power
CableFast Cabling
Note: The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon # 140 CFX 002 10 (Qty. 10)
can be used to jumper the power between groups.
783
CableFast Cabling
784
The C block provides connections for 32 group fused input or output points. The
block may be used for 1- or 2-wire inputs or outputs, and features a fuse per group
four groups total. Users select input or output mode via four switches located on
the module. (The default is input mode.)
CableFast Cabling
Quantum
Modules and
Backplane
Figure
AEG AEG
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
AEG AEG
MODICON
2A81
AEG AEG
2A82
Wiring
Panduit
MODICON
CableFast Cables
Wiring
Panduit
CableFast Terminal
Blocks on DIN Rails
1A79
1A80
Note: Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft. cables.
785
CableFast Cabling
Specifications
Table
Number of Wires
#24
#22
#18
#16
#14
#12
M3
Captive
94 V-2
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Altitude
Shock
Vibration
Mounting Configuration
786
CableFast Cabling
Terminal Block
The following figure shows the terminal block for the 140 CFC 032 00 module.
B
+
Application
Notes
Groups A B C D
SHIELD
CableFastTM
140 CFC 032 00
UL FILE E123528
The following are the applicaiton notes for the 140 CFC 032 00 module.
l Configuration Arranged in four groups of eight I/O points (two terminals per
point). This block may be used for one- and two-wire inputs or outputs. The input
and output mode is selected via four switches located on the block.
l Module Compatibility This terminal block provides 0.8 A group fusing for the
following discrete modules:
The following table shows the modules provided with 0.8 A group fusing.
Module
Mode
Switch Setting
Fuse Rating
Input
0.8 A
Input
0.8 A
Input
0.8 A
Input
0.8 A
Input
0.8 A
Input
0.8 A
Output
4A
Output
4A
Note: Select input or output mode with the four switches located on the terminal.
787
CableFast Cabling
Dimensions
The following figures show the dimensions for the 140 CFC 032 00 terminal block
block. All four switches must be set to the same position.
VD-VC- VB-VA-
VD-VC- VB-VA-
32 31 30
32-31-30-
29 28 27
26 25
29-28-27- 26-25-
24 23 22
21 20 19
18 17
16-15-14-
13 12 11
10 9
13-12-11- 10- 9-
8 7 6
8- 7- 6-
5 4 3
5- 4- 3-
2 1
2- 1-
2.9 in
(73.7 mm)
8.0 in
788
16 15 14
3.0 in
(76.2
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram 1
The following shows the 140 CFC 032 00 wring for the following input modules: 140
DAI 353 00, 140 DAI 453 00, 140 DAI 553 00, 140 DDI 353 00, and 140 DDI 853 00.
Field Side
Connections
2+/-
3+/-
4
5
Module
Input 1
4+/-
5+/6+/-
7
8
7+/8+/-
9+/-
10
10+/11+/-
12
12+/-
13
13+/-
14
14+/-
15
15+/-
16
16+/-
17
17+/-
18
19
18+/-
20
20+/-
21
22
21+/-
23
23+/-
19+/-
Module
Group B
Common
- +
27+/-
28
28+/-
29
29+/-
30
30+/31+/32+/-
VA+
VA-
FB 0.8A
Group A
Power
+ Group B
VBPower
VCGroup C Power
VD- Group D Power
-
VB+
VC+
Module
GROUP
B
+/-
26+/-
32
FA
Module
26
31
- +
25+/-
27
A
+/-
24+/-
25
GROUP
22+/-
24
Module
Group A
Common
Typical 1 - wire
configuration
GROUP
9
11
Module Input 9
Module Input 10
Typical 2 - wire
configuration
1+/-
GROUP
VD+
VA+
VB+
VC+
VD+
VA VB -
VC VD -
AC Input Module
789
CableFast Cabling
Note: The terminal block commoning strip, Modion # 140 CFX 002 10 (Qty. 10),
can be used to jumper the power between groups.
790
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram 2
The following figure shows the 140 CFC 032 00 wiring for the 140 DDI 153 10 input
module.
Field Side
Connections
3+/4+/5+/-
6+/-
7+/-
8
Module Input 9
3
5
Module Input 7
2+/-
Module Input 1
1+/-
8+/-
TTL
GROUP A
9+/-
11
21+/-
22
22+/-
23
23+/-
24
24+/-
25
25+/-
26
26+/-
27
27+/-
28
28+/-
29
29+/-
30
30+/-
31
31+/-
32
32+/-
VA+
VA-
VB+
VB-
VC+
Open
Collector
GROUP C
GROUP D
20+/-
21
Module
19+/-
20
FB 0.8A
18+/-
19
- +
17+/-
18
Module
Group B
Common
16+/-
17
B
+/-
15+/-
16
FA 0.8A
14+/-
15
Module
13+/-
14
- +
12+/-
13
Module
Group A
Common
11+/-
12
A
+/-
10+/GROUP B
10
Group A
Power
Group B
Power
VD+
791
CableFast Cabling
792
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram 3
The following figure shows the 140 CFC 032 00 wiring for the 140 DDO 153 10
output module.
Field Side
Connections
1+/-
2+/-
3+/-
4+/-
5+/-
Modul Output 6
6+/-
Module Output 7
7+/-
TTL Inverter
8+/-
Module Output 1
GROUP A
20+/-
21
21+/-
22
22+/-
23
23+/-
24
24+/-
25
25+/-
26
26+/-
27
27+/-
28
28+/-
29
29+/-
30
30+/-
31
31+/-
32
32+/-
VA+
VA-
VB+
VB-
VC+
VD+
GROUP B
18+/-
20
19+/GROUP C
GROUP D
17+/-
18
19
FB 4A
16+/-
17
- +
15+/-
16
Module
Group B
Common
Module
Group B
Supply
14+/-
15
B
+/-
13+/-
14
FA 4A
12+/-
13
- +
11+/-
12
Module
Group A
Common
Module
Group A
Supply
10+/-
11
A
+/-
9+/-
10
Module Output 9
Group A
Power
Group B
Power
793
CableFast Cabling
794
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram 4
The following figure shows the 140 CFC 032 00 wiring for the 140 DDO 353 00
output module.
Field Side
Connections
1+/-
2+/-
3+/-
4+/-
5+/-
6+/-
Module
Output 1
7+/-
9+/10+/11+/-
12
12+/-
13
13+/-
14
14+/-
15
15+/-
16
16+/-
17
17+/-
18
18+/-
19
19+/-
20
20+/-
21
21+/-
22
22+/-
23
23+/-
FA 4A
B
+/-
Module
Group B
Common
26+/27+/-
28
28+/-
29
29+/-
30
30+/-
31
- +
26
31+/-
32
Module
Group A
Common
Module
Group A
Supply
25+/-
27
A
+/-
32+/-
VA+
VA-
3/4A
24+/-
25
VC+
- +
FB 4A
Module
Group B
Supply
Typical 1 - wire
configuration
GROUP D
24
3/4A
GROUP C
10
11
Module Output
Modul Output
8+/-
GROUP B
Typical 2 - wire
configuration
3/4A
GROUP A
Group A
Power
VBGroup B
VC- Group C Power Power
VD+
VB+
795
CableFast Cabling
796
CableFast Cabling
The D block is used for sensors requiring either 2- or 3-wire electrical interfaces. A
fuse per group is supplied to accommodate the I/O module (4) groups.
Quantum
Modules and
Backplane
Figure
AEG AEG
AEG AEG
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
2A81
AEG AEG
2A82
Wiring
Panduit
MODICON
CableFast Cables
Wiring
Panduit
CableFast Terminal
Blocks on DIN Rails
1A79
1A80
Note: Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft. cables.
797
CableFast Cabling
Specifications
Table
Number of Wires
#24
#22
#18
#16
#14
#12
M3
Captive
94 V-2
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Altitude
Shock
Vibration
Mounting Configuration
798
CableFast Cabling
Terminal Block
Selection Guide
Use this table to select valid combinations of Quantum I/O modules and CableFast
terminal blocks.
140
140
140
CFA
CFB
CFC
040 00 032 00 032 00
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
CFD
CFE
CFG
CFH
CFI
CFJ
CFK
004 00 032 00 016 00 008 00 008 00 004 00 004
00
X
X
X
X
799
CableFast Cabling
X = Valid Selections. = Limited to 0.5 A perpoint. *Limited to 0.5 A per point, 150 Vac/150 Vdc maximum.
Terminal Block
The following figure shows the 140 CFD 032 00 terminal block.
CableFastTM
140 CFD 032 00
A
SHIELD
CableFast
Terminal Block
Stacking
Convention
B
D
UL FILE E123528
The following figure and table show the stacking convention used by CableFast
terminal blocks.
Layer 3
Layer 2
Layer 1
Signal
Positive
Negative
800
Signal
Positive
Layer 3
Signal Layer 2
Negative Layer 1
CableFast Cabling
Application
Notes
The following are the application notes for the 140 CFD 032 00 module.
l Compatibility This terminal block provides 0.8 A group fusing connection points
for 3-wire and 2-wire proximity switches and is used with the following modules:
140 DAI 353 00, 140 DAI 453 00, 140 DAI 553 00, 140 DDI 353 00, and 140 DDI
853 00.
Dimensions
The following shows the dimensions for the 140 CFD 032 00 module.
VD+VC+ VB+VA+
VD-VC- VB-VA-
VD-VC- VB-VA-
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
32+31+30+ 29+28+27+26+25+
32-31-30-
29-28-27- 26-25-
8.0 in
16-15-14-
13-12-11- 10- 9-
8 7 6
5 4 3
8+ 7+ 6+ 5+ 4+ 3+ 2+ 1+
8- 7- 6-
2.9 in
(73.7 mm)
5- 4- 3- 2- 1-
3.0 in
801
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows the wiring for the 140 CFD 032 00 module.
Field Side
Connections
GROUP A
1
3+
3-
PROX
4+
4-
5+
5-
PROX
6+
6-
2 Wire Sensor
7+
7-
PROX
8+
8-
9+
9-
10
10+
10-
11
11+
11-
12
12+
12-
13
13+
13-
14
14+
14-
15
15+
15-
16
16+
16-
17
17+
17-
18
18+
18-
19
19+
19-
20
20+
20-
21
21+
21-
22
22+
22-
23
23+
23-
24
24+
24-
25
25+
25-
26
26+
26-
27
27+
27-
28
28+
28-
29
29+
29-
30
30+
30-
31
31+
31-
32
32+
32-
VA -
GND
VB -
GND
VC -
GND
VD -
GND
Group A Power
Module Group A
Common
Module Group A
Supply
(See Note 2)
3 Wire Sensor
GROUP D
PROX
2-
GROUP C
1-
2+
GROUP B
1+
Module Input
Module Input
Module Input
Module Input
Module Input
Module Input
Module Input
Module Input
VA+
FA .8A
VB+
VC+
VD+
DC Input Module
+
VA+
Group B Power
Group C Power
Group D Power
VB+
VC+
VD+
VA -
GND
VB -
GND
VC -
GND
VD -
GND
802
CableFast Cabling
Note: 1. The GND (ground) terminal points are not connected. 2. The terminal
block commoning strip, Modicon # 140 CFX 002 10 (Qty. 10), can be used to
jumper the power between groups.
The E block provides connections for 32 individually fused 24 Vdc outputs. 1- and
2-wire interfacing may be selected. Field power must be supplied to the four groups.
803
CableFast Cabling
AEG AEG
AEG AEG
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
2A82
Wiring
Panduit
AEG AEG
MODICON
2A81
Quantum
Modules and
Backplane
Figure
MODICON
CableFast Cables
Wiring
Panduit
CableFast Terminal
Blocks on DIN Rails
1A79
1A80
Note: Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft. cables.
804
CableFast Cabling
Specifications
Table
Number of Wires
#24
#22
#18
#16
#14
#12
M3
Captive
94 V-2
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Altitude
Shock
Vibration
Mounting Configuration
805
CableFast Cabling
Terminal Block
Selection Guide
Use this table to select valid combinations of Quantum I/O modules and CableFast
terminal blocks.
140
140
140
CFA
CFB
CFC
040 00 032 00 032 00
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
CFD
CFE
CFG
CFH
CFI
CFJ
CFK
004 00 032 00 016 00 008 00 008 00 004 00 004
00
X
X
806
CableFast Cabling
X = Valid Selections. = Limited to 0.5 A perpoint. *Limited to 0.5 A per point, 150 Vac/150 Vdc maximum.
The following figure shows the 140 CFE 032 00 terminal block.
GROUP D
GROUP C
GROUP B
GROUP A
24
20
16
12
31
27
23
19
15
11
30
26
22
18
14
10
29
25
21
17
13
UL FILE E123528
28
TM
32
CableFast
140 CFB 032 00
Terminal Block
SHIEL
CableFast
Terminal Block
Stacking
Convention
The following figure and table show the stacking convention used by CableFast
terminal blocks.
Layer 3
Layer 2
Layer 1
Signal
Positive
Negative
Signal
Positive
Layer 3
Signal Layer 2
Negative Layer 1
807
CableFast Cabling
Application
Notes
The following are the application notes for the 140 CFE 032 00 module.
l Arranged in four groups of eight I/O points. Two terminals per point prevent
disruption of service due to a single point failure.
l This terminal block provides individual 32 point 0.8 A fusing for the 140 DDO 353
00 module.
Dimensions
The following shows the dimensions for the 140 CFE 032 00 module.
VD+VC+ VB+VA+
VD-VC- VB-VA-
32 31 30
29 28 27 26 25
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
16 15 14
13 12 11 10 9
8 7 6
4 3
8 + 7+ 6+ 5 + 4 + 3+ 2+ 1+
3.3 in
(83.8
9.3 in
808
4.4 in
(111.8
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
The following figure shows the wiring for the 140 CFE 032 00 module.
Field Side
Connections
Module
Output 1
1+/2+/3+/4+/5+/6+/7+/8+/-
11+/13+/14+/15+/-
16
16+/-
17
17+/-
18
18+/-
19
19+/-
20
20+/-
21
21+/-
22
22+/-
23
23+/-
26+/-
27
27+/-
28
28+/-
29
29+/-
30
30+/-
31
Module
Group A
Common
25+/-
26
31+/-
32
32+/-
VA+
VA-
24+/-
25
24
GROUP C
12+/-
13
Typical 1 - wire
configuration
GROUP B
12
15
F10 0.8A
9+/10+/-
14
Module
Output 10
F9 0.8A
10
11
Module
Output 9
Typical 2 - wire
configuration
GROUP A
F1 0.8A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Module
Group A Supply
VC+
Group A
Power
VBGroup B
VC- Group C Power Power
Module
Group B Common
Module
Group B Supply
VB+
VD+
809
CableFast Cabling
Note: The terminal block commoning strip, Modicon #140 CFX 002 10 (QTY. 10),
can be used to jumper the power between groups.
810
The G block is a high-power output block used on both AC and DC circuits requiring
up to 2 A. Individual fusing is provided and may be used in both 1- and 2-wire
installations. It is also used for isolated AC modules.
CableFast Cabling
AEG AEG
AEG AEG
AEG AEG
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
2A82
Wiring
Panduit
MODICON
MODICON
2A81
Quantum
Modules and
Backplane
Figure
MODICON
CableFast Cables
Wiring
Panduit
CableFast Terminal
Blocks on DIN Rails
1A79
1A80
Note: Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft. cables.
811
CableFast Cabling
Specifications
Table
Number of Wires
#24
#22
#18
#16
#14
#12
M3
Captive
94 V-2
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Altitude
Shock
Vibration
Mounting Configuration
812
CableFast Cabling
Terminal Block
Selection Guide
Use this table to select valid combinations of Quantum I/O modules and CableFast
terminal blocks.
140
140
140
CFA
CFB
CFC
040 00 032 00 032 00
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
CFD
CFE
CFG
CFH
CFI
CFJ
CFK
004 00 032 00 016 00 008 00 008 00 004 00 004
00
X
X
X
X
813
CableFast Cabling
X = Valid Selections. = Limited to 0.5 A perpoint. *Limited to 0.5 A per point, 150 Vac/150 Vdc maximum.
The following figure shows the 140 CFG 016 00 terminal block.
13
10
14
11
12
15
SHIELD
CableFast
Terminal Block
Stacking
Convention
UL FILE E123528
Terminal Block
The following figure and table show the stacking convention used by CableFast
terminal blocks.
Layer 3
Layer 2
Layer 1
Signal
Positive
Negative
814
Signal
Positive
Layer 3
Signal Layer 2
Negative Layer 1
CableFast Cabling
Application
Notes
The following are the application notes for the 140 CFG 016 00 module.
Dimensions
The following figures show the dimensions for the 140 CFG 016 00 module.
V8+ 8- 8+ S8
V4+ 4- 4+ S4
V8+ 8- 8+ S8
V8+ 8- 8+ S8 V7+7-7+
V4+ 4- 4+ S4 V3+3-3+
S7 V6+ 6- 6+S6-V5+
5- 5+ S5
S3 V2+ 2- 2+S2-V1+ 1- 1+ S1
V8+ 8- 8+ S8 V7+7-7+
S7 V6+ 6- 6+S6-V5+
5- 5+ S5
2.4 in
(61.0 mm)
5.8 in
(147.3 mm)
4.4 in
(111.8 mm)
815
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram 1
The following figure shows the 140 CFG 016 00 wiring for the input (isolated AC
input mode) modules: 140 DAI 340 00, 140 DAI 440 00, and 140 DAI 540 00.
F1 4A
Module
Input 1
Module
Return 1
Field Side
Connections
VA-
5 5 +/-
VB-
6 6 +/-
VB-
7 7 +/-
VB-
8 8 +/-
VB-
9 9 +/-
VC-
10 10 +/-
VC-
11 11 +/-
VC-
12 12 +/-
VC-
13 13 +/-
VD-
14 14 +/-
VD-
15 15 +/-
VD-
16 16 +/-
VD-
VA+ VA-
GND
VC+ VC-
GND
VD+ VD-
816
GND
VB+ VB-
GROUP D
VA-
4 4 +/-
GROUP C
VA-
3 3 +/-
GROUP B
2 2 +/-
VAGROUP A
1 1 +/-
GND
CableFast Cabling
817
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram 2
The following shows the 140 CFG 016 00 wiring for the 140 DAO 840 00 output
module (isolated output mode).
F1 4A
Module
Output 1
Module
Output 1 Line
Field Side
Connections
1 1 +/-
VA-
2 2 +/-
VA-
4 4 +/-
VA-
5 5 +/-
VB-
6 6 +/-
VB-
7 7 +/-
VB-
8 8 +/-
VB-
9 9 +/-
VC-
10 10 +/-
VC-
11 11 +/-
VC-
12 12 +/-
VC-
13 13 +/-
VD-
14 14 +/-
VD-
15 15 +/-
VD-
16 16 +/-
VD-
VA+ VA-
GND
VB+ VB-
GND
VC+ VC-
GND
VD+ VD-
818
VA-
3 3 +/-
GND
CableFast Cabling
819
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram 3
The following figure shows the 140 CFG 016 00 wiring for the 140 DA0 842 10 and
140 DAO 842 20 output modules (grouped AC output mode).
Field Side
Connections
Module
Output 1
VA-
4 4 +/-
VA-
5 5 +/-
VB-
6 6 +/-
VB-
7 7 +/-
VB-
8 8 +/-
VB-
9 9 +/-
VC-
10 10 +/-
VC-
11 11 +/-
VC-
12 12 +/-
VC-
13 13 +/-
VD-
14 14 +/-
VD-
15 15 +/-
VD-
16 16 +/-
VD-
F9
F10
GND
Module Group A
Hot
Module Group C
Common
Module Group C
Hot
VB+ VB-
GND
VC+ VC-
GND
VD+ VD-
GND
GROUP
VA+ VA-
Typical 1 - wire
configuration
GROUP
Module Group A
Common
820
GROUP
VA-
GROUP
VA-
3 3 +/-
Module
Output 10
1 1 +/2 2 +/-
Module
Output 9
Typical 2 - wire
configuration
F1
L
N
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram 4
The following figure shows the 140 CFG 016 00 wiring for the 140 DDO 843 00
(grouped DC output mode) module.
Field Side
Connections
F1 4A
1 1 +/-
VA-
3 3 +/-
VA-
4 4 +/-
VA-
5 5 +/-
VB-
6 6 +/-
VB-
7 7 +/-
VB-
8 8 +/-
VB-
9 9 +/-
VC-
10 10 +/-
VC-
11 11 +/-
VC-
12 12 +/-
VC-
13 13 +/-
VD-
14 14 +/-
VD-
15 15 +/-
VD-
16 16 +/-
Module Group A
Common
VA-
2 2 +/-
Module
Output 1
VD-
Group A
Return
F9 4A
Module
Output 9
Module Group B
Common
VA+ VA-
GND
VB+ VB-
GND
VC+ VC-
Module Group A
Supply
GND
Module Group B
Supply
VD+ VD-
Group B
Return
GND
Group A
Supply
Group B
Supply
821
CableFast Cabling
822
CableFast Cabling
The H block is used for analog inputs, with individual fusing provided per channel.
This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interface for both field
and loop power configurations.
823
CableFast Cabling
AEG AEG
AEG AEG
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
2A82
Wiring
Panduit
AEG AEG
MODICON
2A81
Quantum
Modules and
Backplane
Figure
MODICON
CableFast Cables
Wiring
Panduit
CableFast Terminal
Blocks on DIN Rails
1A79
1A80
Note: Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft. cables.
824
CableFast Cabling
Specifications
Table
Number of Wires
#24
#22
#18
#16
#14
#12
M3
Captive
94 V-2
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Altitude
Shock
Vibration
Mounting Configuration
825
CableFast Cabling
Terminal Block
Selection Guide
Use this table to select valid combinations of Quantum I/O modules and CableFast
terminal blocks.
140
140
140
CFA
CFB
CFC
040 00 032 00 032 00
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
CFD
CFE
CFG
CFH
CFI
CFJ
CFK
004 00 032 00 016 00 008 00 008 00 004 00 004
00
X
X
826
CableFast Cabling
X = Valid Selections. = Limited to 0.5 A perpoint. *Limited to 0.5 A per point, 150 Vac/150 Vdc maximum.
Terminal Block
The following figure shows the 140 CFH 008 00 terminal block.
SHIELD
UL FILE E123528
827
CableFast Cabling
CableFast
Terminal Block
Stacking
Convention
The following figure and table show the stacking convention used by CableFast
terminal blocks.
Layer 3
Layer 2
Layer 1
Signal
Positive
Negative
Application
Notes
Signal
Positive
Layer 3
Signal Layer 2
Negative Layer 1
The following are the application notes for the 140 CFH 008 00 module.
l Configuration Eight analog inputs with a common loop supply. Each point is
allocated four terminals.
The following figures show the dimensions for the 140 CFH 008 00 module.
V4+ 4- 4+ S4 V3+3-3+ S3 V2+ 2- 2+S2-V1+ 1- 1+ S1
V+ RET GND
2.3 in
(58.4 mm)
5.0 in
(127.0
828
3.0 in
(76.2 mm)
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
(Source
Grounding)
The following figure shows the wiring for the 140 CFH 008 00 (source grounding)
module.
Field Side
Connections
Jumper
(See jumper information below)
S1
4 - 20 mA
1+
Current IN
Loop Power Required
1V1+
F1
1/16A
Module Input 2 (+)
S2
2+
2-
F2
1/16A
Module Input 3 (+)
V2+
S3
4 - 20 mA
Source
3+
Current IN
Instrument Powered
3-
F3
1/16A
V3+
S4
4+
4V4+
S5
5+
5V5+
S6
6+
6V6+
S7
7+
7V7+
S8
8+
8V8+
GND
RET
V+
829
CableFast Cabling
830
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
(Instrument
Grounding)
The following figure shows the wiring (instrument grounding) for the 140 CFH 008
00 module.
Field Side
Connections
Jumper
(See jumper information below)
S1
4 - 20 mA
1+
Current IN
Loop Power Required
1V1+
F1
1/16A
Module Input 2 (+)
S2
2+
2-
F2
1/16A
Module Input 3 (+)
V2+
S3
4 - 20 mA
Source
3+
Current IN
Instrument Powered
3-
F3
1/16A
V3+
S4
4+
4V4+
S5
5+
5V5+
S6
6+
6V6+
S7
7+
7V7+
S8
8+
8V8+
GND
RET
V+
831
CableFast Cabling
832
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
(Chassis
Grounding)
The following figure shows the wiring (instrument grounding) for the 140 CFH 008
00 module.
Field Side
Connections
Jumper
(See jumper information below)
S1
4 - 20 mA
1+
Current IN
Loop Power Required
1V1+
F1
1/16A
Module Input 2 (+)
S2
2+
2-
F2
1/16A
Module Input 3 (+)
V2+
S3
4 - 20 mA
Source
3+
Current IN
Instrument Powered
3-
F3
1/16A
V3+
S4
4+
4V4+
S5
5+
5V5+
S6
6+
6V6+
S7
7+
7-
Shield
V7+
S8
8+
8V8+
GND
RET
V+
833
CableFast Cabling
l S1 to S2 to S3 to S4 to S5 to S6 to S7 to S8
Note: When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel
isolation of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140 ACI 030 00
and the 140 AVI 030 00, refer to those maps. 3. The GND (ground) terminal point
is not connected.
834
CableFast Cabling
The I block is used for analog inputs. This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and
power supply interfaces for both field and loop power configurations.
Quantum
Modules and
Backplane
Figure
AEG AEG
AEG AEG
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
2A81
AEG AEG
2A82
Wiring
Panduit
MODICON
CableFast Cables
Wiring
Panduit
CableFast Terminal
Blocks on DIN Rails
1A79
1A80
Note: Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft. cables.
835
CableFast Cabling
Specifications
Table
Number of Wires
#24
#22
#18
#16
#14
#12
M3
Captive
94 V-2
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Altitude
Shock
Vibration
Mounting Configuration
836
CableFast Cabling
Terminal Block
Selection Guide
Use this table to select valid combinations of Quantum I/O modules and CableFast
terminal blocks.
140
140
140
CFA
CFB
CFC
040 00 032 00 032 00
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
CFD
CFE
CFG
CFH
CFI
CFJ
CFK
004 00 032 00 016 00 008 00 008 00 004 00 004
00
X
X
X
X
837
CableFast Cabling
X = Valid Selections. = Limited to 0.5 A perpoint. *Limited to 0.5 A per point, 150 Vac/150 Vdc maximum.
Application
Notes
The following are the application notes for the 140 CFI 008 00 module.
l Configuration Eight analog inputs with a common loop supply. Each point is
allocated four terminals.
l Compatibility This terminal block provides eight connection point sets for the
140 ACI 030 00 and 140 AVI 030 00 analog input modules.
Dimensions
The following figures show the dimensions for the 140 CFI 008 00 module.
V4+ 4- 4+ S4 V3+3-3+ S3 V2+ 2- 2+S2-V1+ 1- 1+ S1
V+ RET GND
2.3 in
(58.4 mm)
5.0 in
(127.0
838
3.0 in
(76.2 mm)
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
(Source
Grounding)
The following figure shows the wiring for the140 CFI 008 00 (source grounding)
module.
Field Side
Connections
S1
4 - 20 mA
1+
Current IN
Loop Power Required
1V1+
S2
Voltage
Source
2+
Voltage IN
2V2+
S3
4 - 20 mA
Source
Current IN
Instrument Powered
3+
3V3+
S4
4+
4V4+
S5
5+
5V5+
S6
6+
6V6+
S7
7+
7V7+
S8
8+
8V8+
GND
RET
V+
839
CableFast Cabling
840
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
(Instrument
Grounding)
The following figure shows the wiring for the140 CFI 008 00 (instrument grounding)
module.
Field Side
Connections
Jumper
(See jumper information below)
S1
4 - 20 mA
1+
1-
Current IN
Loop Power Required
V1+
S2
Voltage
Source
2+
Voltage IN
2V2+
S3
4 - 20 mA
Source
3+
Current IN
Instrument Powered
3V3+
S4
4+
4V4+
S5
5+
5V5+
S6
6+
6V6+
S7
7+
7V7+
S8
8+
8V8+
GND
RET
V+
841
CableFast Cabling
842
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
(Chassis
Grounding)
The following figure shows the wiring for the 140 CFI 008 00 (chassis grounding)
module.
Field Side
Connections
Jumper
(See jumper information below)
S1
4 - 20 mA
1+
Current IN
Loop Power Required
1V1+
S2
Voltage
Source
2+
Voltage IN
2V2+
S3
4 - 20 mA
Source
3+
Current IN
Instrument Powered
3V3+
S4
4+
4V4+
S5
5+
5V5+
S6
6+
6V6+
S7
7+
7-
Shield
V7+
S8
8+
8V8+
GND
RET
V+
843
CableFast Cabling
l S1 to S@ to S3 to S4 to S5 to S6 to S7 to S8
Note: When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel
isolation of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140 ACI 030 00
and the 140 AVI 030 00, refer to those maps. 3. The GND (ground) terminal point
is not connected.
844
CableFast Cabling
Appendix F10 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block (140 CFJ 004 00)
Overview
The J block is used for analog outputs, with individual fusing provided per channel.
This interface provides plus, minus, shield, and power supply interfaces for both field
and loop power configurations.
845
CableFast Cabling
AEG AEG
AEG AEG
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
2A82
Wiring
Panduit
AEG AEG
MODICON
2A81
Quantum
Modules and
Backplane
Figure
MODICON
CableFast Cables
Wiring
Panduit
CableFast Terminal
Blocks on DIN Rails
1A79
1A80
Note: Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft. cables.
846
CableFast Cabling
Specifications
Table
Number of Wires
#24
#22
#18
#16
#14
#12
M3
Captive
94 V-2
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Altitude
Shock
Vibration
Mounting Configuration
847
CableFast Cabling
Terminal Block
The following figure shows the 140 CFJ 008 00 terminal block.
UL FILE E123528
SHIELD
Application
Notes
The following are the application notes for the 140 CFJ 004 00 module.
l Configuration Four analog outputs with a common loop supply. Each point is
allocated six terminals.
The following figures show the dimensions for the 140 CFJ 004 00 module.
2-V2-V2+ C02 V02 S2 1-V1-V1+ C01 V01 S1
V+ RET GND
2.3 in
(58.4 mm)
4.3 in
(109.2
848
3.0 in
(76.2 mm)
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
(Source
Grounding)
The following figure shows the wiring for the140 CFJ 004 00 (source grounding)
module.
Field Side
Connections
S1
VO 1
Monitor 1 (+)
Field
Device
CO 1
I Sink 1 (+)
1/16A
F1
Current Out
(Sinking)
V 1+
V 11-
I Source 1 (-)
Jumper
(Modicon # 140 CFX 002 10)
S2
VO 2
Monitor 2 (+)
CO 2
I Sink 2 (+)
1/16A
V 2+
F2
V 22-
I Source 2 (-)
S3
VO 3
Monitor 3 (+)
CO 3
I Sink 3 (+)
1/16A
F3
I Source 3 (-)
V 3+
Jumper
(Modicon #
140 CFX 002 10)
Field
Device
Current Out
(Sourcing)
V 33S4
VO 4
CO 4
V 4+
V 44GND
RET
V+
+
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
849
CableFast Cabling
850
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
(Instrument
Grounding)
The following figure shows the wiring for the140 CFJ 004 00 (instrument grounding).
module.
Jumper
(See jumper information below)
Field Side
Connections
S1
VO 1
Monitor 1 (+)
Field
Device
CO 1
I Sink 1 (+)
1/16A
F1
Current Out
(Sinking)
V 1+
V 11-
I Source 1 (-)
Jumper
S2
VO 2
Monitor 2 (+)
CO 2
I Sink 2 (+)
1/16A
V 2+
F2
V 22-
I Source 2 (-)
S3
VO 3
Monitor 3 (+)
1/16A
F3
I Source 3 (-)
Field
Device
Current Out
(Sourcing)
CO 3
I Sink 3 (+)
V 3+
Jumper
V 33S4
VO 4
CO 4
V 4+
V 44GND
RET
V+
+
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
851
CableFast Cabling
852
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
(Chassis
Grounding)
The following figure shows the wiring for the 140 CFJ 004 00 (chassis grounding)
module.
Jumper
(See jumper information below)
Field Side
Connections
S1
VO 1
Monitor 1 (+)
Field
Device
Current Out
(Sinking)
CO 1
I Sink 1 (+)
1/16A
V 1+
F1
V 11-
I Source 1 (-)
Jumper
S2
VO 2
Monitor 2 (+)
CO 2
I Sink 2 (+)
1/16A
V 2+
F2
V 22-
I Source 2 (-)
S3
VO 3
Monitor 3 (+)
I Sink 3 (+)
1/16A
Shield
V 3+
F3
I Source 3 (-)
Field
Device
Current Out
(Sourcing)
CO 3
V 3-
Jumper
3S4
VO 4
CO 4
V 4+
V 44GND
RET
V+
853
CableFast Cabling
l S1 to S2 to S3 to S4
l V1 to 1l CO3 to VS+
Note: 1. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-to-channel
isolation of input points. 2. For the required jumper options for the 140 ACO 020
00, refer to those maps. 3. The GND (ground) terminal point is not connected.
854
CableFast Cabling
Appendix F11 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block (140 CFK 004 00)
Overview
The K block is used for analog outputs. This interface provides plus, minus, shield,
and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations.
Quantum
Modules and
Backplane
Figure
AEG AEG
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
MODICON
AEG AEG
MODICON
2A81
AEG AEG
2A82
Wiring
Panduit
MODICON
CableFast Cables
Wiring
Panduit
CableFast Terminal
Blocks on DIN Rails
1A79
1A80
Note: Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft. cables.
855
CableFast Cabling
Specifications
Table
Number of Wires
#24
#22
#18
#16
#14
#12
M3
Captive
94 V-2
Temperature
Operating
Storage
Humidity
Altitude
Shock
Vibration
Mounting Configuration
856
CableFast Cabling
Terminal Block
The following figure shows the 140 CFK 004 00 terminal block.
CableFast t
140 CFK 004 00
SHIELD
UL FILE E123528
Application
Notes
The following are the application notes for the 140 CFK 004 00 module.
l Configuration Four analog outputs with a common loop supply. Each point is
allocated four terminals.
The following figures show the dimensions for the 140 CFJ 004 00 module.
2-V2-V2+ C02 V02 S2 1-V1-V1+ C01 V01 S1
V+ RET GND
2.3 in
(58.4 mm)
4.3 in
(109.2
3.0 in
(76.2 mm)
857
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
(Source
Grounding)
The following shows the wiring for the 140 CFJ 004 00 (source grounding) module.
Field Side
Connections
140 ACO 020 00 140 AVO 020 00
Signals
Signals
Monitor 1 (+)
Output 1 (+)
S1
VO 1
Field
Device
140 ACO 020 00
Current Out
(Sinking)
CO 1
I Sink (+)
V 1+
V 1I Source 1 (-)
Common 1 (-)
1-
Jumper
(Modicon # 140 CFX 002 10)
S2
Monitor 2 (+)
Output 2 (+)
VO 2
Field
Device
140 AVO 020 00
Voltage Out
CO 2
I Sink (+) 2
V 2+
V 2I Source 2 (-)
Common 2 (-)
2S3
Monitor 3 (+)
Output 3 (+)
VO 3
CO 3
I Sink (+) 3
V 3+
Jumper
(Modicon # 140
CFX 002 10)
V 3I Source 3 (-)
Common 3 (-)
Field
Device
140 ACO 020 00
Current Out
(Sourcing)
3S4
VO 4
CO 4
V 4+
V 44GND
RET
For 140 ACO 020
00
V+
858
CableFast Cabling
Note: 1. When used with the 140 AVO 020 00 analog voltage out module, the
master override connections and range select must be made on the Quantum I/O
connector. 2. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-tochannel isolation of input points. 3. For the required jumper options for the 140
ACO 020 00, refer to those maps. 4. The GND (ground) terminal point is not
connected.
859
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
(Instrument
Grounding)
The following figure shows the wiring for the 140 CFK 004 00 (instrument grounding)
module.
Field Side
Connections
140 ACO 020 00
Signals
Monitor 1 (+)
S1
Jumper
(See jumper information below)
VO 1
Field
Device
140 ACO 020 00
Current Out
(Sinking)
CO 1
I Sink (+)
V 1+
V 1I Source 1 (-)
Common 1 (-)
1-
Jumper
S2
Monitor 2 (+)
Output 2 (+)
VO 2
Field
Device
140 AVO 020 00
Voltage Out
CO 2
I Sink (+) 2
V 2+
V 2I Source 2 (-)
Common 2 (-)
2S3
Monitor 3 (+)
Output 3 (+)
VO 3
Field
Device
140 ACO 020 00
Current Out
(Sourcing)
CO 3
I Sink (+) 3
V 3+
Jumper
V 3I Source 3 (-)
Common 3 (-)
3S4
VO 4
CO 4
V 4+
V 44GND
RET
For 140 ACO 020 00
operation only
V+
CableFast Cabling
l
l
l
l
S1 to V1 - to 1 S2 to V2
S3 to V3 CO3 to V3+
Note: 1. When used with the 140 AVO 020 00 analog voltage out module, the
master override connections and range select must be made on the Quantum I/O
connector. 2. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-tochannel isolation of input points. 3. For the required jumper options for the 140
ACO 020 00 and the AVO 020 00, refer to those maps. 4. The GND (ground)
terminal point is not connected.
861
CableFast Cabling
Wiring Diagram
(Chassis
Grounding)
The following shows the wiring for the 140 CFK 004 00 (chassis grounding) module.
Field Side
Connections
140 ACO 020 00
Signals
Monitor 1 (+)
S1
Jumper
(See jumper information below)
VO 1
Field
Device
140 ACO 020 00
Current Out
(Sinking)
CO 1
I Sink (+)
V 1+
V 1I Source 1 (-)
Common 1 (-)
1-
Jumper
S2
Monitor 2 (+)
Output 2 (+)
VO 2
Field
Device
140 AVO 020
00
Voltage Out
CO 2
I Sink (+) 2
V 2+
V 2I Source 2 (-)
Common 2 (-)
2S3
Monitor 3 (+)
Output 3 (+)
VO 3
Field
Device
140 ACO 020 00
Current Out
(Sourcing)
CO 3
I Sink (+) 3
V 3+
Jumper
V 3I Source 3 (-)
Common 3 (-)
Shield
3S4
VO 4
CO 4
V 4+
V 44GND
RET
For 140 ACO 020 00
operation only
V+
CableFast Cabling
Jumper Connections
l S1 to S2 to S3 to S4
l V1 - to 1 l CO3 to V3+
Note: 1. When used with the 140 AVO 020 00 analog voltage out module, the
master override connections and range select must be made on the Quantum I/O
connector. 2. When using a single power supply, there will be no channel-tochannel isolation of input points. 3. For wiring the 140 ACO 020 00 and the 140
AVO 020 00, refer to those maps. 4. The GND (ground) terminal point is not
connected.
863
CableFast Cabling
CableFast Cables
Overview
This section provides CableFast cable specifications, cable lengths, inner wire color
codes (for standard and high power cables), cable selections, and accessories.
Cable
Specifications
Table
The following table shows the specifications for the CableFast system.
Standard Power
Cable Diameter
Number of Conductors
8-#20 AWG (0.8 mm), 7/28 tinned annealed copper; semi rigid
PVC32-#26 AWG (0.4 mm), 7/34 tinned annealed copper; semi
rigid PVC
High Power
Cable Diameter
Number of Conductors
8-#18 AWG (1.0 mm), 16/30 tinned annealed copper; semi rigid
PVC32-#20 AWG (0.8 mm), 10/30 tinned annealed copper; semi
rigid PVC
Common Specifications
Cable Jacket
Wire Marking
300 V, 105 degrees C UL rated 2517, CSA Type AWM 1/2 FT1
Cable Rating
Shielding
Agency Approval
864
Wire Rating
UL-758; AWM style 2517 VW-1 and CSA C22:210.2; AWM I/II A/B
FT1
CableFast Cabling
Cable Lengths
Table
The following table shows the cable lengths for the CableFast system.
Cable Lengths
Terminated
Pigtail
Standard
Power
High
Power
3 ft. (0.91 m)
6 ft. (1.82 m)
9 ft. (2.73 m)
12 ft. (3.64 m)
15 ft. (4.6 m)
High
Power
865
CableFast Cabling
The following table provides the wire color codes for standard power and high power
cables.
Wire/
Pin #
AWG for
High
Power
Cable
Color
Wire/
Pin #
AWG for
Standard
Power
Cable
AWG for
High
Power
Cable
Color
26
20
Black
21
26
20
White/
Blue
26
20
Brown
22
26
20
White/
Violet
26
20
Red
23
26
20
White/
Gray
26
20
Orange
24
26
20
White/
Black/
Brown
26
20
Yellow
25
26
20
White/
Black/
Red
26
20
Green
26
26
20
White/
Black/
Orange
26
20
Blue
27
26
20
White/
Black/
Yellow
26
20
Violet
28
26
20
White/
Black/
Green
20
18
Black
29
20
20
Yellow
10
20
18
Brown
30
20
18
Green
11
26
20
Gray
31
26
18
White/
Black/
Blue
12
26
20
White
32
26
20
White/
Black/
Violet
13
26
20
White/
Black
33
26
20
White/
Black/
Gray
14
866
AWG for
Standard
Power
Cable
26
20
White/
Brown
34
26
20
White/
Brown/
Red
CableFast Cabling
15
20
White/
Red
35
26
20
White/
Brown/
Orange
16
26
20
White/
Orange
36
26
20
White/
Brown/
Yellow
17
26
20
White/
Yellow
37
26
20
White/
Brown/
Green
18
26
20
White/
Green
38
26
20
White/
Brown/
Blue
19
20
18
Red
39
20
18
Blue
20
Cable Selections
(XTS) Table
26
20
18
Orange
40
20
18
Violet
The following table shows the 140 XTS 0xx terminated cables.
Cable Type
Part Number
Standard
Power
Cable Description
High
Power
867
CableFast Cabling
I/O Connector
Figure
The following figure shows the I/O Connector for the Quantum system.
Quantum I/O
Connector
50-pin D
Connector
See cable lengths
in the above table.
The following table shows the 140 XTS 102 xx Pigtail cable description.
Cable Type
Part Number
High Power
Cable Description
Pigtail Leads
Figure
Standard Power
50-pin D
Connector
See cable
lengths
868
CableFast Cabling
The following table shows the 140 XTS 102 xx Pigtail cables.
Cable Type
Part Number
Cable Description
I/O Connector
Figure
High Power
Standard Power
The following figure shows the I/O connector for pigtail leads.
Quantum I/O
Connector
40 Color Coded
Pigtail Leads
See cable lengths
in the above table.
869
CableFast Cabling
Accessories
Table
The following table shows the part numbers and descriptions for CableFast
Accessories.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
10
10
10
10
Terminal Block
Common Strip
Figure
Fuse
Replacement
Part and Figure
Description
Quantity
10
870
The following table shows the error stopped codes for the Quantum system.
Error Stopped
Codes Table
The following table shows the error stopped codes for the Quantum system.
Stop Bit
Code (hex)
Description
7FFF
PLC unhealthy
8000
PLC stopped
4000
2000
PLC unconfigured
1000
0800
0400
0200
0100
0080
0040
0020
0010
0008
0002
0001
0004
Bad configuration
871
872
Agency Approvals
Agency Approvals
Overview
The following tables provide the agency approvals and also include the conformal
coating availability of the indicated Quantum products.
Power Supplies
Table
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the power supplies of the indicated Quantum products.
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
Pending
Pending
Pending
Pending
873
Agency Approvals
CPUs Table
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the CPUs of the indicated Quantum products.
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
Pending
Pending
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the DIO drops of the indicated Quantum products.
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
874
Agency Approvals
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the RIO Heads and Drops of the indicated Quantum products.
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
NOA Table
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the NOA of the indicated Quantum products.
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
140 NOA 611 00
140 NOA 611 10
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
n
Pending
Pending
n
n
Factory Mutual CE
Class I, Div 2
875
Agency Approvals
NOEs Table
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the NOEs of the indicated Quantum products.
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
Pending
Pending
Pending
Pending
Pending
NOMs Table
Pending
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the NOMs of the indicated Quantum products.
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
Hot Standby
Table
Pending
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the Hot Standby of the indicated Quantum products.
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
140 CHS 110 00
876
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
Agency Approvals
Counters Table
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the Counters of the indicated Quantum products
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
ASCII Interface
Table
n
n
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the ASCII Interface of the indicated Quantum products
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
140 ESI 062 10
High Speed
Interrupts Table
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
Pending
Pending
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the High Speed Interrupt of the indicated Quantum products
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
140 HLI 340 00
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
877
Agency Approvals
Single Axis
Motion Table
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the Single Axis Motion of the indicated Quantum products
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
Simulators Table
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the Simulators of the indicated Quantum products
Simulators
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
Pending
Battery Module
Table
n
n
CE
Pending
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the Battery module of the indicated Quantum products
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
140 XCP 900 00
878
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
Pending
Agency Approvals
I/O Table
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the I/O of the indicated Quantum products
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
Pending
Pending
Pending
Pending
879
Agency Approvals
Pending
Pending
Backplanes
Table
The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability
for the I/O of the indicated Quantum products
Quantum Part
Numbers
Conformally
Coated
Version
Availabilty
UL 508
CSA 22.2142
C-UL
Factory Mutual
Class I, Div 2
CE
880
Index
A
ACI 030 00 (Analog Input 8 Channel
Unipolar module)
specifications, 394
wiring diagram, 397
ACI 040 00, 398
ACO 020 00
register assignments
analog output modules
ACO 020 00
register assignments,
721
ACO 020 00 (analog output 4 channel
current module)
specifications, 403
voltmeter monitor specifications, 405
wiring diagram, 406
ACO 130 00
register assignments
analog output modules
ACO 130 00
register assignments,
724
707
ARI 030 10
register assignments
ARI 030 10
register assignments,
AVI 030 00
register assignments, 717
708
ANM 090 00
register assignments
linear measuring ranges, 728
ANM 090 00 (Analog input/output module)
wiring diagram, 416
ANM 090 00 (analog input/output module)
specifications, 412
ARI 030 10 (RTD input 8 channel module)
specifications, 419
wiring diagram, 421
ATI 030 00
measurement ranges, 714
register assignments
measurement ranges
analog input modules
ATI 030 00
register assignments,
712
ATI 030 00 (thermocouple input 8 channel
module)
specifications, 423
wiring diagram, 425
AVI 030 00
register assignments
linear measuring ranges, 719
AVI 030 00 (analog in 8 channel bipolar
module)
specifications, 428
linear measuring ranges, 429
wiring diagram, 430
AVO 020 00
register assignments
analog output modules
AVO 020 00
881
Index
register assignments, 722
AVO 020 00 (analog out 4 channel module)
specifications, 432
wiring diagram, 435
backplane specifications
four position, 641
six position, 642
sixteen position, 644
ten position, 643
three position, 640
two position, 639
backplanes
mounting hardware specifications, 638
selection, 638
specifications, 44
CPU 434 12A, 138
CPU 534 14A, 162
CPU blinking Run LED error codes, 89
CPU description, 4
CPU front panel switches, 92, 156
ASCII comm port parameter setting, 92,
159
comm port parameter setting, 160
RTU setting, 93, 159
CPU rear panel rotary switches, 93, 132
address settings
SW1, 93
CableFast
140 CFA 040 00
wiring diagram, 775
140 CFB 032 00
wiring diagrams, 780
140 CFC 032 00
wiring diagrams, 782
140 CFD 032 00
wiring diagram, 802
140 CFE 032 00
wiring diagram, 809
140 CFG 016 00
wiring diagram, 816
140 CFH 008 00
wiring diagram, 829
140 CFI 008 00
wiring diagram, 839
140 CFJ 004 00
wiring diagram, 849
140 CFK 004 00
wiring diagram, 858
system specificaitons, 766
terminal block descriptions, 769
terminal block features, 770
terminal block stacking convention, 770
882
SW2, 93
CPU specifications
CPU 113 02 256 k 1xModus Plus, 87
CPU 213 04 (CPU 768 k 1xModbus
Plus), 107
CPU 424 02 (CPU 2 M 2xModbus Plus,
117
CPU 434 12 (CPU), 127
CRA 21X 10
LED topology and descriptions, 207
CRA 21X 20
LED topology and descriptions, 212
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
Index
D
DAI 340 00 (AC input 24 Vac 16x1 module)
specifications, 437
wiring diagram, 438
DAI 353 00 (AC input 24 Vac 4x8 module)
specifications, 440
wiring diagram, 442
DAI 440 00 (AC input 48 Vac 16x1 module)
specifications, 447
wiring diagram, 449
DAI 453 00 (AC input 48 Vac 4x8 module)
specifications, 452
wiring diagram, 454
DAI 540 00 AC input 115 Vac 16x1 module)
specifications, 457
wiring diagram, 459
DAI 543 00 (AC input 115 Vac 2x8 module)
specifications, 462
wiring diagram, 464
DAI 553 00 (AC input 115 Vac 4x8 module)
specifications, 467
wiring diagram, 469
DAI 740 00 (AC input 230 Vac 16x1 module)
specifications, 472
wiring diagram, 473
DAI 753 00 (AC input 230 Vac 4x8 module)
specifications, 476
wiring diagram, 477
DAM 590 00 (AC input/output 115 Vac 16/1
module)
fuse locations, 482
specifications, 478
wiring diagram, 484
DAO 840 00 (AC output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1
module)
specifications, 486
wiring diagram, 488
DAO 840 10 (AC output 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1
module)
specifications, 490
wiring diagram, 493, 499
DAO 842 10 (AC output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4
module)
specifications, 496
DAO 842 20 (AC output 24 ... 48 Vac 4x4
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
module)
fuse locations, 504
specifications, 502
wiring diagram, 505
DAO 853 00 (AC output 230 Vac 4x8
module)
specifications, 508
wiring diagram, 511
DDI 153 10 (input 5 Vdc 4x8 source module)
specifications, 514
wiring diagram, 516
DDI 353 00 (DC input 24 Vdc 4x8 sink
module)
specifications, 517
wiring diagram, 519
DDI 353 10 (DC output 24 Vdc true 4x8 sink
module)
specifications, 521
wiring diagram, 522
DDI 364 00, 524
DDI 673 00 (DC input 124 Vdc 3x8 sink
module)
specifications, 530
minimum version level support, 532
wiring diagram, 534
DDI 841 00 (DC input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 sink
module)
specifications, 537
wiring diagram, 538
DDI 853 00 (DC input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 sink
module)
specifications, 541
wiring diagram, 542
DDM 390 00 (DC input/output 24 Vdc 16/8
sink/source module)
fuse locations, 547
specifications, 544
wiring diagram, 549
DDM 690 00 (125 Vdc input/high power
output module)
specifications, 552
minimum version level support, 555
wiring diagram, 556
DDM 690 00 125 Vdc Input/High Output
module
register assignments, 701
883
Index
17
DIO modules
description
network interface modules
description, 6
DIO modules (CRA 21X 10)
module specifications, 205
DIO modules (CRA 21X 20)
module specifications, 210
DIO modules CRA 21X 10
rear panel rotary switches
DIO modules CRA 21X 10
rear panel rotary switches
address settings
SW1 and SW2,
207
212
discrete input (16-point) modules
module zoom selections, 684
register assignments, 684
discrete input (24-point) modules
I/O map status byte, 685
module zoom selections, 685
register assignments, 684
discrete input (96-point) modules
register assignments, 687
discrete input/output (16/8 point) modules
register assignments, 703
discrete output (16-point) modules
register assignments, 688
discrete output (32-point) modules
register assignments, 689
discrete output (96-point) modules
register assignments, 691
DRA 840 00 (relay output 16x1 normally
open module)
specifications, 596
wiring diagram, 598
DRC 830 00 (relay output 8x1 normally
open/normally closed module)
specifications, 601
wiring diagram, 603
DVO 853 00 32 point 10 - 30 Vdc Output
module
register assignments, 695
DIO
884
Index
EHC 105 00
specifications, 275
wiring diagram, 278
EHC 202 00
counting pulses, 287
counting pulses and turning outputs on
and off, 287
operations, 732
overview and features, 280
rate sampling, 287
rollover example
pulse input
count down, 288
count up, 288
rollover examples
quadrature input
count down, 289
count up, 289
specifications, 281
timing diagrams, 285
timing parameter table, 285
wiring diagram
signal descriptions and usage, 290
EHC 202 00 High Speed Counter
wiring diagram 1, 752
wiring diagram 2, 754
wiring diagram 3, 756
EHC 202 00) specifications
fuse location, 282
ESI 062 10
description, 293
front panel connectors and switches, 297
LED blinking sequence, 296
specifications, 294
Status LED crash codes, 296
Ethernet TCP/IP module
description, 6
hardware specifications
CPUs
part numbers
CPUs, 37
I/O modules
part number
I/O modules, 40
intelligent/special purpose modules
ASCII interface module
F
front panel connectors and switches
front panel push button, 298
RS-232 serial ports
serial port setup, 298
part number
intelligent/special purpose modules
ASCII interface module, 39
counter modules
part number
intelligent/special purpose modules
counter modules, 39
40
networking modules
DIO heads/drops
part numbers
networking modules
DIO drops, 37
38
38
Index
part numbers
networking modules
NOM modules,
38
RIO heads/drops
part numbers
networking modules
RIO heads/drops,
37
power supplies for local and RIO drops
part numbers
power supplies, 36
high speed counters
EHC 202 00
register assignments
EHC 202 00
high speed counters,
731
HLI 340 00 (24 Vdc 16x1 sink/source
module), 300
HLI 340 00 (24 Vdc 16x1 sink/source
module) wiring diagram, 302
I
I/O LED descriptions, 382
I/O module field wiring minimum gauge/
maximum gauge, 380
I/O modules
description, 4
I/O modules with operating voltages
between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc
static sensitive designation
label illustration
system specifications
storage conditions,
31
I/O terminal strip mounting procedure, 653
intelligent/special purpose I/O modules
description, 7
InterBus interface module
description)
network interface modules
interbus interface
description,
6
intrinsically safe analog module
specifications, 323
intrinsically safe analog output module (140
886
L
LED topology and descriptions
24 point input module, 383
32 point I/O module, 383
bi-directional modules, 384
CHS 110 00
CHS 110 00
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
Index
Led topology and descriptions, 45
CPU module, 88, 129
discrete 12 point module with fault
indication, 387
discrete 16 point and analog I/O point,
382
EHC 105 00
EHC 105 00
Led topology and descriptions, 277
EHC 202 00
EHC 202 00
LED topology and descriptions, 283
ESI 062 10
ESI 062 10
LED topology and descriptions, 295
NOA 611 00
NOA 611 00
LED topology and descriptions, 261
NOE 2X1 00
NOE 2X1 00
LED topology and descriptions, 250
NOE 3X1 00
NOE 3X1 00
LED topology and descriptions, 254
NOE 5X1 00
NOE 5X1 00
led topology and description, 258
NOL 911 X0.
NOL 911 X0
LED topology and descriptions, 266
NOM 252 00
NOM 252
LED topology and descriptions, 225
RIO Drop modules (CRA 93X 00)
RIO Drop module (CRA 93X 00)
LED topology and descriptions, 188
RIO head modules (CRP 93X 00)
RIO modules (CRP 93X 00, CRP 93X
00)I, 178
local I/O configurations
descriptions, 12
LonWorks module
description
network interface modules
LonWorks module
description, 7
M
miscellaneous components
backplanes
backplanes
part numbers, 618
cabling
cabling
part numbers, 618
mounting brackets
mounting brackets
part numbers, 618
part numbers, 619
MMS
interface module
description
network modules
MMS interface
description,
6
Modbus and Modbus Plus communication,
27
Modbus
description, 27
Modbus Plus
description, 28
table of Quantum Modbus and Modbus
Plus services., 29
Modbus connector
25-pin, 312
9-pin, 312
Modbus connector pinouts
nine-pin connections, 94
Modbus connector pinouts
25-pin connections, 160
Modbus enactor pinouts
25-pin connections, 94
Modsoft I/O status tables, 681
module mounting procedure, 651
installing strip jumper clips, 653
module door, 655
mounting jumper clips, 653
module status register
description
Quantum menu entry, 682
mounting brackets
selection
mounting brackets
mounting
hardware
specifications,
887
Index
645
mounting specifications
125 mm mounting bracket, 646
20 mm mounting bracket, 647
MSX 101
LED descriptions
MSX 101 10
front panel indicators, 310
MSX 101 00
front panel connectors
servo connector
MSX module front panel connectors
servo connector
signals, 313
Modbus connector
front panel connectors
Modbus connector (RS-232),
312
operational specifications
servo, 305
rear panel switches
RS-232 serial port
MSX 101 00
rear panel switches
slide switch settings,
314
MSX modules
MSB 101 00
MSX modules
MSC 101 00,
304
N
network interface modules
description, 5
Ethernet TCP/IP
description, 6
network interface techniques
direct CPU driver
description, 23
I/O map interface
description, 24
option module interface
description, 23
summary table of Quantum
communications and networking
modules., 26
NOA 611 00
front panel connections and controls, 261
888
NOA 611 x0
specifications, 260
NOE 2X1 00
installation, 250
locating the global address label, 251
specifications, 249
NOE 3X1 00
specifications, 253
NOE 5X1 00
specifications, 257
NOL 911 X0
indicator status, 267
specifications, 271
NOM 252 00
connecting the NOM 252 00 on fiber and
repairing the break in the network
adding a new node to the network,
244
repairing a break in the cable, 244
245
connecting the NOM 252 00 on fiber
andrepairing the break in the network,
244
fiber cable clasps
description and connection, 233
fiber optic cable ports
description, 231
fiber optic overview and configuraitons
point-to-point, 235
fiber optic overview and configurations,
235
bus configuration
mixed fiber optic/copper network, 236
self healing ring configuraiton, 240
tree and star configurations, 237
fiber optic overview and ocnfigurations
self healing ring configuraiotn
hot standby systems example, 241
front panel switches, 226
ASCII comm port parameter setting,
226
Comm Port parameter setting, 227
RTU setting, 227
Modus connector pinouts
nine-pin connections
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
Index
NOM 252 00
Modbus connector pinouts
25-pin connections, 229
twisted-pair wiring
description
network interface modules
NOM
twisted-pair wiring
description, 6
P
power and grounding considerations
configuration diagram
125 Vdc powered systems, 667
AC powered systems, 659
AC powered systems for CE
compliance, 663
DC powered systems, 660
power and grounding guidelines
chassis grounding
AWG wire rating
power and grounding guidelines
power supply ground connections
AWG wire rating
, 675
other equipment grounding, 676
power supply ground connection, 675
systems with multiple power feeds, 676
power supplies
considerations, 670
description, 3
redundant, 3
power supply
CPS 114 10 (summable AC power
supply 115/230 Vac 8A)
wiring diagram, 59
CPS 124 00 (redundant AC power supply
115/230 Vac 8A)
wiring diagram and operating curve,
62
CPS 211 00 (DC power supply 24 Vac
3A)
wiring diagram and operating curve,
65
CPS 214 00 (DC power supply 24 Vac
8A)
wiring diagram and hold-up capacitor
timing chart, 68
CPS 224 00 (redundant DC power
supply 24 Vac 8A)
wiring diagram and hold-up capacitor
timing chart, 71
CPS 414 00 (DC summable power
supply 48 ... 60 Vac 8A)
wiring diagram and hold-up capacitor
timing chart, 74
power supply field wiring
minimum gauge/maximum gauge
LED topology and descriptions
power supply, 50
power supply specifications
CPS 111 00 (AC power supply 115/230
Vac, 3A
wiring diagram and operating curve,
53
CPS 111 00 (AC power supply 115/230
Vac, 3A), 51
CPS 114 00 (AC power supply 115/230
Vac, 8A
wiring diagram and operating curve,
56
CPS 114 00 (AC power supply 115/230
889
Index
Vac, 8A), 55
CPS 114 10 (summable AC power
supply 115/230 Vac, 8A), 58
CPS 124 00 (redundant AC power supply
115/230 Vac, 8A), 61
CPS 211 00 (DC power supply 24 Vac,
3A), 64
CPS 214 00 (DC power supply 24 Vac,
8A), 67
CPS 224 00 (redundant DC power
supply 24 Vac, 8A), 70
CPS 414 00 (DC summable power
supply 48 ... 60 Vac, 8A), 73
CPS 424 00 (DC redundant power
supply 48 Vac, 8A)
wiring diagram and hold-up capacitor
timing chart., 77
CPS 424 00 (DC redundant power
supply, 48 Vac, 8A), 76
CPS 511 00 (DC power supply, 125 Vac,
3A
wiring diagram, 81
CPS 511 00 (DC power supply, 125 Vac,
3A), 80
CPS 524 00 (DC power supply 125 Vac,
8A, 83
CPS 524 00 (DC power supply 125 Vac,
8A)
wiring diagram, 84
primary module/terminal strip key codes, 389
R
RA 93X 00)
blinking COM Act LED error codes, 189
redundant power supplies
description, 673
RIO configuration
example
dual cable
RIO configuration
example
single cable,
13
RIO Drop module (CRA 93X 00)
LED topology and descriptions, 189
RIO drop module (CRA 93X 00)
module specifications, 187
RIO drop module (CRA 93X 00) rear panel
rotary switches
address settings
SW1 and SW2, 189
RIO head module (CRP 93X 00)
blinking COM Act LED error codes, 179
module description, 176
module specifications, 177
RIO in a Hot Standby configuration
example
dual cable
RIO in a Hot Standby configuration
example
single cable, 14
Q
Quantum Automation Series block diagram,
2
Quantum configurations, 10
distributed I/O
Quantum configurations
DIO, 10
local I/O, 10
remote I/O
Quantum configurations
RIO, 10
Quantum I/O configuration
using the I/O Map utility
Modsoft register assignments
890
RIO modules
description
network interface modules
RIO
description,
S
secondary keying and backplane position
codes, 391
servo connector signals, 314
specifications, 300
Index
XSM 010 00
generic wiring diagram, 368
specifications, 367
XSM 010 00 analog simulator
description, 7
SY/MAX-Ethernet
description, 6
system configurations
configurations, 10
system overview
Quantum Series overview, 2
system spacing requirements
dimensions
system spacing requirements
spacing, 649
summary, 649
system specifications
AC/DC power supplies, 31
electrical, 31
I/O modules with operating voltages
between 24 Vac or Vdc, 31
I/O modules with operating voltages
greater than 48 Vac or Vdc, 31
I/O modules with operating voltages less
than 24 Vac or Vdc, 31
mechanical, 31
T
terminal strip/module keying
description, 388
primary, 388
secondary, 388
true high circuit
current sinking
true low circuit
current sourcing, 392
X
XSM 002 00 discrete simulator
description, 7
840 USE 100 00 May 2001
891
Index
892